GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

322
 GENERAL MATERI AL S A ND WOR K MANSHI P SPECIFICATION VOLUME 2  A RCHITECTURA L WORK S ISSUE NO. 5 JANUARY 2011

Transcript of GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 1/322

 

GENERALMATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

SPECIFICATION

VOLUME 2

 ARCHITECTURAL WORKS 

ISSUE NO. 5

JANUARY 2011

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 2/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 3/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification (i) January 2011Issue No. 5

GENERAL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SPECIFICATION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL WORKS

Section 1 General – Civil and Structural Works

2 Temporary Works

3 Site Clearance

4 Landscaping Works

5 Fencing

6 Drainage Works

7 Earthworks

8 Geotechnical Works

9 Carriageways: Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials

10 Concrete Carriageways

11 Miscellaneous Roadworks

12 Traffic Signs, Road Markings and Road Studs

13 Work for Electrical and Mechanical Installations

14 Water Supply Pipeworks

15 Not Used

16 Not Used

17 Piling Works

18 Formwork and Finishes to Concrete

19 Steel Reinforcement

20 Concrete and Joints in Concrete

21 Prestressing

22 Steelwork

23 Bridgeworks

24 Water Retaining Structures

VOLUME 2 ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

Section  25 General – Architectural Works

26 Masonry and Blockwork

27 Waterproofing and Tanking

28 Roofing and Wall Cladding

29 Curtain Walling

30 Internal Cladding Systems

31 Carpentry and Joinery

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 4/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification (ii) January 2011Issue No. 5

VOLUME 2 ARCHITECTURAL WORKS (CONTINUED)

Section 32 Internal Cladding Systems

33 Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions and Toilet Cubicles

34 Suspended Ceilings

35 Architectural Metalwork (Including Metal Doors and Shutters)

36 Ironmongery

37 Hard Floor Finishes

38 Flexible Floor Finishes

39 Wall Finishes

40 Painting and Decoration

41 Fire Protection and Fire Stopping Systems

42 Signage

43 Not Used

VOLUME 3 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORKS

Section 44 Abbreviations, Standards and General – Electrical and Mechanical

45 Electrical Power Supply

46 Low Voltage Switchboards

47 Sub-Mains Electrical Distribution Equipment

48 Wiring and Cables

49 Cable Management Systems

50 Wiring Accessories and Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment

51 General Lighting Systems

52 Uninterruptible Power Supply System (UPS)

53 Motors

54 High Voltage Electrical Services

55 Not Used

56 Not Used

57 Earthing and Bonding System

58 Lightning Protection System

59 Electromagnetic Compatibility

60 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning - Electrical Services

61 Air Handling Units

62 Fan Coil Units

63 Fans

64 Split Type Air Conditioning Unit

65 Window Type Air Conditioning Unit

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 5/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 6/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification (iv) January 2011Issue No. 5

VOLUME 3 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORKS (CONTINUED)

Section 102 Voice and Data Cabling

103 Public Address System

104 Access Control System

105 Trunked Mobile Radio System

106 Closed Circuit Television System

107 Master Antenna Television (MATV)

108 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning Systems

109 Not Used

110 Not Used 

111 Not Used 

112 Not Used 

113 Not Used 

114 Not Used 

115 Not Used 

116 Not Used 

117 Not Used 

118 Not Used 

119 Not Used 

VOLUME 4 AIRFIELD WORKS

Section 120 General - Airfield Works

121 Airfield Ground Lighting System

122 Airport Lightning Warning System

123 Fixed Ground Power System

124 High Mast Lighting system

125 Pre-conditioned Air Supply Units

126 Aircraft Parking Aid System

127 Airfield Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System

128 Aircraft Loading Bridges

129 Perimeter Fence Lighting System

130 Jet Blast Screens

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 7/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksTable of Contents 1/5 January 2011

GENERAL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP SPECIFICATION

VOLUME 2 – ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

SECTION 25 GENERAL – ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

25.1 Definition25.2 Relevant Codes and Standards

SECTION 26 MANSONRY AND BLOCKWORK

26.1 General26.2 Not Used26.3 Relevant Codes and Standards26.4 Design and Performance Criteria26.5 Materials

26.6 Submissions26.7 Workmanship26.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning

SECTION 27 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING 

27.1 General27.2 Not Used27.3 Relevant Codes and Standards27.4 Design and Performance Criteria27.5 Materials

27.6 Submissions27.7 Workmanship27.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning27.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 28 ROOFING AND WALL CLADDING

28.1 General28.2 Not Used28.3 Relevant Codes and Standards28.4 Design and Performance Criteria28.5 Materials28.6 Submissions28.7 Workmanship28.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning28.9 Operations and Maintenance

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 8/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksTable of Contents 2/5 January 2011

SECTION 29 CURTAIN WALLING

29.1 General29.2 Not Used29.3 Relevant Codes and Standards29.4 Design and Performance Criteria29.5 Materials29.6 Submissions29.7 Workmanship29.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning29.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 30 INTERNAL CLADDING SYSTEMS

30.1 General30.2 Not Used

30.3 Relevant Codes and Standards30.4 Design and Performance Criteria30.5 Materials30.6 Submissions30.7 Workmanship30.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning30.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 31 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

31.1 General

31.2 Not Used31.3 Relevant Codes and Standards31.4 Not Used31.5 Materials31.6 Submissions31.7 Workmanship31.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning

SECTION 32 GLAZING, GLAZED SCREENS, BALUSTRADE AND HANDRAILS

32.1 General

32.2 Not Used32.3 Relevant Codes and Standards32.4 Design and Performance Criteria32.5 Materials32.6 Submissions32.7 Workmanship32.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning32.9 Operations and Maintenance

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 9/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksTable of Contents 3/5 January 2011

SECTION 33 LININGS, SHEATHINGS, DRYWALL PARTITIONS AND TOILETCUBICLES

33.1 General33.2 Not Used33.3 Relevant Codes and Standards33.4 Design and Performance Criteria33.5 Materials33.6 Submissions33.7 Workmanship33.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning33.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 34 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

34.1 General

34.2 Not Used34.3 Relevant Codes and Standards34.4 Design and Performance Criteria34.5 Materials34.6 Submissions34.7 Workmanship34.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning34.9 Operations and Maintenance34.10 Spare Parts and Special Tools

SECTION 35 ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK (INCLUDING METAL DOORS

 AND SHUTTERS)

35.1 General35.2 Not Used35.3 Relevant Codes and Standards35.4 Design and Performance Criteria35.5 Materials35.6 Submissions35.7 Workmanship35.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning35.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 36 IRONMONGERY

36.1 General36.2 Not Used36.3 Relevant Codes and Standards36.4 Design and Performance Criteria36.5 Materials36.6 Submissions36.7 Workmanship36.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning36.9 Operations and Maintenance

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 10/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksTable of Contents 4/5 January 2011

SECTION 37 HARD FLOOR FINISHES

37.1 General37.2 Not Used37.3 Relevant Codes and Standards37.4 Design and Performance Criteria37.5 Materials37.6 Submissions37.7 Workmanship37.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning37.9 Operations and Maintenance37.10 Spare Parts and Special Tools

SECTION 38 FLEXIBLE FLOOR FINISHES

38.1 General

38.2 Not Used38.3 Relevant Codes and Standards38.4 Design and Performance Criteria38.5 Materials38.6 Submissions38.7 Workmanship38.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning38.9 Operations and Maintenance38.10 Spare Parts and Special Tools

SECTION 39 WALL FINISHES

39.1 General39.2 Not Used39.3 Relevant Codes and Standards39.4 Design and Performance Criteria39.5 Materials39.6 Submissions39.7 Workmanship39.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning39.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 40 PAINTING AND DECORATION

40.1 General40.2 Not Used40.3 Relevant Codes and Standards40.4 Design and Performance Criteria40.5 Materials40.6 Submissions40.7 Workmanship40.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning40.9 Operations and Maintenance

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 11/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksTable of Contents 5/5 January 2011

SECTION 41 FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS

41.1 General41.2 Not Used41.3 Relevant Codes and Standards41.4 Design and Performance Criteria41.5 Materials41.6 Submissions41.7 Workmanship41.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning

SECTION 42 SIGNAGE

42.1 General42.2 Not Used42.3 Relevant Codes and Standards

42.4 Design and Performance Criteria42.5 Materials42.6 Submissions42.7 Workmanship42.8 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning42.9 Operations and Maintenance

SECTION 43 NOT USED

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 12/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 13/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/2 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 25 – General – Architectural Works

SECTION 25 GENERAL – ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

25.1 DEFINITIONS & ABBREVIATIONS

25.1.1 Definitions

Words and expressions, to which meanings have been assigned in the GeneralConditions and General Specification, shall have the same meanings in thisvolume.

25.1.2 Abbreviations

 Abbreviations in this volume shall have the following meanings:

 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association

 ACI American Concrete Institution Standard AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

 ANSI American National Standards Institute

 AS Australian Standard

 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

BRE UK Building Research Establishment

BS British Standard

BSI British Standard Institution

CP British Standard Code of Practice

CS Construction StandardDIN German Standard

DN Nominal size

EN European Standard

FGL Finished ground level, or finished level of permanent works

FSD Fire Services Department of Hong Kong

GEO Geotechnical Engineering Office, Civil Engineering Department

(Hong Kong Government)

HOKLAS Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme

HSFG High strength friction grip

MR Moisture Resistant

NEN Nederlands Normalisatie-instituut

ISO International Organization for Standardization

OPC Ordinary Portland Cement

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

PD British Standard Public Document

PFA Pulverized fuel ash

PNAP Practice Note for Authorized Persons (current edition)

PPFA Portland pulverized fuel ash

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 14/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/2 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 25 – General – Architectural Works

RAL Colour Standard

RHPC Rapid hardening Portland cement

SIS Swedish Standard

SRPC Sulphate resisting Portland cement

25.2 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

The Standards and Codes of Practice specified in this volume are for informationonly. The Contractor shall comply with the edition of the Standard or Code ofPractice listed in the text when stated, or the latest edition when no edition is listed.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 15/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

SECTION 26 MASONRY AND BLOCKWORK

26.1 GENERAL

This section covers the use of stone, brickwork, blockwork and pre-cast concreteelements used in wall construction and the associated accessories needed. Thematerials specified below shall comply with the sections stated below, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(a) metalwork accessories refer to section 35;

(b) wall finishes refer to section 39;

(c) painting and decoration refer to section 40;

(d) cement refer to concrete section 20;

(e) water refer to concrete section 20; and

(f) steelwork supports refer to steelwork section 22.

26.2 NOT USED

26.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 12 Specification for Portland cements

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 812 Part 1 Methods for determination and testing of particleaggregates size and shape

BS 890 Building limes

BS 1199 and 1200 Specification for building sands from naturalsources

BS 1217 Cast Stone

BS 1243 Metal ties for cavity wall construction

BS 3921 Clay bricks and blocksBS 4551 Methods of testing mortars, screeds and plasters

BS 4887 Mortar admixtures

BS 5390 Code of practice for stone masonry

BS 5492 Code of practice for internal plastering

BS 5628:Part 1 Un-reinforced Masonry

BS 5977 Specification for Prefabricated Lintels

BS 6073 Part 1 Precast concrete masonry units

BS 6358 Damp proof coursesBS 8000 Workmanship on Site

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 16/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

BS 8215 Code of practice for the design and installation ofdamp proof courses.

BS EN 845-1 Specification for ancillary components formasonry. Ties, tension straps, hangers andbrackets

CP 111 and CP 121:Part 1 Brickwork and blockwork generally

26.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

26.4.1 Construct ion tolerances

The Contractor shall ensure that construction tolerances for masonry and blockworkare in accordance with BS 5628 Part 1.

26.4.2 Contractor ’s design

(a) In the event that either or both of the following items are included in thePermanent Works:

(i) special pre-cast concrete features; and/or

(ii) stone cladding and special stone features,

(b) the Contractor shall design the features or cladding.

(c) The Contractor shall design the masonry and blockwork walls, including allmullions, fixings, lintels, reinforcement, openings, holes, joints, movement joints and other features to complete the walls. The thickness of the walls shallnot exceed the nominal sizes shown on the Employer’s Drawings. The designshall consider all load conditions. Mullions shall be designed so that thecompleted width, including any fire protection, is not greater than theblockwork or masonry width. Lintels shall be provided wherever the openingwidth exceeds the length of one brick or block.

(d) The Contractor shall ensure that its design takes fully into account and reflectsall requirements for penetrations through blockwork or brickwork necessary toaccommodate building services and systems, ducts, pipes, cables,containment and all related such equipment. The contractor shall ensure thatrequirements in this respect are full coordinated with the final resolvedservices and systems installation arrangements prepared by the services /systems installer(s) once the latter has been submitted and reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

(e) The Contractor shall take into account all movements that may occur in thestructure upon which the walls in question are founded and to which they abutand define explicitly upon its design / construction drawings the anticipatedscale of movement allowed and the means of accomodating such allowances.

(f) The Contractor shall submit full details of the walling along with explicit /complete calculations defining all loading conditions and demonstrating thatstability requirements are fully satisfied. The calculations shall be endorsed byan Independent Checking Engineer (ICE).

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 17/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.5 MATERIALS

26.5.1 Concrete Blockwork

(a) Concrete bricks and blocks: shall be manufactured to BS 6073 Part 1 andshall be supplied by a manufacturer previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager. The average crushing strength of a randomly selectedsample of 10 bricks or blocks shall be not less than 7 N/mm2 and a density notgreater than 1,700 kg/m3. Blocks shall be either paint quality if they are toreceive paint directly applied or standard quality for any other finish.

(b) Concrete bricks shall be of the same size as clay bricks. Concrete blocks shallbe dense concrete of nominal size 190 mm x 390 mm (height x length);thicknesses shall be as shown on the Employer’s Drawings. Blocks shall bemanufactured in accordance with BS 5628 Part 1: Normal category. Concretebricks or blocks for fair face work shall be selected with regard to evenness,texture and sharpness of arises.

(c) Concrete hollow blocks: shall be manufactured to BS 6073 Part 1 and 2 andshall be supplied by a manufacturer previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager. Average crushing strength of a randomly selectedsample of 10 blocks shall be not less than 7.0 N/mm2 calculated using thegross area. Blocks shall be either paint quality if they are to receive paintdirectly applied or standard quality for any other finish.

(d) Lightweight concrete blocks: shall be manufactured to BS 6073 Part 1 and 2and shall be supplied by a manufacturer previously reviewed without objectionby the Project Manager. The average crushing strength and blocks of arandomly selected sample of 10 blocks shall have a compressive strength of

not less than 7 N/mm

2

 and a density not greater than 1,450 kg/m

3

. Blocks shallbe either paint quality if they are to receive paint directly applied or standardquality for any other finish.

(e) Pre-cast concrete cills, lintels over door, window and duct openings, copingsand features: shall comply with the provisions of this section and Concretesection 20.

26.5.2 Natural or Cast Stone

(a) Stone shall be of consistent colour and free from defects and ferrous materialsthat will adversely affect strength or appearance. Stone shall comply with BS

5390.

(b) Cast stone shall also be manufactured in accordance with BS 1217:1997 andshall have a compressive strength of not less than 25 N/mm2  and a typicaldensity of 2,100 kg/m3 .

(c) This section covers all types of natural or cast stone including ashlar or rubblewalling laid dry or on a full even bed of cement mortar.

26.5.3 Glass Blocks

(a) Glass blocks shall be partially evacuated hollow units or solid glass units

made of clear colourless glass with a polyvinyl butyral edge coating.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 18/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

(b) Sizes and fire ratings shall be as specified with integral joint reinforcement.

(c) Glass block panels shall not be designed to support structural loads.

26.5.4 Reinforcement

(a) Brickwork and Blockwork walling shall be provided with bed jointreinforcement where and to the extent indicated on the Employer’s Drawingsor, where the walling is to be designed by the Contractor, where such designdictates. In all such cases the reinforcement employed shall be of proprietarywire ladder type of the gauge indicated.

(b) As a minimum the reinforcement shall be provided in every sixth course of 75mm gauge brickwork and ever second course in the case of 225 mm gaugeblockwork.

(c) The reinforcement shall be manufactured from austenitic stainless steel inboth internal and external wall situations and in lengths not less than 2,500mm. The width of the ladder reinforcement shall be o/a 40 mm less than thewalling into which it is incorporated.

(d) The ladder reinforcement shall comprise two strands of wire runninglongitudinally each with a diameter of not less than 3 mm each and joinedtogether with welded cross wires. Cross wires between the strands shall be atnot greater than 450 mm c/s and of 3 mm diameter. If thicker wire is used forstrands or cross wires it shall be flattened as part of the manufacturingprocess such that vertical thickness in the bed joints is not greater than 3 mm.

(e) Adjacent lengths of ladder reinforcement shall be lapped not less than 225

mm. Laps shall be staggered throughout the masonry. Laps shall be laid sideby side and not stacked. The ladder reinforcement shall be cut and bent atcorners and arranged to overlap.

26.5.5 Damp Proof Courses

(a) Damp proof courses shall be constructed of either:

(i) Bitumen damp proof courses complying with BS 6398; or

(ii) Polyethylene damp proof courses complying with BS 6515.

(b) The Contractor shall not use hessian-based types of bitumen damp proofcourses.

26.5.6 Wall Ties (blockwork)

Ties for cavity walls shall be formed from 20 mmx3.2 mm flat, stainless steel flatsection and shall be “vertical twist type” in compliance with BS 1243 and BSEN 845-1, except that the overall length of the ties shall be at least 100 mm longer than thewidth of the specified cavity. Ties between ends of walls and concrete shall be either:

(a) lateral restraint ties for movement joints in internal skins of blockworkconsisting of austenitic stainless steel grade 316 flat ties at each alternate

course, with one half of each length being de-bonded by wrapping withpolythene sheet prior to building-in;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 19/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

(b) 20 mmx3 mm flat stainless steel by 350 mm long, flanged at both ends;

(c) strips of brickwork reinforcement 350 mm long of the following widths:

(i) For 100-105 mm walls, 60 mm;

(ii) For 200-225 mm walls, 110 mm; or

(d) lateral restraint ties at all junctions with concrete or structural steelwork, in thevertical plane, with stainless steel fish tail type ties 2.5 mm thick, 25 mm wide,and 150 mm long (nominal dimensions) fixed to the structure at 400 mmcentres (nominal) i.e. alternate block courses (this requirement does not applyto movement joints).

26.5.7 Wall Ties (Masonry)

(a) Ties between walls and concrete shall be stainless steel grade 304 in

compliance with BS 1243 and BS EN 845-1.

(b) Ties shall be not less than 40 mm wide, 3 mm thick and 150 mm long andshall be flanged at both ends.

26.5.8 Sand

(a) Sand shall be clean, hard, durable crushed rock or clean sand complying withBS 1200, unless specified otherwise.

(b) Sand shall be provided from one source and shall be well graded from 5 mm.The grading limits shall comply with the following;

Table 26.1: Grading

BS Sieve % by weight passing BS sieves

5.00 mm

2.36 mm

1.18 mm

600 μm

300 μm

150 μm

100

90-100

70-100

40-100

5-70

0-15

(c) Sand, other than the 5.00 mm size, whose grading falls outside the limits setout above by a total amount not exceeding 5% may be accepted.

(d) The quantity of clay, fine silt and fine dust present when determined by themethod given in BS 812:Part. 1 shall not exceed 10% of the total by weight.

(e) Sand for fair-faced works shall be free from salt causing efflorescence.

(f) Marine sand with sulphate resisting or super sulphated cement shall not be

used.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 20/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.5.9 Plasticiser

(a) The Contractor shall not incorporate any mortar plasticiser without the expresspermission of the Project Manager. In the event the Project Manager permitsthe use of such plasticiser(s) their use shall be in strict compliance with BS4887 in the proportions recommended by the manufacturer.

(b) Where plasticiser(s) are to be incorporated, mortar mixes shall be amended inaccordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations. The Contractorshall demonstrate the suitability of the mixture for use in any particular mortar.

(c) Calcium chloride, or any admixtures containing calcium chloride shall be used.

26.5.10 Portland Cements

(a) The Contractor shall only use Portland cement, unless otherwise specified.

(b) All Portland cements shall conform to BS 12.

(c) Cement shall be delivered to Site in the original sealed bags of themanufacturer or in bulk containers which have been reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

26.5.11 Lime

Lime shall conform to BS 890 and shall be hydrated lime of either Type (i), or (ii) or(iii).

26.5.12 Precast Concrete Lintels

Precast concrete lintels shall:

(a) conform with the requirements of BS 5977: Part 1;

(b) incorporate continuous reinforcement running the length of the lintel;

(c) provide a minimum concrete cover to reinforcement of 25 mm; and

(d) have a minimum bearing of 150 mm at each end..

26.5.13 Movement Joints

The Contractor shall construct movement joints in a flexible, cellular polyethylene,cellular polyurethane or foam rubber joint filler that has been reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager, as the blockwork proceeds, completely filling the joint for the width of the concrete blockwork.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 21/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.6 SUBMISSIONS

26.6.1 Particulars of Masonry and Blockwork

The following particulars of the proposed masonry and blockwork shall be submittedto the Project Manager for review:

(a) drawings showing the positions of all movement ,expansion,and control joints;

(b) drawings of all blockwork and masonry walls showing services openings andholes which are to be designed by the contractor;

(c) blockwork and masonry drawings shall include any fire rated elements;

(d) details of the source, type and properties of all masonry and blockworkmaterials;

(e) details including test certificates and manufacturer’s compliance certficationthat confirm the blockwork and masonry achieves the fire resistance ratingsspecified in the Contract; and

(f) details including calculations of how tolerances will be achieved.

26.6.2 Samples

The following samples of the proposed materials shall be submitted to the ProjectManager together with the particulars referred to above:

(a) each type of block, brick (4 no. of each type) and stone proposed and obtain

review without objection before placing orders with suppliers;

(b) 1 no. bag of lime, cement and sand;

(c) prepare sample panels of approximately 3 m2 of faced brickwork and fair facedbrickwork or blockwork, including colour, finish, mortar type, pointing, andobtain review without objection before proceeding; and

(d) reinforcement, damp proof course materials, wall ties, plasticiser and anyother accessories specified.

26.6.3 Benchmarks and Samples

(a) The Contractor shall, following receipt of no objection from the ProjectManager of relevant samples and prior to commencement of blockwork andmasonry, construct an area of each type of blockwork and masonry work as abenchmark. The area shall be agreed with the Project Manager and shall,eventually, be incorporated into the Works. Upon a notice of no objection thebenchmarks shall become the agreed standard to which all subsequentblockwork and masonry shall conform.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall demolish, remove and construct anew proposed benchmark before proceeding with any blockwork or masonry

works.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 22/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.7 WORKMANSHIP

26.7.1 Tolerances (Blockwork)

(a) The Contractor shall construct blockwork walls such that the dimensionbetween any two points on the blockwork walls as built or between any pointon the blockwork walls and any reference point agree, within the followingtolerances, with the required dimension, whether shown on or calculable fromthe Employer’s Drawings.

Table 26.2: Maximum permitted/acceptable deviation of blockwork in mmfrom required dimension

Up to 300 mm Over 300 mm to 2 m Over 2 m and above

3 5 10

Note that the figures given in the table above apply to such variables as:

(i) position relative to the nearest gridline;

(ii) plumb; including movement, construction and expansion joints;

(iii) cross section and other linear dimensions of the wall;

(iv) clear dimension between walls;

(v) distance of any corner from a plane containing the other three corners;

(vi) squareness of corners (the longer of two adjacent sides shall be takenas the base line). Deviations from square calculated from length of theshorter side;

(vii) level, straightness and horizontal alignment.

26.7.2 Tolerances (Masonry)

 All masonry shall comply with the following requirements:

Table 26.3: Masonry Tolerances (mm)

Rubble

Walling

 Ashlar

Walling

Position on plan 25 14

Length 25 15

Height 25 10

Level of bed joints (in any 5 m) 25 10

Straightness (in any 5 m) 25 15

Verticality (in any 3 m) 20 15

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 23/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.7.3 Accuracy

The Contractor shall:

(a) lay bricks or blocks on a full bed of mortar with the joints filled solid to aconsistent thickness of 10 mm;

(b) keep courses level and perpends vertically in line. Plumb quoins and otherangles as the work proceeds; and verify, that surfaces to receive the masonryand blockwork are within the tolerances as specified in this section and theParticular Technical Specification. Where an existing structure is found to beoutside such tolerances, the Contractor shall take such measures to provide asuitable level bedding for the construction of blockwork.

26.7.4 Transportation and Handl ing

The Contractor shall:

(a) transport stone with the minimum of handling; stack carefully in a vehicle withpacking pieces to prevent damage;

(b) provide adequate lifting plant to unload and handle stones into position;

(c) unload and handle masonry and blocks without soiling, chipping or subjectingto other damage; and

(d) not use damaged blocks.

26.7.5 Storing

The Contractor shall:

(a) stack masonry and blocks on level hard-standings that provide protection fromdamage and contamination; and

(b) store stone in stacks on battens, and protect from rain.26.7.6 Gauge Boxes

The Contractor shall measure mortar constituents by volume, using clean gaugeboxes made to sizes to suit volumes required.

26.7.7 Mortar Proportions

(a) The Contractor shall mix constituents to the following proportions:

(i) cement/ mortar cement and sand 1: 3; and

(ii) cement/lime mortar cement, lime putty and sand 1:1:6 nominal to BS5628 Part 3 designation iii.

(b) Proportions given shall be for dry sand. The Contractor shall allow for bulking.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 24/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.7.8 Mixing

(a) The Contractor shall mix mortar by mechanical mixer or, where permitted bythe Project Manager, by hand on a clean, close boarded platform.

(b) Mortar shall be mixed thoroughly but the Contractor shall ensure that mortarcontaining plasticisers is not over mixed.

26.7.9 Mortars

The Contractor shall:

(a) propose cement mortar for the following:

(i) work below damp proof course, including basement walls;

(ii) concrete blockwork not exceeding 150 mm;

(iii) load-bearing walls; and

(iv) pointing where directed and where bedding is of cement mortar;

(b) propose cement/lime mortar for blockwork generally, except as specified;

(c) use mortar within two hours of mixing at normal temperatures. Mortar may bere-tempered to restore workability, but only within these time limits;

(d) determine the required amount of water to achieve a workable mix;

(e) if pre-mixed mortars are proposed, submit the characteristics, product data,and testing criteria to the Project Manager for review; and

(f) submit details of the mortar consistency, water retention and air content forthis application to the Project Manager and obtain a notice of no objectionprior to proceeding with the laying of blockwork.

26.7.10 Prevention of Drying Out of Mortar

During dry weather, wet bricks and blocks as necessary to prevent premature dryingout of the mortar.

26.7.11 Wet weather

The Contractor shall, during wet weather, protect freshly laid masonry andblockwork at the completion of each day’s work or in heavy rain.

26.7.12 Protection

The Contractor shall:

(a) protect newly erected stonework against inclement weather;

(b) cover arrises projections and the like with adequate protection, firmly fixed;and

(c) clean off, rub down and leave stonework perfect immediately before handover.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 25/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.7.13 Uniformity

The Contractor shall distribute facing blocks and masonry for fair-faced work ofvarying colour evenly throughout the work so that no patches appear.

26.7.14 Blockwork Base Substrate

The Contractor shall lay blockwork only on structural slab or reinforced concreteplinths. Where a screed exists, the Contractor shall remove the screed locally downto structural slab level before constructing the blockwork.

26.7.15 Work Above Another

The Contractor shall carry up work with no portion more than 900 mm aboveanother at any time, racking back between levels.

26.7.16 Quoins and Jambs

Quoins and jambs shall be plumbed as the blockwork proceeds. The head of allwalls shall be laid level.

26.7.17 Blockwork Panels

(a) The Contractor shall divide blockwork walls into panels separated by control joints. The control joints shall be located such that the length of eachblockwork panel is neither greater than 6m nor greater than twice the panelheight.

(b) Control joints shall coincide with structural support work where possible and

shall utilise stainless steel proprietary sleeved tie anchors.

26.7.18 Control Joints

The Contractor shall construct control joints with a continuous nominal width of 12mm filled with weak mortar, raked out to a depth of not less than 20 mm, andfinished with fire resistant mastic.

26.7.19 Expansion Joints

The Contractor shall construct expansion joints at location as indicated on theEmployer’s Drawings. The expansion joints shall be incombustible, flexible fire

barriers in compliance with BS 476 Part: 20 1987, compressible to accommodate allstructural tolerances and which achieves the same fire rating as the wall.

26.7.20 Cavity Walling

The Contractor shall:

(a) build cavity walls with cavities of the widths and walling of the thickness asspecified.

(b) bond the two thickness of walling together with ties spaced 900 mm aparthorizontally and 320 mm vertically, staggered, and with additional ties at

reveals and opening; carefully position ties so that they fall toward the outerthickness of the wall;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 26/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

(c) keep cavity clean by means of lifting battens; and

(d) leave openings at the base of the cavity to facilitate clearing out on completionand subsequently close up to match the surrounding work.

26.7.21 Bonding

The Contractor shall:

(a) lay blockwork in stretcher bond, unless otherwise specified;

(b) lay blocks throughout the work with the perpends in any course not less than aquarter of a block from those in the course below; and

(c) lay fair-faced blockwork with joints to an even and regular pattern.

26.7.22 Finishing of Join ts

The Contractor shall:

(a) strike off joints not visible in the finished work as the work proceeds; fill jointsin fair-faced work as the work proceeds to provide a smooth surface flush withthe brick or block face;

(b) finish joints in faced brickwork with either a trowelled weathered joint as thework proceeds, or rake out to a depth of 10 mm as the work proceeds andpoint with a weathered joint on completion; rake out joints to a depth of 10 mmin brickwork to provide key for plaster or other wet applied finishes.

26.7.23 Damp Proof Course

The Contractor shall:

(a) flush up blockwork to form a level and even bed with mortar used in thegeneral brickwork to receive the horizontal damp proof course;

(b) lay damp proof course in continuous strip with 150 mm laps at end of lengthand at returns, and complete mortar joint to normal thickness;and

(c) lay damp proof courses in accordance with BS 8215. 

26.7.24 Wedging and Pinning

The Contractor shall pin up and wedge masonry and blockwork to structural soffits,and fill solid with mortar.

26.7.25 Building In

The Contractor shall build in lintels and bed solid door and window frames and thelike with mortar similar to that of adjacent walls.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 27/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

26.7.26 Holes and Chases

The Contractor shall:

(a) leave, form or cut chases, holes, recesses and reveals in walls to receiveframes, rainwater or other pipes, conduits, electric cables, sleeves and the likeas required; and

(b) subsequently make good with mortar similar to that of adjacent walls.

26.7.27 Cutting of Blocks

(a) Where blocks are cut, the Contractor shall make the gaps between concreteand blockwork as indicated on the Employer’s Drawings. Blocks shall be cutonly by power driven masonry saw, wet hosed down to remove any slurry andhave excess moisture removed prior to laying. No cut faces shall be exposed

in the Works unless agreed with the Project Manager.

(b) The Contractor shall leave, form or cut chases and reveals in walls to receiveframes, rainwater or other pipes and electrical conduits such that these can beconcealed from view beneath wall finishes unless the Employers drawingsexplicitly state, for any particular area, that such services may run exposedupon the wall surface. Chasing in walls shall be undertaken with precision toensure that width and depth are the minimum required to allow the services tobe accommodated but without adversely affecting the structural stability of thewalls in which they are located.

(c) After services are installed the Contractor shall return to the walling and make

good flush to the wall face using cement mortar of similar composition to thatused for wall construction. Such making good shall be allowed to thoroughlydry out before application of any subsequent wall finishing

26.7.28 Raking Out and Pointing Flashings (Blockwork)

The Contractor shall rake out joints to a depth of 25 mm for turn-in of flashings orskirting; point flashings and skirting in mortar similar to that in adjacent walls.

26.7.29 Acoust ic Performance Requirements

The Contractor shall:

(a) ensure that all blockwork walls achieve as a minimum the sound reductionindex to which they have been designed (weighted sound reduction); and

(b) ensure that all mortar joints are filled with mortar to full depth, except whereindicated on Employer’s Drawings.

26.7.30 Service Openings

The Contractor shall:

(a) where areas of blockwork incorporate service openings, treat the reveal edgesas fair-faced; and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 28/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

(b) after the installation of all services, maintain the total performance andintegrity of the walls and partitions.

26.7.31 Pointing masonry

The Contractor shall:

(a) rake out joints to a depth of 15 mm as the work proceeds; and

(b) point in cement mortar with a flush, weathered or recessed joint as required oncompletion.

26.7.32 Preparation of Stone

The Contractor shall:

(a) work the exposed and joint faces of each stone to a square and true plane

surfaces, free from hollow or rough areas;

(b) Finish exposed faces to a finely squared dressed surface. Stones shall be notless than 300 mm high; and

(c) mark each stone clearly to indicate its position into finished work.

26.7.33 Laying and Jointing Stonework

The Contractor shall:

(a) lay stones on a full, even bed of mortar composed of cement and fine crushed

stone 1:3, with all joints filled of consistent width and between 15 and 5 mmwide depending on the walling type;

(b) lay stones to bond together throughout the wall, and to backing usingprojecting bonding stones.

26.7.34 Stonework Built Against Concrete

The Contractor shall:

(a) for stone walling, cast in or build in for a depth of 100 mm at least 5 wall tiesper square metre to project 75 mm into the stone walling. Bed facing againstbacking in mortar;

(b) at junctions of stone walling with concrete or blockwork, cast in or build ties at450 mm (minimum) centres vertically, to project 250 mm into stone walling.

26.7.35 Glass Block Panels

The Contractor shall:

(a) paint all sides of structural opening to receive glass block panels with twocoats of bituminous paint;

(b) lay blocks in cement/lime mortar and point both sides; provide 12 mmclearance at jambs and head of panels; fill gap with movement joint filler andseal both sides;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 29/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 15/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

(c) build in strips of blockwork reinforcement 64 mm wide at every fourth course;carry ends of strips across the clearance gap and build into or secure to jambsof opening; use proprietary fixing components supplied by glass blockmanufacturer and follow all fixing details recommended by the manufacturer.

26.7.36 Alterations to Existing Masonry and Blockwork

The Contractor shall:

(a) arrange all new courses to line up with existing work;

(b) bond all new walls to existing by cutting pockets not less than 100mm deep,the full thickness of the new wall and every block/ masonry course; bond newwalling into pockets with all voids filled solid;

(c) except where a straight vertical joint is specified, tooth bond every course fornew and existing facework in the same plane to give a continuous appearance;

(d) where new lintels or walling are used to support existing structure, completelyfill the top joint with semi-dry mortar, hard packed and well rammed, to ensurefull load transfer after removal of temporary supports;

(e) cut out and replace cracked blocks or masonry in existing facework withmatching materials and bedded in the specified mortar;

(f) re-pointing: carefully rake out existing joints by hand to form a square recessof 15-20 mm depth; and

(g) remove dust, lightly wet and neatly point in the specified mortar and profile in a

continuous operation.

26.7.37 Steelwork Suppor ts to Blockwork and Masonry Walling

 All seelwork supports to walling shall comply with Section 22 (steelwork), lateralrestraints tying the supports in to the walling shall be provided in accordance with26.5.6 of this Section.

26.7.38 Walls Below Slabs and Beams

The Contractor shall detail the mullions and blockwork or masonry to allow for thedeflection of slabs and beams above walls. The joint between the slab or beam and

the top of the wall shall be a minimum of 20 mm and shall be filled with a suitableflexible sealant or flexible fire rated sealant. 

26.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

26.8.1 Mortar Testing

The Contractor shall:

(a) carry out all tests on wet or hardened mortar samples in accordance with BS4551;

(b) take samples at the point of mixing or use. The frequency of sampling shallnot be less than that specified in Appendix A.1 of BS 5628:Part 1;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 30/322

 General Materials & Workmanship Specification 16/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 26 – Masonry and Blockwork

(c) perform additional tests and sampling if the mortar does not comply with thisSpecification. Subject to the test results, adjust and test the specified nominalmix proportions;

(d) test half of the samples at 7 days, the remainder at 28 days. The 28 dayscrushing strength of the cubes shall not be less than 3.6 N/mm2  for thepreliminary test and 2.5 N/mm2 for the work test;

(e) test the consistency of mortar for conformance with the Contractor’srecommendations which have received a notice of no objection from theProject Manager using the test procedure described in clause 10 of BS 4551;

(f) test the water retention of mortar for conformance with the Contractor’srecommendations which have received a notice of no objection from theProject Manager using the test procedure described in clause 11 of BS 4551;

(g) test the air control of mortar for conformance with the Contractor’s

recommendations which have received a notice of no objection from theProject Manager using the test procedure described in clause 13 of BS 4551.

26.8.2 Blockwork Testing

(a) The Contractor shall submit his selected sources of blockwork to the ProjectManager for review without objection together with certificates of recent testscarried out in accordance with the relevant British Standards for all sourcesgiving the following information:

(i) compressive strength;

(ii) absorption percentage;

(iii) soluble salt content;

(iv) drying shrinkage or moisture expansion; and

(v) density and tolerance in dimensions.

(b) The Contractor shall take a sample of 4 blocks per 1,000 for assessment ofdrying shrinkage in accordance with BS 6073 Part 1. These sample blocks

shall be taken from the centre of the stacks. The drying shrinkage shall be ≤ 0.06%.

26.8.3 Testing Lintels

The Contractor shall test pre-cast concrete lintels using the procedure described inBS 5977 part 2 appendix B;

26.8.4 Fire resis tance integrity

The Contractor shall construct blockwork walls in accordance with the Specificationsand achieve the fire resistance as specified on the Employer’s Drawings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 31/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 1/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

SECTION 27 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING

27.1 GENERAL

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(a) concrete and joints in concrete refer to section 20;

(b) water retaining structures refer to section 24; and

(c) roofing refer to section 28.

27.2 NOT USED

27.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

The Standards and Codes of Practice specified in this section are listed below forinformation only. The Contractor shall comply with the edition of the Standard orCode of Practice listed in the text when stated, or the latest edition when no editionis listed.

BS 410 Test sieves for grading aggregate

BS 5284 Sampling and testing mastic asphalt and pitchmastic usedin building

BS 6358 Damp proof courses

BS 6577 Mastic asphalt for building

BS 6925 Mastic asphalt for building

BS 8000:Part 4 Code of practice for waterproofing

BS 8102 Protection of structures against water from the ground

27.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

(a) The Contractor shall design tanking in compliance with BS 8102 - protection ofstructures against water from the ground. 

(b) For sheet membrane tanking, the work shall be executed by themanufacturer’s approved specialist contractor.

 

(c) Before commencing the Works, the Contractor must demonstrate on Site thatall adhesives and materials are fully compatible

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 32/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 2/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

27.5 MATERIALS

27.5.1 Mastic Asphalt

Mastic asphalt for tanking shall comply with type T 1097 to BS 6925 (lime stoneaggregate) or type T1418 to BS 6577 (natural rock asphalt aggregate). All masticasphalt blocks delivered to Site shall bear legible markings including:

(a) the name or trade mark of the manufacturer;

(b) the number and date of British Standard; and

(c) the type of number, e.g. TI097 to BS 6925: 1985.

27.5.2 Flexible Sheet Membrane

(a) Proprietary flexible sheet membrane shall be capable of accommodating

unanticipated cracks of up to 0.6 mm wide without losing its waterproofingproperties.

(b) The properties of the membrane in lap shear and lap peel shall not be lessthan 110 KN/m2 and 3.3 KN/m respectively when installed on site.

(c) Surface treatments of liquid membrane of any kind are not acceptable. Thissub-section covers single ply polyester plasticized plastic membranes whichshall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

27.5.3 Other Proprietary Concrete Sealers

(a) This section covers the use of proprietary deep penetrating concrete sealers.They shall not be surface treatments and shall be supplied and applied strictlyin accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

(b) The Contractor shall submit certificates together with complete test reports tosubstantiate compliances of the materials to the Project Manager when thematerial is delivered to Site.

27.6 SUBMISSIONS

27.6.1 Particulars of Waterproofing and Tanking Systems

The following particulars of the proposed waterproofing and tanking systems shallbe submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing construction details including those at angles,internal and external corners, construction joints, pipe intrusions and outlets;

(b) details of the source, type and properties of the materials proposed;

(c) certificates together with complete test reports to substantiate that thematerials supplied comply with the Specification shall be submitted to theProject Manager when the material is delivered to Site.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 33/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 3/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

27.7 WORKMANSHIP

27.7.1 Workmanship for All Waterproofing and Tanking

The Works shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8102 and BS 8000: Part 4.Particular attention is drawn to the followings before installation:

(a) A competent representative from the Contractor shall supervise the Works.Inspections shall be carried out and written approval given by thisrepresentative for each and every stage of the work from the surfacepreparation to the completion of the protective coating. Such written approvalsand completed stages shall be presented at the completion of each stage tothe Project Manager for review without objection prior to the Contractorcommencing the next stage.

(b) The Works shall only be carried out after the concrete has been curing for atleast 28 days.

27.7.2 Surface Preparation

(a) Surfaces to which tanking is to be applied shall be level and free fromirregularities such as ridges, dips, fins and concrete or mortar droppings. Thehorizontal surfaces of the concrete shall be given a wood-floated finish and belaid flat and true to allow the specified thickness of mastic asphalt to beapplied uniformly.

(b) Surfaces to which sheet membrane is to be applied shall be smooth, level andfree from all irregularities such as ridges, dips, fins and concrete or mortardroppings. The horizontal surfaces of the concrete shall be given a steel-

floated finish and be laid flat and true to allow the membrane to be applieduniformly.

(c) Where vertical concrete is very smooth and in order to provide a satisfactorykey for the mastic asphalt or a sheet membrane, the Contractor shall removethe surface laitance by wire brushing and apply an approved proprietary highbond primer. Excessive mould oil in the vertical form shall not be used.

27.7.3 Remelting Mastic Asphalt on Site

The Contractor shall:

(a) break the blocks into pieces of suitable size, carefully stack in an cauldron ormechanical mixer, previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager, and gradually heat to a temperature at no time exceeding 230 oC;

(b) whilst heating, agitate the asphalt continuously to prevent local over-heating;

(c) remove the asphalt from the cauldron or mixer by means of buckets, whichhave been coated with a fine inert dust or cement. Ashes or oil shall not beused for this purpose;

(d) check continuously with suitable thermometers to ensure that the asphalt isheated to the correct temperature; and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 34/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 4/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

(e) take samples during the remelting process and perform the composition andthe hardness number tests as stated in the Inspection Testing andCommissioning section of this Specification.

27.7.4 Laying of Mastic Asphalt

(a) On horizontal surfaces, mastic asphalt shall be laid in three coats to a totalthickness of 30 mm.

(b) On vertical surfaces, mastic asphalt shall be applied in three coats to a totalthickness of not less than 20 mm taken to a height of at least 150 mm aboveground level.

(c) An angle fillet not less than 50 mm wide shall be applied in two coats at the junction of two planes forming an internal angle.

(d) Joints in successive coats of mastic asphalt shall be staggered at least 150

mm for horizontal work and 75 mm for vertical work. The top of verticalmastic asphalt shall be tucked into a chase not less than 25 mm x 25 mmunless the mastic asphalt is being continued horizontally.

27.7.5 Laying of Membrane

(a) Proprietary flexible sheet membrane shall be primed, laid, lapped and finishedin strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

(b) No work shall be undertaken when the surface moisture exceeds thepermissible content recommended by manufacturer, as tested by the moisturetesting equipment on Site.

(c) Adhesive shall be spread in a progressive manner to accord with laying themembrane. Adhesive that sets prior to laying the membrane shall beforbidden.

(d) The Contractor shall keep a daily record of the adhesive used and checkagainst the agreed spreading rate of membrane. Bubbles formed in themembrane must be made good in accordance with the manufacturer’stechnical literature.

27.7.6 Protection

The Contractor shall:

(a) Notwithstanding the Contractor’s obligations under GCC Section 20 (Care ofthe Works), apply protection within 2 working days on completion of eachsection of the Works;

(b) protect horizontal work with a screed of cement and sand mortar 50 mm inthickness. For ease of placing, this horizontal protection coating shall be veryworkable. Slump of less than 100 mm is not recommended. Temporaryprotection for the lapping area at the end of a working day shall be strictly inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendation;

(c) protect vertical work against damage by the erection of a masonry wall orprotective boarding constructed of ribbed polypropylene or bitumenimpregnated wood chip rigid panels;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 35/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 5/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

(d) in cases where it is not possible to provide the protection described in (b) and(c) above, provide a proprietary protection system recommended by thewaterproofing manufacturer and compatible with the following finishes. Theprotection system shall be submitted to the Project Manager for reviewwithout objection prior to use, and shall be installed strictly in accordance withthe manufacturer’s recommendations.

27.8 INSPECTION TESTING AND COMMISIONING

27.8.1 Testing of Mastic Asphalt

(a) Sampling and testing of mastic asphalt for composition and hardness numbershall be carried out in accordance with BS 5284.

(b) The Contractor shall prepare a bulk sample as stated below selected atrandom from not less than 8 blocks, breaking them and taking portions from

the inner part of each block and deliver samples to the HK GovernmentLaboratory for testing. The test results shall comply with table 27.1 below.

27.8.2 Sampling During Laying of Mastic Asphalt

(a) During laying, at least one sample shall be taken from the cauldron or mixerper day for control test.

(b) Sample prepared for test shall not be less than 6 kg by taking threeincrements, from the discharge of the mixer or from the middle of thecauldrons when approximately half of the charge remains. In the case ofhand stirred cauldrons the molten material shall be thoroughly stirred

immediately prior to the samples being taken. Thoroughly mix the threeincrements together in a clean wide-mouthed galvanized-iron bucket ofapproximate size 250 mm diameter x 150 mm.

(c) The Contractor shall prepare two specimens for hardness number tests fromthe thoroughly mixed bulk sample as follows:

(d) pour the mastic into two hardness moulds to a level slightly higher than theedge of the moulds;

(e) tap with a spatula on the edge of the moulds for about 3 minutes to level themastic and drive out entrapped air from the specimen; and

(f) level off the surface with the spatula.

(g) The moulds and spatula should be warmed before use.

(h) The Contractor shall pour bulk sample for testing composition into a woodenmould size 300 mm x 300 mm x 25 mm deep.

(i) The composition and hardness number of the samples shall comply withTables 27.1 and 27.2 below. If the sample fails to comply, the work on Siterepresented by the sample should be completely removed and redone.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 36/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 6/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

Table 27.1: Composition by Analysis of Mastic Asphalt: Type T1097 andT1418

Property % by mass of masticasphalt

T1097 T1418

Grading of mineral aggregate using BS410 testsieves

Min. Max. Min. Max.

Retained on 3.35 mm mesh 0 2 0 0

Passing 3.35 mm mesh, retained on 600 μmmesh

4 17 0 10

Passing 600μm mesh, retained on 212 μm mesh 8 26 5 20

Passing 212 μm mesh, retained on75 μm mesh 8 26 5 20

Passing 75 μm mesh 28 50 45 65Soluble bitumen 12 15 17* 20*

* 13% min and 16% max for Swiss natural rock asphalt

Table 27.2: Hardness Number for Masti c Asphalt at 25 deg. C

Property T1097 T1418

Re melted onsite/laboratory

Not less than 40 Not less than 90

Not more than 150

 At the time of laying Not less than 40 Not less than 60Not more than 150

27.8.3 Testing of Sheet Membrane

Sampling and testing of sheet membrane shall be agreed with the Project Managerand the results shall comply with the properties given in section 27.5.2.

27.8.4 Testing of All Waterproofing and Tanking

(a) All surfaces of waterproofing and tanking shall be 100% visually inspected.

(b) All tanked volumes and all horizontal waterproofing surfaces shall be floodtested for a minimum of 24 hours. The water level of the test shall to be thefull height of the tanking, and for waterproofing a minimum of 75mm above thesurface being tested. Any temporary bunds to contain the test shall bepositioned so that joints in waterproofing are completely within the testedarea.

(c) On completion of the flood test, the Contractor shall immediately carry out aninfrared thermographic survey, or other method agreed with the ProjectManager, to demonstrate that there has been no leakage.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 37/322

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 7/8 January 2011Section 27 – Waterproofing and Tanking

27.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

27.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to, particulars of waterproofing systems, material manufacturers,

movement joints, repair methods and maintenance requirements.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 38/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 39/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 1/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

SECTION 28 ROOFING AND WALL CLADDING

28.1 GENERAL

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unless

otherwise stated in this section:

(a) steelwork shall refer to section 22;

(b) waterproofing and tanking refer to section 27; and

(c) curtain walling refer to section 29.

28.2 NOT USED

28.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476: Parts 3 and 7 Fire tests on building materials and structure

BS 747 Roofing felts

BS 1178 Milled lead for building purposes

BS 1470 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for generalengineering purposes.

BS 1494: Part1 Fixing accessories for building purposes

BS 2870 Rolled copper and copper alloys: sheet strip and foil

BS 3083 Hot dipped zinc coated corrugated steel sheets orgeneral purposes.

BS 3382 Electroplated coatings on threaded components

BS 3532 Method of specifying unsaturated polyester resinsystem

BS 3690 Bitumen for building and civil engineering

BS 4154 Corrugated plastics translucent streets

BS 4203 Extruded rigid PVC corrugated sheeting

BS 4868 Profiled aluminium sheet for building

BS 5427 Code of practice for performance and loading criteriafor profiled sheeting in building

CP 143 Sheet roof and all coverings

CP 144: Part 3 Fixing sheet aluminium

BS EN 505 Roofing products from metal sheets-steel sheet

BS EN 507 Roofing products from metal sheets-aluminum sheets

BS EN 508 Specification for self-supporting products of steel,aluminum or stainless steel.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 40/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 2/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

28.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

28.4.1 Propr ietary Roofing Systems

(a) Proprietary roofing systems shall be designed and laid by specialistcontractors listed on the HK SAR Government list of Acceptable Specialist

Roofing Material/Applicators at the Date of the Letter of Acceptance; and

(b) all works shall be carried out as per the shop drawings reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

28.5 MATERIALS

28.5.1 Steel Sheet Roofing and Cladding

(a) Steel corrugated sheets shall be hot-dipped galvanised corrugated sheets toBS 3083 and shall be at least 0.6 mm thick, with corrugations 76 mm wide and

19 mm deep.

(b) Profiled steel sheets in compliance with BS 5427 shall be obtained frommanufacturer previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager ofprofile, thickness, finish and colour as specified.

(c) Accessories for steel sheets shall be made from 0.6 mm (minimum) thickgalvanised steel sheet or proprietary fittings previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager. Accessories for colour coated sheets shallbe obtained from the manufacturer previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager.

(d) Hook bolts and nuts, drive screws, washers, self-tapping screws, roofing bolts,nuts and clips, roofing screws and sheeting clips shall be galvanised steel incompliance with BS 1494: Part 1 or electro-plated in compliance with BS 3382and of the sizes and finishes specified.

(e) Recommended specialist fixings from the manufacturer of the roofing sheetspreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(f) Bolts and screws shall be fitted with large washers compatible with sheets andshall be capable of withstanding up-lift under typhoon conditions.

(g) Where coloured roofing sheets are used, fixing heads shall be covered with

plastic caps to match the colour of the sheets.

(h) Rivet fixings shall only be used with the consent of the Project Manager andonly for vertical flashings.

(i) The Contractor shall fix steel sheeting in accordance with CP 143: Part 12.

28.5.2 Aluminium Sheet Roofing and Cladding

(a) Aluminium corrugated and profiled sheets shall comply with BS 4868.Corrugated sheets shall be at least 0.6 mm thick with corrugations 76 mm

wide and 19 mm deep. Profile sheets shall be of the profile, thickness, finishand colour as specified.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 41/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 3/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

(b) Accessories for profiled aluminium sheets shall be made from aluminium flatsheet at least 0.6 mm thick and have similar finish and colour to the profiledsheets or shall be reviewed without objection proprietary fittings. Accessoriesfor colour-coated sheets shall be obtained from the manufacturer of thesheets previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(c) Fixings for aluminium profiled sheets shall comply with section 28.5.1.

28.5.3 Propr ietary Roofing Systems

(a) All waterproof roofing covering materials shall be provided by the specialistpreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager and is supplyingthe roofing system.

(b) Roofing covering materials are subdivided into four groups as follows:

(i) Type 'AI' Roofing Sheet Material requiring Protection;

(ii) Type 'AII' Roofing Sheet Materials with self finishes;

(iii) Type 'BI' Liquid Applied Roofing Materials requiring Protection; and

(iv) Type 'BII' Liquid Applied Roofing Materials with self finishes.

(c) The Contractor shall submit samples of the roofing materials to be installedand copies of the manufacturer's technical data and instructions to the ProjectManager for review without objection.

(d) Before commencing installation work, the Contractor shall demonstratethrough the Benchmarks prepared under section 28.6.3 on Site that all

adhesives and materials are fully compatible.

28.5.4 Flashings

(a) Sheet lead shall be to BS 1178, 1.8 mm thick Code No. 4, Colour Blue.

(b) Sheet copper shall be to BS 2870.

(c) Sheet aluminium shall be to BS 1470, 0.9 mm thick grade S199.19.

(d) Sheet steel shall be to BS EN505 and 508 and a minimum of 0.9 mm thick.

28.6 SUBMISSIONS

28.6.1 Particulars of All Roofing Systems.

The following particulars of the proposed roofing shall be submitted to the ProjectManager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing construction details of each roofing systemincluding those at angles, corners, construction joints, pipe intrusions etc.; and

(b) details of the source, type and properties of the materials proposed.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 42/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 4/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

28.6.2 Samples

The following samples of proposed materials with relevant written trade literaturewhich shall include but not limited to the following shall be submitted to the ProjectManager for review without objection together with the particulars referred above:

(a) 300 mm x 300 mm sample of each roofing system and coatings as specifiedand extruded sections in 600mm length 4 no. each;

(b) all proposed flashing, gasket and sealing types in materials and coloursspecified. All samples to include at least one joint and be in 600 mm lengths – 2 no. each;

(c) 4 no. each type of fixing;

(d) all fire stopping materials - 2 no. each; and

(e) each type of ironmongery.

28.6.3 Benchmarks

The Contractor shall:

(a) following receipt of no objection from the Project Manager of relevant samplesand prior to commencement of roofing, construct and establish one completeroofing bay of each type of roofing system that is part of the Works on Site asbenchmarks. After the Project Manager has reviewed these areas with noobjection, the benchmark shall become the standard to which all subsequentroofing shall conform;

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, remove and construct a new proposed benchmarkbefore proceeding with any roofing works.

28.7 WORKMANSHIP

28.7.1 Steel sheet roofing and cladding

The Contractor shall:

(a) fix steel sheeting in accordance with CP 143: Part 12;

(b) drill fixing holes in the crown of corrugations for roofing and in the trough ofcorrugations for cladding. Drill holes 2 mm larger than bolts or screw, and notless than 40 mm from edges of sheets;

(c) remove all drilled cast material from around holes, leaving holes flat andsmooth prior to any bolt or other fixing. Make good damage to zinc coatingsand galvanising, treat cut ends of galvanized sections with two coats ofmetallic zinc-rich priming paint;

(d) lay sloping sheets with minimum end laps of 150 mm. Vertical sheets shall befixed with minimum laps of 75 mm. All laps shall be located over a supporting

member. Lay sheets with side laps of one and a half corrugations. Wherespecified, seal laps with lap sealant previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 43/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 5/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

(e) fix to steelworks with stainless steel self-tapping screws designed for fixing tosteel. Fixings for two rows around the perimeter of the roof, to any projectingareas, verges or open areas and at all end laps shall be at 300 mm(maximum) centres;

(f) cut, fit and dress steel sheet accessories to fit corrugations or profiles and fix

with fixings previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager inaccordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations;

(g) provide movement joints in all lengths of roofing or cladding over 45 m, withone joint for lengths up to 75 m and one for every additional 30 m. Cover witha movement joint cover fixed to sheets at one side only;

(h) fix sheets in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Sheetsshall be sheared and not cut with circular saws or abrasive wheels; makegood any damage; and

(i) bend sheet to a radius for use on curved roofs by means of a proper profiling

or crimping machine.

28.7.2 Aluminium Sheet Roofing and Cladding

(a) Fixing of aluminium sheet shall be similar to that for steel sheeting. Refer tosections 28.7.2b.

(b) Direct contact with other metals (particularly copper) shall be avoided toprevent electro-chemical corrosion. Fixings shall be of, or compatible withaluminium. Where unavoidable contact surfaces shall be coated withbituminous paint, protective tape or other means that have been reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

28.7.3 Propr ietary Roofing Systems

(a) The Contractor shall lay the roofing system comprising the roofing material,insulation and roof finishes onto the roof, including priming, sealing, crackfilling and other preparation all in accordance with the Specification and themanufacturer's recommendations; details and sequence of which have beenreviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(b) Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all junctions, joints around pipes,rainwater outlets and the like are properly executed.

(c) If bubbles form in the membrane, the affected area shall be cut open andmade good in accordance with the manufacturer's technical specification.Otherwise, the whole area shall be stripped, cleared and the surface shall beprepared again and the work shall be re-executed.

(d) Records of tins of adhesive, liquid membrane or amount of sheetedmembrane material shall be kept upon their arrival on Site. The numberconsumed per day and the number cleared away shall be evaluated to checkthe actual spreading rate of the proprietary material against themanufacturer's technical data. Tins and packages may be marked on arrivaland again when consumed.

(e) When specified, the roofing system shall be designed to allow for increasedwear due to frequent foot traffic or shall be protected by precast concrete tiles,(laid on cement and sand mortar) or other materials reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 44/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 6/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

(f) The Contractor shall not allow traffic on roof until 4 days after completion oftiling and subsequently permit only limited foot traffic from personnel requiredto inspect and maintain protection for a further 10 days.

28.7.4 Adhesives

 Adhesive, if required, shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations. All manufacturers’ data about the shelf life of adhesives shall benoted, and no attempt shall be made to use materials, which are no longer fit foruse.

28.7.5 Flashings

The Contractor shall:

(a) fix sheet lead in accordance with CP 143: Pt. 11. Flashing shall be let intowalls a minimum of 25 mm, secured with lead wedges and pointed in cement

mortar. Flashing shall be lapped at minimum of 100 mm and the lower edgesecured with lead tacks at 750 mm centers;

(b) fix sheet copper in accordance with CP 143: Part 12;

(c) fix sheet aluminium in accordance with CP 143: Part. 15. Flashings shall be letinto walls a minimum of 25 mm, provided with a turn back, secured with foldedaluminium wedges and pointed in cement mortar. Flashings shall be lappedand single lock welted and the lower edge folded under for additional stiffness. Aluminium in contact with mortar shall be coated with bituminous paint afterbending; and

(d) fix sheet and corrugated steel in accordance with CP 143: Part 10.

28.7.6 Dissimilar Metals

The Contractor shall avoid contact in the Works between the following metals:

(a) aluminium alloys and copper alloys, nickel, lead or stainless steel;

(b) iron or steel and copper alloys; and

(c) zinc (including galvanising) and copper alloys or nickel.

Where unavoidable contact surfaces shall be coated with bituminous paint,protective tape or other means previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

28.7.7 Workmanship Generally

(a) When specified, the Contractor shall apply a light-reflective paint or similarfinish applicable to the particular roofing system.

(b) When specified, position and fix approved proprietary roof vents inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ensure that theroofing contractor or specialist makes good the roof covering up to and around

them.

(c) Insulation shall either have integrally bonded hard surfaces on both sides orbe protected by inert hard sheeting or reinforced screed.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 45/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 7/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

28.7.8 Repair of Existing Roofing and Protection

(a) Prior to laying of the roofing system, the Contractor shall inspect and repair asrequired to provide proper surfaces to receive waterproofing.

(b) No work shall be carried out when there is surface moisture.

(c) The whole roof shall be left watertight during the course of the works when nowork is in hand.

(d) Where coverings have been removed and not yet replaced, the Contractorshall provide covering (and ropes and hold-fasts to hold down the coverings)by means of tarpaulin or other sheeting to cover all areas of roofs. Overlapsshall be sealed with tape and sheets effectively dressed into outlets.

(e) Other methods of protection previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager may be employed.

(f) All existing roofing outlets shall be protected to prevent debris falling intorainwater pipes. The outlets shall be opened and cleared at the end of eachworking day and the roof swept clean to ensure effective drainage.

28.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

28.8.1 Testing Generally

The Contractor shall comply with the testing requirements stated in thisSpecification and any additional requirements stated in the Particular Specification.

28.8.2 Moisture Testing

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide moisture testing equipment on Site to monitor the moisture content ofthe roof structure and the various elements of the roof system;

(b) ensure that no work is carried out when there is moisture present outside therange permissible in the relevant Code of Practice and Standards stated inthis specification; and

(c) take all necessary precaution to ensure the full integrity of the roofing system. 

28.8.3 Inspections

The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager upon the completion of each layerof the roofing system for inspection before the execution of next layer.

28.8.4 Flooding Test

(a) The test shall include where practical sealing all outlets and if necessaryconstructing dams to compartmentalize large roofs;

(b) flooding the roof for 24 hours. After flooding, all outlet blockages and dams

shall be removed to drain the roof. No debris shall be permitted to enter intodrainage pipework.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 46/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship SpecificationIssue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 8/8

 

January 2011 

Section 28 – Roofing & Wall Cladding 

(c) For membrane roofing, at a period between 24 and 48 hours from release ofthe water, an infra-red scan shall be carried out by an independent specialistcontractor to establish if there has been penetration through the membrane.The report, compiled by the infra-red scanning contractor, shall be submittedto the Project Manager for review.

(d) Where flooding tests are not practical such as on wall cladding and pitchedroof cladding, a spray/hose pipe test shall be conducted where all joints andflashings are subjected to a continuous spray of water (minimum flow- 1litre/second) for a period of 1 hour.

28.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

28.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Details of all roofing systems and wall claddings used;

(b) Drawings showing the extent of each type of roof and wall cladding system;

(c) Particulars of materials manufacturers;

(d) Common causes of typical damage with instructions for temporary patchingand permanent repairs; and

(e) Means of safe access to the roof and wall cladding;

(f) Procedures for replacing panels and other typical components; and

(g) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 47/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

SECTION 29 CURTAIN WALLING

29.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of curtain walling

including, but not limited to:

(a) aluminium/stainless steel framing member;

(b) galvanized mild steel sections as reinforcement;

(c) fixings, connections and provision of  anchorages;

(d) glass and glazing materials including glass spacers, gaskets, sealants etc;

(e) spandrels, dressings to roofs/abutments, integral louvers and screens to A/Cintakes/exhausts and operable windows;

(f) stone panels and their support systems;

(g) ironmongery and fittings;

(h) sills, copings, water bars, flashings, seals and other attachments;

(i) insulation against fire between storeys and designated compartments;

(j) isolation of dissimilar metals and moving parts;

(k) all preparatory work to the adjoining structure ;

(l) sealants within work of this section and at boundaries with work of othersections;

(m) thermal insulation at non-vision areas;

(n) test mock-up;

(o) field tests for resistance to water leakage;

(p) material tests;

(q) final cleaning; and

(r) lightning protection;

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(s) reinforced concrete structure, and anchorages etc. refer to section 20;

(t) steelwork refer to section 22;

(u) aluminium and Aluminium alloy refer to section 35.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 48/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(v) internal finishes refer to sections 37,38, 39 and 40.

(w) external paving and asphalt work refer to sections 11 and 27;

(x) mechanical air-handling installation refer to section 61;

(y) ceiling installation refer to section 34; and

(z) granite cladding refer to section 26.

29.2 NOT USED

29.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

Hong KongStandards

Code of Practice on Wind Effects Hong Kong.Code of Practice for Overall Thermal Transfer Value inBuildingCode of Practice for Fire Resisting ConstructionBuilding (Construction) Regulations.Building (Planning) RegulationsBuilding Ordinance (Chapter 123)Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation

PNAP APP-16 CladdingPNAP APP-37 Curtain Wall SystemsPNAP APP-67 Energy Efficiency of Buildings

Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulation

British Standards All British Standards referenced herein, current editions. AmericanStandards

 AAMA 501 – Methods of Test for Metal Curtain Wall. AAMA 501.1-83 Dynamic, Water Infiltration Test. AAMA 501.2-83 Method for Field Checking Water Leakage ANSI Z97.1-84 - Performance Specifications and Methodsof Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings All ASTM Standards referenced herein, current editions.

Health andSafety

OSHA Instruction STD 1-3.3 as amended November 12,1985 regarding scaffold tie-backs

29.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

29.4.1 Contractor’s Design

The Employer’s Drawings and Specification define design intent and performancerequirements only. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final design.

29.4.2 Contractor’s Design Responsibilities

The Contractor shall:

(a) ensure that the appearance of the exposed elements, including width anddepth, is consistent throughout the curtain walling works, unless otherwise

specified;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 49/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) ensure that the overall thickness of each glass type, and the componentthickness of each multiple layer glass type, is consistent throughout the curtainwalling works, unless otherwise specified;

(c) provide anchor adjustment capability for the full range of specified tolerances;

(d) provide movable joints to accommodate the full range of manufacturingtolerances, field tolerances, thermal movements, floor sag, beam sag, andcolumn settlement;

(e) provide corrosion protection between dissimilar materials;

(f) provide a water-tightness/’pressure equalization and rain screen’ curtain wall;and

(g) provide a completed external envelope which is accessible and maintainableinternally.

29.4.3 Design Pressures and Loads

(a) Pressures and loads used for design shall be calculated in accordance withthe requirements of the Code of Practice on Wind Effects Hong Kong but shallnot be less than the minimum values specified below.

(b) Wind pressures act perpendicular to flat surfaces, regardless of surfaceorientation, and wind pressures act perpendicular to tangents of curvedsurfaces at corners and other changes in plane, shall be assumed toexperience their inward design pressures and their outward design pressuressimultaneously. Design for simultaneous occurrence of inward designpressure on one surface and outward design pressure on the adjoining

surface is not required.

(c) The minimum outward (negative) wind pressure shall be 3.1 kPa. Theminimum inward (positive) wind pressure shall be 2.2 kPa.

29.4.4 Criteria for Framing Members and Anchors at Glass and Stone

Performance criteria at design pressures and loads for glass, metal panels, stoneand their support system shall be as follows:

(a) Deflection limits and performance requirements at pressures and loads fromzero to 150 percent of design values:

(i) framing member residual deflection after pressure or load is removedshall not exceed 1/1,000 times distance between supports or 2/1,000times cantilever length;

(ii) at anchors, framing member deflection relative to building structure shallnot exceed 5.0 mm, nor 3.0 mm after pressure or load is removed;

(iii) upon reversal of pressure or load direction, relative movement betweentwo components that are fastened or clamped together shall not exceed5.0 mm; and

(iv) there shall be no disengagement, failure or gross permanent distortion ofany component, including glass and gaskets.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 50/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) At 50 percent of design pressures, glass centre deflection relative to glassedges shall not exceed 25 mm. Glass deflection at 1.5 times design pressuresshall be limited to prevent glass disengagement from frame.

(c) At 

100 percent of design pressures and loads:

(i) perpendicular to the plane of the wall, net deflection of framing membersshall not exceed

•  1/180 times distance between supports or 20 mm, whichever is thelesser; or

•  2/180 times cantilever length or 10 mm, whichever is the lesser;

(ii) net deflection perpendicular to enclosure surface for framing memberssupporting stone shall not exceed:

•  1/360 times distance between supports, not to exceed 13.0 mm;

•  2/360 times cantilever length, not to exceed 6.0 mm;

•  lesser values which may be required to limit stress in stone;

(iii) net defection of framing members parallel to enclosure surface shall notexceed the smallest of either:

•  3.0 mm due to dead load only;

•  3.0 mm change in opening size at any point; or

•  1/360 times distance between supports, not to exceed 10.0 mm;

(iv) net deflection parallel and perpendicular to enclosure surface for framingmembers at perimeter sealant joints shall not exceed the smallest ofeither: values specified above; 50 percent of joint width; or a valuecorresponding to the movement capability of the sealant; and

(v) maximum deflection of metal panels and metal faced panels shall notexceed 0.01 times the shorter dimension (width or height) of the panel.This deflection limit also applies to any stiffeners (but not the perimeterframing members), which are attached to panels.

(d) Design rules for framing members at design pressures and loads:

(i) stresses shall not exceed the allowable values established by theStandards and Code of Parctice listed under section 29.3. An allowablestress increase of 1/3 shall not be permitted for:

•  metal plates or legs up to (12.0 mm) thick bent about the weakaxis;

•  fasteners in drilled holes in concrete and concrete masonry units;

•  fillet welds; partial penetration groove welds; and

•  stresses resulting from dead loads;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 51/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(ii) glass, sealants and interior finishes shall not be assumed to contribute toframing member strength, stiffness or lateral stability;

(iii) compression flanges of flexural members may be assumed to receiveeffective lateral bracing only from

•  anchors to the building structure; and

•  horizontal glazing rails or interior trim which are in actual contactwith the compression flange. Points of contra-flexure shall not beregarded as lateral braces or as the end points of an unbracedlength; unbraced length shall be the actual distance betweeneffective lateral braces as defined above;

(iv) where a framing member reaction is resisted by a continuous element,the maximum assumed effective length of the resisting element shall befour times the bearing length, but not more than 300 mm;

(v) splice joints which permit thermal and/or other movements by slippagewithin the joint shall be assumed to have zero moment capacity; and

(vi) where a framing member runs continuously past a deflection support,combined deflection of member and support shall not exceed specifiedlimits.

29.4.5 Criteria for Fasteners

Performance criteria for fasteners at design pressures and loads shall be as follows:

(a) General requirements:

(i) Actual tension shall be taken as the sum of direct tension plus tensiondue to prying.

(ii) The penetrations of a shim stack with total thickness "t" by a fastenerwith nominal diameter "d" shall require reductions in allowable tensionforce and allowable shear force. The minimum reduction shall be zeropercent for t=d, varying linearly to 100 percent or t=2d. Such reductionshall be in addition to any other reductions, which may be applicable. Anacceptable alternative method is to assume that the shims provide noresistance to fastener bending, compute fastener bending stress withcross sectional properties based on root diameter, add bending stress to

tension stress and evaluate tension/shear interaction.

(iii) Unless otherwise specified, combined tension and shear shall beevaluated according to an interaction formula in which each term equalsthe square of the actual force divided by the square of the allowableforce. The sum of the terms shall not exceed 1.0.

(iv) Unless otherwise specified, allowable values for stresses produced bywind loading may be increased by one fourth, but not in combinationwith any reduction of combined loads.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 52/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) Requirements for carbon steel machine bolts and sheet metal screws:

(i) for all fasteners less than 12 mm, compute actual tensile stress andactual shear stress based on the tensile stress area. Tensile stress shallnot exceed 0.44 times ultimate tensile stress. Shear stress shall notexceed 0.22 times ultimate tensile stress; and

(ii) for nominal diameter equal to or greater than 12 mm, evaluate tension,shear and combined stress according to AISC Steel ConstructionManual.

(c) Requirements for 300 series stainless machine bolts and sheet metal screws:

(i) for nominal diameter equal to or greater than 6 mm, the computedtensile stress based on the tensile stress area shall not exceed 0.541times tensile yield stress. Shear stress based on gross area shall notexceed 20 percent of the ultimate tensile stress where threads are notincluded in the shear plane, and 14 percent of the ultimate tensile stress

where threads are included in the shear plane;

(ii) for nominal diameter less than 6.0 mm tensile, stress based on thetensile stress area shall not exceed 0.541 times tensile yield stress.Shear stress based on tensile stress area shall not exceed 20 percent ofthe ultimate tensile stress; and

(iii) unless manufacturer's written certification of greater strength issubmitted with design calculations, provide fasteners with minimum yieldstress of 207 MPa and minimum ultimate tensile stress of 518 MPa.

(d) Requirements for fasteners in drilled holes in concrete and concrete block:

(i) tension shall not exceed 25 percent of ultimate tensile strength. Shearshall not exceed 25 percent of ultimate shear strength. Combined loadshall be evaluated by an interaction formula, the terms of which shall beactual load divided by allowable load; the sum of the terms shall notexceed 1.0. Allowable loads shall not be increased by one fourth or anyother factor. Comply with manufacturer design rules if more stringentthan specified herein. Apply reductions for spacing and edge distance;and

(ii) self drilling, self-threading fasteners are not acceptable. Screws in plugsand powder actuated fasteners are not acceptable.

(e) For self-drilling steel fasteners in aluminium and steel, tension and shear shallnot exceed 50 percent of their respective ultimate strengths.

29.4.6 Criteria for Hong Kong Government Buildings Ordinance Office Cyclic Test

Performance criteria for Hong Kong Government Buildings Ordinance Office cyclicstructural test shall be as specified in “Building Ordinance Office-Practice Note for Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers – Part B – Application ofthe Buildings Ordinance and Regulations – APP-37”.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 53/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.4.7 Criteria for Structural Silicone

Structural silicone and related structural components shall comply with the followingperformance requirements:

(a) Wind pressure shall be supported in tension or shear, but not tension andshear simultaneously.

(b) Allowable tension stress or shear stress (but not combined tension and shearstress) shall not exceed 138 kPa at design pressures and loads. Theallowable stress is subject to specified material tests, which may result in avalue of less than 138 kPa.

(c) The allowable stress shall not be increased by 1/4 or any other factor for windload.

(d) Structural silicone shall not be used to support dead weight of glass, panels or

any cladding material.

(e) Structural silicone shall demonstrate by test an ultimate stress of at least threetimes the stress caused by design conditions. The force per unit lengthcorresponding to the ultimate silicone stress (three times design) shall betransmitted without failure by metal finish (including paint films), glasscoatings, insulating glass edge, laminated glass edge and all othercomponents in the line of stress.

(f) Where a test mock-up is subjected to 1.5 times design pressures and loads,the structural silicone and related structural components shall withstand suchloading without failure.

(g) On the building, structural silicone shall not experience adhesive or cohesivefailure.

(h) Structural silicone shall not be applied to edges of insulating glass units, or toedges of laminated glass units.

29.4.8 Criteria for Glass

Glass shall comply with the following performance requirements:

(a) For the purpose of glass selection, design wind pressure shall be assumed to

have one-minute duration. Minimum roof live load shall be assumed to haveone-week duration.

(b) Upon first application of design wind and live load pressures, probability ofbreakage shall not exceed 8/1,000 for vertical glass, and 1/1,000 for slopedand horizontal glass.

(c) The Contractor shall provide heat strengthened glass where annealed glasswould be vulnerable to thermal breakage.

(d) Glass provided for a test mock-up shall be identical (including strength) to theglass provided for the corresponding zone on the actual building. Mock-up

glass that breaks shall be replaced with the same type glass, and the testscontinued. Repeated glass breakage shall constitute failure.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 54/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(e) Insulating glass shall not experience fogging, wetting or staining within thesealed space, spacer corrosion, spacer migration, adhesive or cohesive failureof primary or secondary edge seal. This requirement applies to insulatingglass used in vision and spandrel areas.

(f) Insulating glass shall not experience decrease in the air space dimension due

to chemical reaction of desiccant with entrapped air.

(g) Glass lamination shall not delaminate, stain or discolour.

(h) Glass reflective coating shall not crack, peel, stain or discolour.

(i) Spandrel glass opacifier shall not crack, peel, wrinkle, delaminate, stain ordiscolour.

(j) Spandrel glass safety backing and/or opacifier shall be capable of retainingcracked glass in place.

(k) Glass in mock-up is required to withstand up to 1.5 times design pressureswithout breakage. It is recognized that any one-glass plate can break at anypressure. Therefore a limited amount of breakage of test mock-up glass isacceptable, provided that replacement glass with the same nominal strengtheventually passes all tests. Repeated glass breakage of mock-up glassconstitutes failure.

(l) Where the glass is supported by structural silicone, the glass edgeconstruction (including insulating glass primary and secondary seal, glasslamination, reflective coating, ceramic frit, opacifiers) shall demonstrate by testthe ability to transmit without failure a force per unit length equal to three timesdesign conditions. For insulating glass edge construction, it shall be assumed

that the entire outward design pressure is supported solely by the outdoorglass.

(m) Glass shall not experience spontaneous breakage.

(n) Glass centre deflection relative to glass edges at 50 percent of specifieddesign pressures shall not exceed 25.0 mm. Glass deflection at 1.5 timesdesign pressures shall be limited to prevent disengagement from frame.

29.4.9 Criteria for Stone

(a) Flexural strength of stone shall be determined by test, and the smallest

average value shall be computed. The smallest average value shall bereduced by the design factor to obtain an allowable stress at designpressures. The allowable stress shall not be increased by 1/4 or any otherfactor. In the absence of specified test data, the assumed allowable stress forpreliminary design shall not exceed 1.7 MPa for granite, 1.1 MPa for marbleand travertine, 0.92 MPa for limestone. Final design shall be based onspecified test results, not assumed values.

(b) Ultimate strength of stone at its anchors shall be determined by test, and theaverage value for each group shall be computed. The average values shall bereduced by design factors to obtain allowable loads or stresses at designpressures. The allowable loads or stresses shall not be increased by 1/4 or

any other factor.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 55/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(c) The minimum ratio of flexural strength to actual bending stress in stone is thedesign factor and is related to the spread of data within each subgroup ofspecimens used to determine flexural strength. Within each subgroup anaverage value is computed and the high and low values are expressed, as apercentage of the average. The design factor shall be computed for thesubgroups.

(i) If within all subgroups, the high and low values deviate 10 percent orless from the average, the design factor is 3.0 for granite, 4.0 for marbleand travertine, and 5.0 for limestone.

(ii) If within one or more subgroups, the high and/or low value deviatesmore than 10 percent but not more than 20 percent from the average,the design factor is 4.0 for granite, 5.0 for marble and travertine, and 6.0for limestone.

(iii) If within one or more subgroups the high and/or low value deviates morethan 20 percent from the average, the design factor is 6.0 for granite, 7.0

for marble and travertine, and 8.0 for limestone.

(d) The minimum ratio of stone ultimate strength at its anchors to actual load orstress is the design factor and is related to the spread of data within eachgroup of anchor test samples. Within each group, an average value iscomputed and the high and low values are expressed as a percentage of theaverage.

(i) If within a group, the high and low values deviate 10 percent or less fromthe average, the design factor is 4.5 for granite, 6.0 for marble andtravertine, and 7.5 for limestone.

(ii) If within a group, the high and/or low value deviates more than 10percent but not more than 20 percent from the average, the designfactor is 6.0 for granite, 7.5 for marble and travertine and 9.0 forlimestone.

(iii) If within a group, the high and/or low value deviates more than 20percent from the average, the design factor is 8.0 for granite, 10.0 formarble and travertine, and 12.0 for limestone.

(e) Each piece of stone shall have its own dead weight anchors. Stacking ofmultiple pieces over a shared dead weight anchor is not permitted. Wind loadanchors and dead load anchors which rely solely on adhesive bond are not

permitted.

(f) Calculation of actual stone stress shall be based upon minimum stonethickness (nominal thickness minus thickness tolerance).

(g) Stone shall be supported by continuous stainless steel or anodised aluminiumkerf clips engaging continuous sawn grooves at two opposite edges. The clipshall nominally overlap the stone on both sides of the groove by at least 13.0mm. The theoretical overlap based on the worst combination of specifiedbuilding and wall movements shall not be less than 10.0 mm. Actual overlapas measured in the field shall not be less than 10.0 mm or a greater dimensionif required by design criteria. Clip and stone design shall be based on transfer

of force at the mid-point of the overlap dimension.

(h) Stone shall not be designed to act as part of a composite flexural member.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 56/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.4.10 Criteria for Track and Tieback

Continuous scaffold track and discrete tiebacks for cable restraint shall be capableof withstanding an ultimate concentrated force of 9.6 KN acting in any direction, atany point on the track, without failure or gross permanent distortion of the track,tieback or any other component of the exterior wall. Allowable working stress for

tracks, tiebacks and wall components shall not exceed a force of 2.4 KN acting inany direction. Tiebacks shall conform to OSHA Instruction STD 1-3.3 as amendedon November 12, 1985.

29.4.11 Criteria for Weather Seals

Sealants used as weather seals shall not experience adhesive or cohesive failure.Sealants shall withstand movements up to the limits prescribed by the manufacturer.Exposed sealant surface shall not crack or bubble. Sealants and primers shall notstain adjacent materials. Sealants shall be used only if the manufacturers' adhesion,compatibility and stain tests yield favourable results. Sealants shall not be adheredto, or placed against, the edge of a laminated glass unit inter-layer.

29.4.12 Floor Sag and Other Movements

Movable joints shall be provided to accommodate the full range of manufacturingtolerance, field tolerance, thermal movement, lateral movement, floor sag, beam sagand column settlement. Joints shall accommodate the worst possible combination ofeffects so as to prevent internal stress, failure, deterioration or failure of weatherseals. In no case shall the computed and as-built glass bite relative to metal framebe less than 10.0 mm. In no case shall the computed and as-built glass edgeclearance to nearest metal be less than 6.0 mm. The design differential movementsshall be as specified. Expansion joints in ribbon window heads and sills shall not belocated such that thermal movement exerts shear stress on structural silicone.

29.4.13 Criteria for Thermal Movement

(a) Thermal component of joint movement shall be based upon a minimummaterial temperature increase of 55oC and decrease of 55  oC relative tonominal condition. Design for these assumed temperature changes shall beregardless of surface areas exposed to exterior and interior. Uniformtemperature shall be assumed for the entire cross section.

(b) For thermal design other than joint movement, the design winter surfacetemperature shall be 0 oC. The design summer surface temperature shall be atleast 71 oC. The internal ambient temperature shall range from 15  oC to 25 oC.

 All components including adhesives and sealants shall be capable ofwithstanding without failure design winter temperature to design summertemperature with simultaneous specified loads. 

29.4.14 Water Leakage Control

(a) Internal gutters and weep system shall be provided to collect and drain waterleakage and condensation to the exterior.

(b) Stick built curtain walls and punched windows shall have an isolated guttercavity at each glass perimeter so that any leakage is confined to and weptfrom the opening of leakage origin.

(c) Unitized curtain walls shall have continuous spliced gutters at the horizontalstack joints, with sealed end caps at termination conditions.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 57/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(d) Sloped walls shall convey leakage to the lowest point and drain to the exterior.Horizontal ribbon windows shall have a continuous gutter and weep holes atthe glass sill and a continuous gutter at the glass head which either drainsdirectly to the exterior or directs any leakage from the spandrel above it to theglass sill via internal cavities.

(e) The Contractor shall coordinate with other trades to achieve watertightinterface and/or overlap of gutter and weep systems. 

29.4.15 Condensation Gutters

Sloped and horizontal walls shall have continuous condensation gutters of the samematerial (aluminium/stainless steel) at all framing members. Condensation shall bewept to the exterior.

29.4.16 Glass Replacement

Glazing details shall permit glass replacement after initial construction, reuse of

original gaskets and glass replacement of the same original nominal size withoutcutting of framing members or removal of interior finishes. Vision glass inconventional frames shall be replaceable from the interior. Spandrel glass shall bereplaceable from the exterior. Silicone supported vision glass shall be replaceablefrom the exterior and/or interior.

29.4.17 Gasket Disengagement not Permitted

Gaskets and weather strips shall not be disengaged for pressures up to 1.5 timesdesign pressures, for specified movements, or for specified thermal changes.

29.4.18 Criteria for Internal Trim

Interior window sill trim shall not deflect more than 3.2 mm when subjected to aconcentrated force of 111 N at any point. Residual deflection after removal of forceshall not exceed 1.6 mm.

29.4.19 Criteria for Snap-On Components

(a) Snap engaged trim shall not be disengaged when subject to a concentratedforce of 50 N at any point or during uniform pressure structural tests atpressures less than or equal to 1.5 times design pressures.

(b) Exterior snap engaged trim shall provide secondary means of securement.

Snap engaged trim shall be secured against migration.

(c) Snap engaged components shall not serve any primary structural function,such as retention of glass or panels. Snap engaged plastic components shallnot be permitted, except as non-structural thermal improvement for interiortrim.

(d) Joints in continuous snap covers and other continuous trim shall have splicesleeves of the same material and finish as the cover or trim. Mechanicallyfasten splice sleeves to trim.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 58/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.4.20 Criteria for Painted Finishes

Painted finishes on aluminium shall:(a) comply with BS 4842 and/or BS 6496; and

(b) have a durability of 25 years and shall not crack or peel during this period.

29.4.21 Requirements Applicable to Mock-Up, Samples and Building

(a) Performance requirements specified for test mock-ups and specimens shallalso apply to the actual building, and vice versa.

(b) Variations in criteria over the surface of the building, such as wind pressure,are taken into account in testing of mock-ups and samples.

(c) Where certain performance is required for specific test conditions of mock-upsand samples, that same performance is also required of the actual building, fornatural conditions equivalent to or less severe than the test conditions.

29.4.22 Criteria for Operating Windows

Operable windows shall comply with the following performance requirements:

(a) Operable windows shall comply with the General Specification. In addition,and as a minimum, operable windows shall also comply with BS 4873 and BS6375. 

(b) Prior to any other mock-up tests, operable windows shall be unlocked, fullyopened, closed and locked for a minimum of 50 cycles. If any repairs oradjustments are performed after cycling, the minimum 50 cycles shall be

repeated. Mock-up specimens shall be tested for water leakage.

(c) As part of any mock-up tests, separate window vents shall be provided in fixedframes to the laboratory for tests in compliance with BS 6375: Part 2.

(d) Operable windows shall be completed with ironmongery and accessories andonly operable by special keys.

(e) Hinges and fastening mechanisms shall withstand positive and negativepressures due to specified wind conditions when the windows are in bothopened and closed positions.

29.4.23 Closure Panels and Sills

(a) Ceiling and bottom/floor closure panels, strips or sills shall comprisealuminium minimum 3.0 mm thick or stainless steel minimum 1.2 mm thick.

(b) The surface of the aluminium shall match the colour of the framing.

(c) Ceiling closure strips shall be capable of supporting venetian blinds of anytype and weight and if indicated on the Drawings shall be recessed for thesame.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 59/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.4.24 Criteria for Honeycomb Panels

 Aluminium honeycomb panels shall comply with the following performancerequirements:

(a) Panels shall comply with the overall performance requirements for the curtain

wall.

(b) At design pressures, centre deflection of panels shall not exceed 0.01 timesthe smaller panel dimension.

(c) Panel edges shall not compress or crush due to clamping pressures exertedby the frame and gaskets.

(d) Face sheets and back sheets shall not totally or partially delaminate fromcores for specified temperature variation and building movement, incombination with wind pressures up to 1.5 times design pressures.Delamination is unacceptable regardless of the measured deviation from

flatness which results.

(e) Panels in place shall not warp or bow such that deviation from flatnessexceeds 3.0 mm along any straight line which extends from a panel edge toany other edge. Where the edge is concealed, the nearest exposed point tothe edge shall be used.

(f) Structural calculation submittal shall include computations for deflection, facestress, core shear stress, face dimpling and face wrinkling. At designpressures, the ratios of face yield stress, core shear strength, critical dimplingstress and critical wrinkling stress to actual respective stresses shall be atleast 2.0. Allowable stress shall not be increased by 1/4 or any other factor for

wind loading.

(g) Structural calculation submittal shall include data for the honeycomb core witha certification from the core manufacturer, or a test report from an independentlaboratory for tests conducted within 30 days of submittal date. Data shallinclude stabilized compressive strength, stabilized compressive elasticmodulus, crush strength, shear strength and elastic modulus in "L" and "W"directions.

(h) Structural calculation submittal shall include a test report from an independentlaboratory for tests conducted within 30 days of submittal for the adhesiveused to bond face and back sheets to core. Tests shall be conducted on

samples using the production facings, core and adhesive. Data shall includetensile and shear strength of bond line at -18, 4, 27, 49, 71 oC. Each strengthvalue shall correspond to a constant load (not constant deformation)maintained for a minimum of 10 seconds. Actual stresses shall be computedat the adhesive plane. The ratio of strength (based on the lowest test value,not the average) to actual stress shall be a minimum of 2.0. Combined stressshall be evaluated by a linear interaction formula. The allowable stress shallnot be increased by one fourth or any other value. The applied load shall notbe reduced by any factor.

29.4.25 Fire Resistance

(a) The top and bottom gaps between the structural floor slabs and related beamsand the panels of the curtain wall shall be completely sealed up with fireresistant material to maintain a 2 hour fire resistant period.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 60/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) Anchorages between the curtain wall and the structure shall be similarlyprotected with fireproof material to give a total resistant period of 2 hours. Thefire resistant material in the gaps between the curtain wall and the structuralfloor and related beams shall be rigidly fixed to the structure continuously suchthat it shall remain in position when subjected to the prolonged action of heatand fire.

(c) Asbestos products shall not be used.

(d) The resistant period for stability and integrity shall be tested in accordancewith BS 476: Part 8.

29.4.26 Lightning Protection

(a) The design shall provide an efficient continuous electrical conductivity bothwith negligible resistance vertically and horizontally along the entire surface ofthe metal framework of the curtain wall in compliance with the BS 6651.Continuity tests shall be carried out by a qualified electrical engineer and with

test records submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection. Additional conductors, wiring connections etc. in the curtain wall shall beincorporated if deemed necessary by the Project Manager.

(b) The electrical earthing and lightning protection system for the entire buildingshall bond the highest point of the curtain wall framework to air terminationsand the lowest point of the curtain wall framework to earth. The necessaryconnection terminals to permit such bonding shall be provided.

29.4.27 Prototypes

The Contractor shall:

(a) fabricate and erect after review without objection by the Project Manager ofContractor’s Drawings showing detailed design suitable for manufacture, thefollowing prototypes for the Project Manager’s review without objection prior tofabrication of the curtain walling;

(b) provide prototypes that accurately represent contract conditions including joints, sealants, glass, glazing, stone panels, anchors and finishes;

(c) install sufficient fire-safing insulation to demonstrate details of installation;

(d) install sufficient thermal insulation to demonstrate details of installation; delay

installation of fire-safing and thermal insulation until completion of air, waterand structural tests;

(e) glaze each prototype with one consistent set of gaskets. The use of multiplegasket profiles and/or thickness shall not be permitted;

(f) prior to test, remove and re-glaze selected glass units, using the details andprocedures intended for glass replacement on the actual building. Re-glazedunits shall satisfy test criteria;

(g) provide at least one extra light of glass for each type and size on prototypes.Glass which breaks during testing shall be replaced with new glass and the

tests continued. Repeated glass breakage shall constitute failure;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 61/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 62/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 16/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.5.2 Steel

(a) Stainless steel shall be to BS1449: Pt. 2 grade 316 with minimum thickness of1 mm and with all exposed edges rolled round. Manufacturer’s test certificatesshall be provided with each consignment to the Site to show that the material

has been tested and found to comply with the relevant requirements of BS1449: Part. 2.

(b) Structural steel shall comply with section 22, and shall be galvanized andtested in accordance with section 22.

29.5.3 Aluminium

(a) Aluminium and Aluminium alloy shall comply with the requirements of Section35.

(b) The following alloy and temper combinations are acceptable for extrusions

subject to fabrication, finish and structural requirements: 6063-T5; 6063-T6;6061-T6. Other alloys of the 6xxx series and other tempers shall be submittedto Project Manager for review without objection. Nominal wall thickness of 3.0mm or greater is acceptable for structural extrusions. Wall thickness less than3.0 mm shall be submitted to Project Manager for review without objection.Minimum nominal wall thickness for non-structural trim shall be 1.5 mm.

(c) The following alloy and temper combinations are acceptable for sheet andplate subject to fabrication, finish and structural requirements: 3003-H14;5005-H14. Other alloys of the 3xxx, 5xxx and 6xxx series and other tempersshall be submitted to Project Manager for review without objection l. Minimumnominal thickness shall be 3.0 mm.

29.5.4 Glass

(a) Glass shall conform, as a minimum, to the following standards:

(i) BS 952;

(ii) heat-treated flat glass shall conform to ASTM C 1048, except thatsurface compression of heat strengthened glass shall be in the range of24,000 to 45,000 kPa; and

(iii) tempered and laminated glass shall conform to ANSI Z97.1-1984.

(b) The Contractor shall provide tempered and/ or laminated glass at the followinglocations:

(i) door;

(ii) fixed and operable glazing with a vertical edge within 300 mm of a doorin the closed position and with the bottom edge less than 1,500 mmabove the walking surface;

(iii) fixed glazing with area exceeding one square meter, and with the lowestedge less than 450 mm above a walking surface, which is within 900

mm of such glazing. Tempered and/or laminated glass is not required ifthere is a horizontal member with minimum 40 mm width locatedbetween 600 and 900 mm above the walking surface.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 63/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 17/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(c) The Contractor shall provide heat strengthened glass where required bydesign wind pressures, anticipated thermal stress, and in a spandrel area. TheContractor shall provide fully tempered and/or laminated glass only whererequired by Hong Kong regulations or where design pressures are beyond thecapacity of heat strengthened glass.

(d) Glass reflective metallic coatings shall conform to the following criteria:

(i) pinholes with diameter exceeding 1 mm are not acceptable and shall bepermitted only within 75 mm of an edge;

(ii) clusters of pinholes are not acceptable;

(iii) scratches shall not have length exceeding 75 mm and shall be permittedonly within 75 mm of an edge; and

(iv) no objectionable mottle or streaking shall be visible when glass isviewed at angles of 45 degrees through 90 degrees from a distance of 4

m or more.

(e) Reflective glass shall have the following properties:

(i) shade coefficient shall not exceed 0.30;

(ii) summer heat gain ‘U’ shall not exceed 5.5 W/M2/OC ('U'= thermalconductance value.);

(iii) visible daylight transmittance shall not less than 8%;

(f) Edge quality criteria for annealed and heat strengthened glass shall be as

follows:

(i) shark teeth shall not penetrate more than half of glass thickness;

(ii) serration hackle shall only occur within 150 mm of corners;

(iii) flare shall not exceed 1.0 mm as measured perpendicular to glasssurface across the edge. Flare shall not occur at setting blocks;

(iv) bevel shall not exceed 1.6 mm;

(v) flake chips shall only occur within 200 mm of corners; depth shall not

exceed 0.8 mm and length or diameter shall not exceed 6.0 mm; and

(vi) rough chips shall be not be permitted. Rough chips are those, whichexceed any of the dimensional limits for flake chips.

(g) Insulating glass shall have double edge seals. Primary seal shall be extrudedpolyisobutylene continuously bonded to glass surfaces and desiccant filledmetal spacer, including corners. Minimum width of primary seal shall be 3.0mm. Secondary seal shall be a 2-part neutral cure structural silicone.Secondary seal shall completely cover spacer with no gaps or voids, and shallbe continuously bonded to both plates of glass.

(h) Laminated glass shall consist of two layers of heat-strengthened glass withequal thickness and an interlayer with 1.5 mm nominal thickness.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 64/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 18/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(i) Monolithic heat strengthened and tempered glass shall conform to BS 952 and ATMC 1048 and the following flatness tolerances:

(i) bow and warp have the same meaning as deviation of a glass surfacefrom a true plane, with the glass free-standing or installed in a frame andpositioned in a vertical plane;

(ii) localized bow refers to any straight-line segment with a length of 300mm on a glass surface;

(iii) overall bow refers to any straight line segment on a glass surface, whichextends between opposite edges across the smaller glass dimensionand is perpendicular to at least one edge. The length of the line segmentis the gage length;

(iv) localized bow shall not exceed 1.6 mm;

(v) overall bow shall not exceed: 1.0 mm per 300 mm for gage length in the

range zero to 1 m; 0.75 mm per 300 mm for gage length in the range 1m to 2.40 m; one half of the values listed in ASTMC 1048, Table 2 forgage lengths exceeding 2.40 m;

(vi) where heat treating results in essentially parallel ripples or waves, themaximum peak-to-valley deviation shall not exceed 0.127 mm.Requirements for localized bow and overall bow shall also be satisfied.Direction of ripples shall be consistent throughout the building andreviewed without objection by the Project Manager; and

(vii) the specified bow and ripple tolerances are intended as manufacturingquality control limits.

(j) Tempered glass shall be subject to quality control measures, including heatsoaking, to minimize inclusions which could result in spontaneous breakage.Such inclusions are defined as a material defect by this specification. Installedtempered glass which experiences spontaneous breakage within 12 years ofcompletion of the Works shall be replaced.

(k) Plastic films used to opacify glass shall conform to the following requirements:

(i) minimum nominal thickness of polyethylene shall be 0.1 mm. Colourshall be black;

(ii) minimum nominal thickness of polyester shall be 0.08 mm. Film shall bepigmented and have a black colour;

(iii) the bonding surface shall be completely coated with a solvent basedadhesive; and

(iv) monolithic opacified glass shall have a safety backing for falloutresistance;

(l) Vision glass shall be as specified.

(m) Spandrel glass shall be as specified

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 65/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 19/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.5.5 Stone

(a) Stone nominal thickness shall be determined by the specified tests and designrules but in all cases shall not be less than as specified.

(b) Actual stone thickness shall not be less than nominal less 2.0 mm.

(c) Stone shall be free of damage to front face, back face and edges.

(d) Stone type shall be as specified.

(e) Stone finish shall be as specified.

29.5.6 Anchors in stone

(a) Stone shall be supported by continuous kerf clips in sawn grooves at twoopposite edges of each piece of stone. Kerf clips shall be set in a continuousbed of neutral cure silicone sealant, which has been shown by specified test

requirements not to stain the stone.

(b) Kerf clips shall be stainless steel or anodised aluminium extrusions.

(c) Anchors in stone other than kerf clips for use in limited areas shall besubmitted for review without objection by the Project Manager. Such anchorsshall be stainless steel and may be supplemented by an epoxy adhesive.However anchors rely solely on adhesive are not acceptable.

(d) The following types of anchors shall not be used:

(i) wires;

(ii) anchors whose only means of attachment to stone or building is a bed ofgrout or mortar;

(iii) anchors, which are secured in a hole with lead wool packing;

(iv) anchors which transfer load from one piece of stone to another, ratherthan to the building structure;

(e) Anchors in stone shall provide for differential thermal movement of stone andthe support system.

29.5.7 Glazing Materials

(a) Gaskets and weather-strips except at structural silicone glazing shall conformas a minimum to BS 6262 except:

(i) sponge gaskets shall be extruded black neoprene with a hardness of 40+/-5 durometer. Shore A and conforming to ASTM C 509. Designsponge gaskets to provide 20% to 35% compression;

(ii) dense gaskets shall be black extrusions with a Shore A hardness of75+/-5 for follow profiles and 60+/-5 for solid profiles, and conforming to ASTM C 864. Outdoor gaskets shall be neoprene or Santoprene. Indoor

gaskets shall be neoprene, Santoprene or EPDM. Where indoor andoutdoor gaskets are reversible for reglazing, EPDM shall not be used foreither gasket;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 66/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 20/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(iii) injection mold all corners of gaskets where compatible with installationprocedures; and

(iv) interior and exterior gasket profiles shall be designed to produce a glassedge pressure of not less than 0.70 N/mm, nor more than 1.75 N/mm.

(b) Gaskets at structural silicone glazing:

(i) Glazing gaskets, sealant backers within glazing pockets and continuousglass spacer pads at structural silicone shall be black heat cured siliconerubber. Properties falling within the range listed below are acceptableprovided that adequate glass support and weather seals are achieved.

Table 29.1: Properties of Structural Silicon

Durometer + or - 5. Shore.A 50 60 70

Tensile, (MPa) Min 5.5 5.5 6.2Elongation, % Min. 300 200 200

Tear, Die B (MPa) Min. 0.45 0.48 0.55

Compression Set, % Max.22 Hrs. at 1000C 20 20 25

22 Hrs. at 175 C 40 40 50

Heat Age for70Hrs at 100 C

Durometer, A, Change Pts. Max +3 +3 +3

Tensile, Change % Max. -10 -10 -10Elongation, Change % Max. -20 -20 -20

(c) Gaskets that maintain glass face clearance while serving as a backer for asilicone weather seal may have a friction fit. All other gaskets and weather

strips, including backers for structural silicone, shall have a continuous splineor a continuous groove which engages a matching groove or leg on thealuminium frame,

(d) Double sided tape is acceptable as a glass spacer pad when used inconjunction with structural silicone, subject to review without objection by theProject Manager.

(e) Setting Blocks:

(i) setting blocks shall be dense extruded neoprene, silicone or EPDM witha hardness of 85 +/-5 durometer Shore A, a minimum length of 100 mm

and a minimum width corresponding to the glass thickness. Settingblocks shall be equidistant from the glass centreline. Location of settingblocks at glass quarter points is acceptable. The distance from thevertical glass edge to the nearest edge of the setting block shall not beless than 150 mm or 0.125 times glass width, whichever is greater;

(ii) shims used in conjunction with setting blocks shall be of the samematerial, hardness, length and width as the setting blocks;

(iii) setting blocks and chairs shall be secured against migration;

(iv) silicone setting blocks shall be used where structural silicone occurs at

the sill; and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 67/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 21/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(v) silicone setting blocks are acceptable for insulating glass units withsilicone edge seals. Neoprene or EPDM setting blocks are acceptableonly if permitted by the insulating glass fabricator, and if structuralsilicone does not occur at the sill.

(f) Side/Centring Blocks:

(i) side blocks shall be provided at both jambs, between the mid-height andtop corner of the glass. Blocks shall be 55 +/- 5 durometer. Shore Adense neoprene, silicone or EPDM. Install block with clearance betweenblock and bearing- surface. Blocks shall be positively secured inposition;

(ii) side blocks are not required where glass is supported along the verticaledges with structural silicone; and

(iii) extruded silicone side blocks are acceptable for insulating glass unitswith silicone edge seals. Neoprene or EPDM side blocks are acceptable

only if permitted by the insulating glass fabricator.

(g) Structural Gaskets:

(i) structural gaskets shall be composed of rubber-based material havingproven compatibility with silicone sealants when used in a 'wet' system;

(ii) 'Dry' system gaskets shall be extruded with integral locking strips or‘zipper' type insertions producing a compression grip on the framestructure and the glass. Gaskets shall be continuously placed around theglazing. The dimensional tolerance and the resulting edge bite shall beas recommended by the manufacturer; and

(iii) colour of the gaskets shall be reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

29.5.8 Anchors in Concrete and Masonry

(a) Anchors embedded in concrete and masonry shall be hot-dip galvanized rolledsteel, or hot-dip galvanized cold-formed steel in compliance with BS 729.  Galvanize steel parts of anchors. After field welding, the Contractor shallremove weld slag and touch up galvanized surface.

(b) Strength of embedded anchors shall be developed by integral projections or

by welded deformed bars or headed studs.

(c) Through bolts are acceptable at masonry, provided that bearing plates areused at both masonry surfaces. Expansion bolts shall only used with thepermission of the Project Manager.

(d) All bolts shall be cast-in-situ at concrete. Expansion bolts shall only used withthe permission of the Project Manager.

(e) Self drilling, self threading screws are not acceptable. Screws in plugs andpowder-actuated fasteners shall not be used.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 68/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 22/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.5.9 Fasteners

(a) Fastener requirements listed below shall be applicable to screws, bolts, nuts,washers, rivets and pins.

(b) Fasteners outboard of or within a glazing pocket, gutter, and flashed cavity or

other potentially wet location (after completion of construction) shall bestainless steel type 302 or 304. Fasteners inboard of potentially wet locationsshall be stainless steel type 302 or 304, cadmium plated carbon steel or zincplated carbon steel.

(c) Stainless steel fasteners shall comply with BS 3111: Part 2 and BS 6105.Stainless steel washers shall comply with BS 4320  and BS 4464  as far assizes and tolerances are concerned.

(d) Bolts, screws, nuts and washers shall comply with section 22 (Steelwork).

(e) The Contractor shall provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted

connections.

(f) Powder actuated fasteners shall not be used.

(g) Aluminium fasteners shall comply with BS 1473.

(h) Actions subsequent to any failure of material or test specimens shall be inaccordance with the requirements of section 22 (Steelwork).

29.5.10 Shims

(a) At  connections subject to thermal movement or other movement, the

Contractor shall separate all pairs of moving surfaces with friction reducingpads. Pads shall have minimum 3 mm thickness, sufficiently reduce fiction towear, and be positively retained in position (open ended slots are notacceptable). Pads shall not be subjected to heat damage from welding orcutting, or to excessive pressure from over-tightening of bolts.

(b) Shims which transfer shear forces (tending to slide one shim against another)shall be steel plates, set in a staggered pattern and fillet welded, to each otherand to the adjacent steel surfaces. The shims and welds shall be structurallydesigned to support the applied loads.

(c) Plastic shims are acceptable at static connections for which the shims transfer

only compressive forces.

(d) Wood shims shall not be used.

29.5.11 Weep Hole Filters

Weep hole filters shall be 8 to 18 pore per centimetre PVC coated open cellurethane foam, compressed 30 to 50 percent.

29.5.12 Sealants

(a) Capping sealant shall be one-part gun grade moisture curing silicone

elastomeric sealant. The colour of the sealant shall be as reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 69/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 23/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) Caulking sealant shall be either;

(i) one part gun grade neutral moisture curing silicone elastomeric sealant,or

(ii) one part gun grade moisture curing modified polyurethane.

(c) The sealant shall comply with the minimum performance and testingrequirements stated in ASTM-D-2240, D-395 (method A), D-412, D-624, C-794, D-750, TT-S-001543A and a weatherometer. The colour of the sealantshall be as reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(d) Structural sealant shall be either:

(i) one part gun grade neutral moisture curing silicone, elastomeric sealant;or

(ii) two-part neutral curing silicone elastomeric sealant. Products requiring

mixing of components shall only be used for shop application with mixingand application equipment acceptable to the sealant manufacturer.

(e) Printed instructions and recommendations of the sealant manufacturerregarding joint size limitations, mixing, priming and application shall becomplied with. Unless printed instructions advise to the contrary, theContractor shall not apply sealants when substrates are wet or when thetemperature is below 4oC.

(f) Sealant back-up materials shall be polyethylene foam, urethane foam orextruded silicone as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

(g) All sealant shall be tooled as a separate operation after application.

(h) The Contractor shall co-ordinate with trades to assure compatibility ofintersecting sealants.

29.5.13 Thermal Insulation and Fire Safing Insulation

(a) The maximum “Overall Thermal Transfer Values” (OTTV) to be used in thedesign of the building envelope are:

Table 29.2: OTTV Values

Use Building(including walls and roof)

Commercial Building 32 w/m

(b) The Contractor shall insulate spandrel glass and other non-vision areas withthermal insulation having a 63.0 mm minimum thickness and a 0.127 mm thickreinforced aluminium foil vapour barrier. Minimum R-value for insulation aloneshall be 1.90 square meter - K/W.

(c) Insulation shall be retained by aluminium or galvanized steel clips or straps, orintegral pockets within the window frames. Maximum spacing of clips andstraps shall be 600 mm. Welded or glued impaling pins shall not be permitted.

Maintain 25 mm nominal air space between insulation and glass.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 70/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 24/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(d) The Contractor shall support insulation where it contacts fire-safing to preventbow of insulation from pressure exerted by fire-safing.

(e) The Contractor shall completely fill void at floor and roof edges with fireproofmaterial with thickness as required to provide a 2-hour fire rating.

(f) The Contractor shall support fire-safing insulation on galvanized steel supportclips spaced at a maximum of 450 mm centres.

29.5.14 Operable Windows

Except as otherwise specified herein, operating windows shall also comply with (asa minimum) BS 4873 and BS 6375:

(a) Weather-strips, glazing gaskets and glazing blocks shall be extrudedneoprene. The Contractor shall provide gaskets on both sides of the ventglass.

(b) The required test specimen size shall be the maximum size operable windowfor the Works.

(c) Locks and strikes shall be white bronze or type 302 or 304 stainless steel. TheContractor shall provide a minimum of two locks and two strikes per vent.

(d) Fixed frames and vent frames shall be extruded aluminium. Vent frames shallconsist of a tubular profile.

(e) Weather-strips shall have a continuous splice engaged in a continuous groovein the aluminium sash and/or fixed frame. Two continuous lines of weather-strip are required at vent perimeters.

(f) Balance arms shall be four-bar stainless steel type 302 or 304 with adjustablefriction shoe. Provide two balance arms per vent.

(g) The Contractor shall provide two limit stops per operable window. Materialshall be type 302 or 304 stainless steel. Stops shall restrict clear opening to100 mm. Effective ventilating area shall be based on the maximum clearopening, not on the gross window area.

(h) Special keys shall be required to open the operable windows.

(i) Hinges and fastening mechanisms shall withstand positive and negative

pressures due to specified wind conditions when the windows are in the openor closed positions.

29.5.15 Aluminium Honeycomb Panels

(a) Overall nominal thickness shall be 25.0 mm.

(b) Face and back sheets shall be aluminium with nominal thickness of 1.0 mm. Alloy shall be of the 3xxx, 5xxx or 6xxx series and shall satisfy structural andfinish requirements. Formed edge returns and seal edges shall be providedwith silicone sealant. Bonding surfaces shall be chemically pre-treated toassure effective and durable bond.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 71/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 25/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(c) Core shall be hexagonal cell aluminium foil with minimum nominal thickness of0.0762 mm. Cell size shall not exceed 6.0 mm measured across flats. Foilshall have an organic corrosion resistant coating. Alloy shall be 3003, 5052, or2024.

(d) Adhesive shall be a thermal setting modified epoxy with a minimum set

temperature of 121oC. The adhesive shall form a fillet at the perimeter of eachcell, and shall continuously bond each cell to the face and back sheets.

(e) The face, sheet back sheet, and core of each panel shall be cut from singlepiece of material.

(f) For panels in place, deviation from flatness of exterior face shall not exceed3.0 mm along any straight line which extends from a panel edge to any otheredge. Where the edge is concealed, the nearest exposed point to the edgeshall be used.

(g) Panel exterior face shall be free of visual discontinuities such as ripples,

creases, dents, bubbles and blisters, regardless of the measured deviationfrom flatness at such discontinuities.

29.5.16 Louvres

(a) Louvres shall consist of extruded aluminium perimeter frames and blades.

(b) Frame corners and blade ends shall be welded or fastened with 300 seriesstainless steel screws.

(c) Blades shall be provided with concealed extruded aluminium stiffeners, suchthat vector sum of blade deflections parallel to blade principal axes does not

exceed 1/175 times span at design pressure. Assume that pressure actsperpendicular to the plane formed by the corners of the perimeter frame, andthat the tributary area for one blade equals its projected area on the sameplane.

(d) Where required, the free area of louvres shall comply with mechanicalrequirements.

(e) Inactive louvres shall be closed by aluminium sheet with minimum 3.0 mmnominal thickness, fastened and sealed to the indoor louvre surfaces.

(f) The Contractor shall provide aluminium bird screen mesh at active louvres.

Mesh wire shall have 1.6 mm minimum nominal thickness. Openings withinmesh shall be 13.0 mm.

(g) Finish for louvres and screens shall be the same as for other aluminiummembers.

29.5.17 Copings

Copings shall comply with the following:

(a) Copings shall comprise aluminium minimum 3.0 mm thick or stainless steelminimum 2.0 mm thick as shown on the Employer’s Drawings. The surface of

aluminium shall have finish to match colour of framing.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 72/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 26/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) Copings shall be rigid, reinforced with a metal frame if required and shall befixed rigidly to the structure. Copings shall be strong enough to resist forcesdue to typhoon and casual impact.

(c) Ends of coping panels and joints to curtain wall frame shall be tightly sealedup and an effective drainage system shall be provided to drain out any water

that may penetrate through the joints.

29.5.18 Concealed and Exposed Flashings

(a) Acceptable materials for flashings are PVC sheet, neoprene sheet, stainlesssteel sheet and mill finish aluminium sheet. Minimum thicknesses are 1.6 mmfor PVC and neoprene, 0.25 mm for stainless steel, and 1.0 mm foraluminium. Aluminium shall have a bituminous coating against dissimilarmaterials.

(b) Sealed lap joints, end dams and transitions shall be provided to gutters,dressings to roofs/abutments, louvres and screens to A/C intakes and

exhausts.

(c) PVC sheet and neoprene sheet shall not be used as primary gutters, whichshall be metal with suitable corrosion protection.

(d) Exposed flashing shall be strong enough to resist forces due to typhoon andcasual impact.

29.5.19 Finishes Generally

(a) Exposed metal surfaces shall be finished to match the appearance, colour andtexture of the samples as reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(b) Finishes to metals shall comply with the following:

(i) clear or coloured anodic finish to aluminium in compliance with BS 3987;

(ii) no. 8 bright polished finish to exposed faces of stainless steel;

(iii) no. 7 polished finish to stainless steel or chromium-plated ironmongery;and

(iv) organic coatings in compliance with BS 4842 and/or BS 6496.

29.5.20 Protective Treatments

(a) Protective treatment to concealed steel parts of the curtain wall system suchas fixings, connectors, etc., shall be hot-dip galvanizing in compliance with BS729.

(b) All welding and provision of holes shall be completed before galvanizing.

(c) No in-situ welding is allowed unless previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager.

29.5.21 Anodic Coating to Aluminium

The thickness of anodic coating shall be minimum 0.025 mm. Coloured anodiccoatings and testing shall be as reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 73/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 27/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.5.22 Organic Coating Finish to Aluminium

(a) Organic coating finish shall comply with the following requirements:

(i) all coatings, when cured, shall be visibly free of flowlines, streaks, sags,blisters or other surface imperfections;

(ii) all finishes shall match in gloss, and fall within the colour range of thesamples previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager;and

(iii) dry film thickness of coating on exposed surface, when measured inaccordance with BS 4842 shall not be less than 45 microns, except inchannel recesses and internal corners, which shall be visually covered.

(b) The Contractor shall paint all surfaces of metal cladding.

(c) The Contractor shall prepare and submit colour samples to the Project

Manager for review without objection. After selection by the Project Manager,the Contractor shall prepare 6 sets each of two samples which shall define thecolour and gloss range and submit to the Project Manager for review withoutobjection. Samples shall be identified and attached with a full laboratory reportin compliance with BS 4842 and BS 6496.

(d) Painted aluminium finish shall be factory oven cured with a minimum two-coatfinish of fluoropolymer resin supplied by a licensed formulator. The licensedformulator shall identify the finish which he supplies to meet the minimalrequirements for formulation as set forth in the licensing agreement

(e) Application of the finish shall be carried out in accordance with the

specifications issued by the licensed formulator and by an applicatorspecifically approved by one (or more) of the formulators. The applicator shallprovide written notification of approval by a formulator prior to application ofthe finish. The formulation shall contain at least 70% fluoropolymer resin in theresidual solids.

(f) The Contractor shall pre-treat metal surfaces in accordance with theprocedure recommended by the manufacturer to provide proper surfaces forcoating.

(g) Pigmented organic coatings for extrusions, structural shapes, sheet or plate,spray applied in the factory, shall comply with BS 4842 and BS 6496.

(h) Field touch-up of painted aluminium shall only be permitted with the writtenpermission of the Project Manager. Unless touch-up is authorized, theContractor shall replace damaged material with new material.

29.5.23 Aluminium Finish at Structural Silicone

(a) Mill finish shall not be permitted at structural silicone bonding surfaces.

(b) Aluminium surface to which structural silicone will be adhered shall have afinish which demonstrates by test the ability to satisfy specified requirements.Subject to testing, acceptable finishes shall be as follows:

(i) factory applied two-coat oven cured fluoropolymer paint conforming toBS 4842 and/or BS 6491;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 74/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 28/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(ii) architectural Class 1 anodising conforming to BS 3987;and

(iii) alodine conversion coating.

29.6 SUBMISSIONS

29.6.1 Particulars of the Curtain Walling System

The following particulars of the proposed curtain walling system shall be submittedto the Project Manager for review without objection. Contractor’s Drawings shall becertified by a chartered structural engineer, showing materials in place. Contractor’sDrawings shall include elevations, floor plans, sections and full size details.Drawings shall include the following information:

(a) assembly and waterproofing of curtain wall;

(b) glass and metal thickness;

(c) metal alloy, temper and finish;

(d) glass strength, tint, coating, opacifier, frit and safety backing;

(e) fastener alloy, strength, plating, diameter, length and spacing;

(f) glazing materials identification;

(g) sealants identification by product name;

(h) relative layout of walls, beams, column and slabs with dimensions noted;

(i) dimensioned position of glass edge relative to metal surface;

(j) provisions for thermal movements and building movements;

(k) locations of, and details for, any embedded anchors;

(l) identification of, and details for, thermal insulation;

(m) weld information and weld symbols conforming to BS 499;

(n) glazing details applicable to replacement glass, with outline of procedure forglass replacement;

(o) provisions for adjustment of anchors relative to tolerances of buildingstructure;

(p) details of spandrels, copings, louvers and operable window;

(q) details of ceiling and bottom/floor closure panels or strips if applicable;

(r) details of fire barriers between perimeters of floors and curtain wall; and

(s) details of lightning protection.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 75/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 29/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.6.2 Structural Calculations

The Contractor shall submit Contractor’s Drawings including fully co-ordinatedstructural calculations, certified by a chartered structural engineer. Calculations shallbe legible and shall incorporate sufficient cross-references to the detailed drawingssubmitted as part of the same design package, to make the calculations readily

understandable. Test reports shall not substitute calculations. Calculations shallinclude the following information:

(a) analysis for applicable loads on framing members;

(b) analysis for all applicable loads on anchors, including anchors embedded inconcrete;

(c) section property computations for framing members;

(d) analysis of stress in structural silicone applications at vision or spandrel glasslights; and

(e) certification of a chartered structural engineer.

29.6.3 Prototypes

Drawings and structural calculations shall be submitted for prototypes. Therequirements for prototypes shall be the same for the actual Works, with particularreference to conditions under which the prototypes will be tested.

29.6.4 Additional Submittal Requirements

The Contractor shall:

(a) prior to or at the same time as the first submittal of structural calculations forreview by the Project Manager, provide dimensioned die drawings for allaluminium extrusions. In the event that extrusion profiles are not finalized,provide die drawings for the profiles contemplated at that time. If profiles arerevised, provide revised die drawings with the first calculation or shop drawingsubmittal, which follows the revision. Die drawings shall show all profiledimension, metal thickness, alloy and temper;

(b) prior to manufacture, provide die drawings of gaskets and weather-strips. Diedrawings shall show all profile dimensions and shall identify materials;

(c) prior to manufacture, provide glass manufacturer's wind pressure analysis andthermal stress analysis, as well as glass manufacturer's review of Contractor’sDrawings stating that details are suitable for the proposed glass products.

(d) prior to manufacture, provide sealant manufacturer's test reports confirmingsealant adhesion compatibility and absence of staining for all relevantsubstrates.

(e) prior to manufacture, provide certification that insulating glass –conforms toBS 5713.

(f) prior to submitting any documents for review, submit laboratory test reports for

structural silicone assembly, as required under section 29.8;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 76/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 30/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(g) submit samples; refer to section 29.6.5; and

(h) submit structural adequacy tests of anchorages; refer to section 29.8.

29.6.5 Samples

(a) The following samples of proposed materials together with fully glazedsamples of principal junctions and assemblies shall be submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection.

(b) Submission shall consist of three samples of each material and principal junction or assembly, two to be retained by the Project Manager and the otherto be returned after review without objection by the Project Manager whichshall be marked by the Project Manager. Samples of materials required shallbe as follows;

Table 29.3: Curtain Wall Material Samples

 Aluminium/Stainless steel sections 300 mm length of each.Galvanized mild steel 300 mm length of each section.

Sheet, plate, mesh 300 x 300 mm piece of eachtype.

Glass 600 x 600 mm piece per typeand/or edge finish.

Fastening devices each type.

Sealants 150 mm cured sample eachtype.

Gaskets 300 mm length of each type.Flashings 300 x 300 mm piece of each

type.Stone 300 x 300 mm piece of eachtype.

(c) Samples shall show the complete range of colour, texture and othercharacteristic changes through the manufacture, fabrication, assembly,installation and cleaning processes. The Contractor shall submit finishedsamples of every extrusion or section to be used and of every other material ofthe thickness and weight as required by the Project Manager. Aluminiumsamples shall include samples of high and low colour range of anodic andorganic coating finish and shall be labelled accordingly.

29.7 WORKMANSHIP

29.7.1 Workmanship generally

(a) Material, components and systems shall be used in compliance with thestandards and procedures of the appropriate manufacturers. All work shallsatisfy the requirements of the Specification. Practice shall conform to therelevant part and in the priority of:

(i) CP-8118 Part 1 & 2- Structural Use of Aluminium;

(ii) BS 6262 - Code of Practice for Glazing of Buildings;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 77/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 31/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(iii) BS 8200 - Design of Non-Load Bearing External Vertical Enclosures ofBuildings;

(iv) BS 5889 - Specification for One-Part Gun Grade Silicone BasedSealants;

(v) Recommended Glazing Guidelines for Reflective Insulating Glass by AAMA;

(vi) Aluminium Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual by AAMA;

(vii) Metal Curtain Wall Manual by AAMA.

(b) No temporary stress or force shall be applied at any time to the assembly,units, individual components or fixing devices which have not been designedto withstand. Temporary supplementary frame stiffeners for curtain wall unitsshall be provided for handling purposes when required.

(c) The Contractor shall conform strictly to the material finishes, shapes, sizes,thickness, and joint locations required by the agreed shop drawings and theSpecification.

(d) The Contractor shall match all materials to produce continuity of line, colourand texture.

(e) The Contractor shall store glass on the Site in a dry well-ventilated shelteredlocation.

(f) Handling glass shall be kept to a minimum.

(g) The Contractor shall carry out all final fitting and assembly work on the Site ina workshop established and equipped for that purpose.

(h) All components exposed in the finished work shall be free from warping, oil-canning effects and the telegraphing of welds, studs and other fasteners.

(i) The Contractor shall provide specified finishes on all exposed surfaces andprovide specified galvanizing on concealed steel.

(j) Systems with glass supported at all edges by structural silicone shall beunitised and shall be fully assembled, including silicone and glass, in the shop.

29.7.2 Setting Out

The Contractor shall:

(a) before commencing any work, verify all measurements of the "as constructed"building. Any discrepancies shall be notified to the Project Manager. Designcurtain wall anchorage to accommodate a minimum 25 mm constructiontolerance in any direction of the building structure; and

(b) accurately set out the Works and take all necessary Site dimensions.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 78/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 32/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.7.3 Joints in Curtain Walls

(a) All joints in the curtain wall shall be as shown on the Contractor’s Drawings.Other joints shall be hairline joints, tightly fitted and co-ordinated with mulliongrids.

(b) All fastening, jointing and splicing of members shall be concealed. Exposedfasteners shall only occur where expressly reviewed without objection by theProject Manager. Where exposed in the finished work, screws shall becountersunk head type, finished to match the adjacent surface.

(c) Fasteners shall not penetrate gutters and drainage systems.

29.7.4 Corrosion Protection

(a) Aluminium in contact with dissimilar metal excluding non- magnetic stainlesssteel shall be treated with a treatment previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion.

(b) Aluminium surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster, masonry andsimilar materials and wet-applied materials in fireproofing and absorptivematerials shall be coated with an anti-corrosive moisture-barrier materialpreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(c) The Contractor shall clearly state what material is to be applied and provide acertificate from the curtain walling manufacturer certifying that the material issuited for its intended purpose.

29.7.5 Metal to Metal Contact

The Contractor shall separate metal surfaces in such a manner that metal does notrub against metal. Materials used for this purpose shall be lubricating devices,sealants, slip pads or gaskets.

29.7.6 Welding

(a) Welding of steel shall be in accordance with BS 499 and BS 5135.

(b) Welding of aluminium shall be to BS 3571: Part 1.

(c) Welding of Aluminium shall be tested to BS 3451. 

(d) The type, size and spacing of welds shall be as shown on the Contractor’sDrawings previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.Welding materials and methods shall not cause distortion, discolouration, orresult in any other adverse effect on the required profiles and finishes of theexposed curtain wall.

(e) Weld spatter and welding oxides on exposed surfaces shall be removed andprime painted with zinc rich coating.

(f) Unless otherwise shown or specified, weld beads on exposed surfaces shallbe ground and finished to match and blend with finish on adjacent metal.Grinding and polishing of nonferrous metal shall be done only with cleanwheels and compounds free from iron and iron compounds. No solderingand/or brazing shall be allowed.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 79/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 33/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.7.7 Application of Sealants and Gaskets

(a) Sealant application shall be in compliance with BS 5889. Sealant and gasketsshall be as shown on the Contractor’s Drawings previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

(b) The design of all sealed joints shall be in accordance with therecommendation of the sealant and/or gasket manufacturer.

(c) The Contractor shall protect all adjoining surfaces to sealants and gasketsagainst staining.

(d) Joints, joint surfaces and glazing rebates shall be clean, dry, and free of anymaterial that may have an adverse effect on the bonding or sealing of thesealant and gasket materials or on the proper drainage of the glazing rebates.

(e) The Contractor shall apply sealants and gaskets under the conditions and inthe manner recommended by the manufacturer. No sealant that has started to

set in its container or has exceeded its shelf life shall be used. No sealantshall be applied externally during raining period.

(f) The sealant manufacturer shall provide written notification if the relevantsubstrates in contact with sealants will or will not require priming. Therecommendations shall be based on tests conducted by the sealantmanufacturer using samples of the relevant substrates for the project. Unlessprinted instructions state to the contrary sealant shall not be applied whensubstrates are wet or when the temperature is below 4.5 oC.

(g) The Contractor shall fill all joints continuously and completely with sealant,forming a neat, uniform, concave or flat bead finish flush with adjoining

surfaces unless otherwise shown on the drawings. All sealant surfaces shallbe tooled smooth.

(h) Exposed sealants shall be installed so that top surfaces of the horizontalsealant beads are sloped to drain water away.

(i) Glazing gaskets shall be of the profile, dimension and durometer hardnessrequired to support the glass and resist water penetrations. Exterior glazinggaskets shall have factory made pre-moulded corners.

29.7.8 Render Stops

Incorrect placement, levelling or lining-through of angles to in-situ finishing and thelike fixed by others shall be immediately reported in writing to the Project Manager.

29.7.9 Sequence of Installation

The Contractor shall co-ordinate and carry out the installation of the curtain wall insequence with related work operations to be executed by others to achieve aweather-tight and satisfactory visual relationship between the various componentsand the structure, finishes and weather seals.

29.7.10 Erection

(a) The Contractor shall install materials in accordance with Contractor’sDrawings previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager; alignand anchor materials to building structure; and seal joints within the Works ofthis section and at joints with adjacent construction.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 80/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 34/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) Tolerances:

(i) The Contractor shall provide anchor adjustment capability for the fullrange of specified tolerances for the building structure and toaccommodate, construction tolerances and short term buildingmovements (i.e. concrete column settlement).

(ii) Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle shall not exceed 3.0mm per 3,600 mm of length of any member, 6.0 mm in any total run inany line.

(iii) Deviation from theoretical position in plan or elevation, includingdeviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle, shall not exceed 10.0mm total at any location. Change in deviation shall not exceed 3.0 mmper 3,600 mm run in any direction.

(iv) Maximum offset from alignment between two consecutive membersplaced end to end shall not exceed 1.5 mm.

(v) Maximum offset between glass framing members at corners of glazingpocket shall not exceed 0.8 mm.

(c) Anchorage:

(i) The Contractor shall anchor component parts securely in place bybolting. Welding may be used if prior review without objection by theProject Manager. Slip pads shall be installed between moving parts.

(ii) The Contractor shall provide non-corrosive separators betweendissimilar materials.

(iii) The Contractor shall remove weld slag and apply prime paint overwelds. Hot-dip galvanizing that is damaged by welding or other causesshall be touched up.

(iv) Where slots or oversize holes are provided for adjustment only, theContractor shall secure the connection after final adjustment.Interlocking serrations in extruded aluminium brackets and washers areacceptable. Steel weld washers with 6.0 mm minimum thickness areacceptable with steel brackets. Special washers or nuts which rely onfriction and/or surface indentation of the fastened part shall not bepermitted.

(v) Bolts shall be double nutted, have an acceptable spring washer or bepainted/coated with a lock-tight liquid to prevent bolts from loosening.

(vi) All fixings shall be concealed when the work is completed.

(d) The Contractor shall clean surfaces to be sealed, and install backers, bondbreakers, primers and sealants in accordance with Contractor’s Drawings, testresults and manufacturer recommendations. The Contractor shall tool sealantsas a separate operation after application and immediately remove anymasking.

(e) The Contractor shall install thermal insulation, vapour barrier and fire-safinginsulation with specified supports.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 81/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 35/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(f) Adjustment:

(i) The Contractor shall adjust operating windows and doors for proper fitwithin fixed frame.

(ii) The Contractor shall adjust weather-strips for continuous contact and

seal in closed position.

(iii) The Contractor shall adjust hardware for proper operation from closedand locked position to fully open position.

29.7.11 Glazing

(a) Glazing shall comply with BS 6262 and in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations. Glass and glazing materials shall be compatible with eachother and the glass shall be protected from damage and staining of any kind.

(b) The weather seal at glass perimeters shall be a combination of sponge and

dense gaskets. Gaskets shall be hot melt injection moulded at corners wherecompatible with installation procedure. Where gasket joints occur, theContractor shall tightly butt ends and seal with a compatible sealant. Gasket joints shall not occur at locations other than corners.

(c) Glass shall be new. Glass shall be of the specified type and quality withcleanly cut edges and sharp corners. Inspect glass before installation.Defective glass shall not be installed.

(d) Before setting glass, the Contractor shall inspect frame for proper dimensionsand squareness. Frame and/or glass size shall be adjusted as required tomeet specified requirements for glass bite dimensions and glass edge

clearance.

(e) Except otherwise specified, glass bite shall comply with BS 6262. TheContractor shall provide a minimum nominal glass bite of 13 mm. Where jointmovement will result in variable glass bite, nominal bite shall be increased toprovide 10.0 mm minimum bite and 6.0mm minimum edge clearance. In nocase shall the front and back clearances be less than 5.0 mm.

(f) The Contractor shall thoroughly clean glazing pocket before setting glass.Solvents shall be compatible with finished aluminium, glass and glazingmaterials. Setting blocks shall be equidistant from the glass centreline.Location of setting blocks at glass quarter points is acceptable. The distance

from the vertical glass edge to the nearest edge of the setting block shall notbe less than 150 mm, or 0.125 times glass width, whichever is greater. Sideblocks shall be located between the mid-height and top corner of the glass.Side blocks, setting blocks and chairs shall be positively retained in position.

(g) Fasteners shall not penetrate glazing pockets.

(h) The Contractor shall remove and replace stops and apply sealants as requiredto complete glass installation.

(i) The Contractor shall defer glazing of openings which are obstructed duringconstruction. Glazing of such opening shall be carried out when obstructions

are removed.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 82/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 36/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(j) The Contractor shall leave glass in crates until just prior to installation. Anyglass which breaks or sustains edge damage, surface damage or damage toreflective coating shall be replaced.

(k) The Contractor shall clean, prime and mask at structural silicone joints within 8hours before applying the silicone.

(l) The Contractor shall temporarily clamp glass during cure of structural silicone. After sufficient cure, the Contractor shall remove clamps and fill any gaps insilicone.

(m) The Contractor shall mask glass and aluminium during application of structuralsilicone, and remove masking immediately after tooling sealant.

(n) Structural silicone shall not be applied to edges of insulating glass units, or toedges of laminated glass units. Sealants used as weather seals shall not beadhered to, or placed against, the edge of a laminated glass unit inter-layer

29.7.12 Stone Fabrication

(a) Fabrication tolerances for exposed surface of individual pieces of stone shallbe as follows:

(i) length and height (or width): 1.0 mm;

(ii) depth of a saw cut: 2.0 mm;

(iii) depth of a drilled hole: 3.0 mm;

(iv) deviation from flat plane in 1200 mm, any direction: 2.0 mm;

(v) deviation from square: 2.0 mm difference in diagonals;

(vi) deviation from nominal thickness: 2.0 mm; and

(vii) position of kerfs cut relative to outdoor face: ± 1.0 mm.

(b) Fabrication tolerances for exposed surface of one stone system assembly withstone anchored to a support system shall be as follows:

(i) sealant joint width between pieces of stone +/- 25% of nominal (Jointswhich absorb thermal and building movements shall require stricter

tolerance.);

(ii) overall length and height (or width), stone edge to stone edge: 3.0 mm;

(iii) offset (in/out) between adjacent stone edges 1.5 mm maximum;

(iv) deviation from flat plane for overall length 5.0 mm;

(v) deviation from flat plane for overall height (or width): 3.0 mm;

(vi) difference in overall diagonals measured to outside corners of stone: 5.0mm maximum;

(vii) deviation from straight line along entire length of vertical edge: 2.5 mmmaximum;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 83/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 37/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(viii) deviation from straight line along entire length of horizontal edge: 2.5mm maximum;

(ix) offset (in plane) between adjacent granite corners: 3.0 mm maximum(distance between parallel horizontal or vertical lines through corners);

(x) window opening dimension: 6.0 mm; and

(xi) where more than one tolerance applies, the stricter tolerance shallgovern.

29.7.13 Repairs to Anodic Coating

(a) Repairs of damage to finished surfaces by mechanical means (other thanthose specified) or by painting are strictly forbidden unless reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

(b) Surfaces to be finished shall be free from mechanical imperfections such as

scratches, scrapes and dents. Finished surfaces shall be free from finishedimperfections such as spots, stains and streaks.

(c) Materials may be finished more than once provided that all specifiedrequirements are satisfied.

29.7.14 Protection and Cleaning

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide protective sheeting or tape to aluminium or stainless steel membersand ancillaries;

(b) pack and store materials to prevent surface damage or contamination,distortion breakage or structural weakening;

(c) remove sheeting or tape as soon as practical so as not to stain and/or leavean adhesive residue on the relevant substrates;

(d) protect glass against damage, discolouration or staining and replace damagedor broken glass, regardless of the cause.

29.7.15 Labels

No labels shall be adhered to glass other than those of the glass manufacturerwhich shall be adhered with a non-alkaline adhesive. The Contractor shall removeall labels from glass after glazing.

29.7.16 Cleaning

(a) The Contractor shall thoroughly wash and clean the work immediately prior torequesting a Completion Certificate for the Works.

(b) No alkali washes or other patent cleaning solutions shall be used which maystain, mark or otherwise harm the installation.

(c) The Contractor shall periodically remove from the site debris, excess materialsand unused tools and equipment resulting from the Works.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 84/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 38/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.7.17 Ironmongery

 All hinges, locks, opening devices etc., shall be properly adjusted and in perfectworking order. The Contractor shall hand over two sets of keys for each lock to theProject Manager on completion.

29.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

29.8.1 Testing of Anodic Coating to Aluminium

(a) The thickness of anodic coating shall be minimum 0.025 mm. Samples offinished aluminium from production lots shall be tested in accordance with BS3987.

(b) Complete certified inspection records for quality of finish and complete finishprocess records shall be maintained and made available to the Project

Manager on request.

29.8.2 Laboratory Tests and Full Scale Prototypes

(a) Testing sequence shall be:

(i) unlock, fully open, close and lock all operating windows for a minimum of50 cycles. If any repairs are performed after cycling, the minimum 50cycles shall be repeated after repairs;

(ii) preload at 50 percent of inward design pressure for 10 seconds;

(iii) air infiltration and exfiltration;

(iv) water infiltration under static pressure;

(v) water infiltration under dynamic pressure;

(vi) structural test at 50 percent and 100 percent of inward design pressure.Pressure shall be held for 10 seconds;

(vii) structural test at 50 percent and 100 percent of outward designpressure. Pressure shall be held for 10 seconds;

(viii) racking test;

(ix) water infiltration under static pressure;

(x) Building Ordinance Office, Practice Note APP 37, structural cyclic test,and latest edition related to the subject;

(xi) structural test at 150 percent of outward design pressure. Pressure shallbe held for 10 seconds;

(xii) structural test at 75 percent of inward design pressure. Pressure shall beheld for 10 seconds;

(xiii) structural test at 150 percent of inward design pressure. Pressure shallbe held for 10 seconds;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 85/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 39/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(xiv) concentrated load test of track/tieback; and

(xv) concentrated load tests of operating window as per BS 6375: Part 2.

(b) Air leakage testing shall conform to ASTM E 283, modified to includemeasurement of exfiltration. Differential static test pressure shall be 300 Pa.

Chamber leakage shall be accurately determined, not estimated. Air infiltrationand exfiltration of fixed wall area shall not exceed 1.6 m3/hr/m2 of projectedexterior surface, exclusive of any operating window areas. Air infiltration andexfiltration of operating windows shall not exceed 2.0 m3/hr/m of crack length.Fixed panels of sliding windows shall be included in fixed wall area, and shallnot to be included in operator crack perimeter.

(c) The occurrence of condensation during water infiltration tests is acceptable.The accumulation of water in sliding window sill tracks is acceptable; overflow,percolation or leakage of water from sill tracks shall not be permitted. Otherwater leakage is acceptable only if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

(i) the water is contained and drained to the exterior;

(ii) there is no wetting of a surface that shall be visible to buildingoccupants;

(iii) there shall be no staining or other damage to any part of the completedbuilding or its furnishings. This definition of water leakage shall governover other definitions which may appear in referenced documents.

(d) Static water infiltration test shall conform to ASTM E 331. Differential testpressure shall be 20% of the maximum inward design wind load but not lessthan 0.77 kPa. There shall be no unacceptable water leakage as defined

herein. The sources of all water leakage during testing shall be identified.The test shall be performed with water flow rate of 3.4 litres/min/ m2, for 15minutes.

(e) Dynamic water infiltration test shall conform to AAMA 501.1-83 unlessotherwise specified herein. Differential test pressure shall be 20% of themaximum inward design wind load but not less than 0.77 kPa. There shall beno unacceptable water leakage as defined herein. The sources of all waterleakage during testing shall be identified. The test shall be performed with awater flow rate of 3.4 litres/min/m2 for 15 minutes.

(f) Structural tests shall conform to ASTM E 330. Deflection gages or transducers

shall be set to zero prior to each application of pressure at 50, 75, 100 and150 percent of design pressures. Deflection readings shall be recorded aftereach application of pressure. Deflection measurements are not required forthe initial pre-load. Specified deflection and set limitations are intended toapply to one application of pressure. Limits shall not apply to the cumulativeeffects of two or more loadings. The results of these test loads shall complywith sections 29.4.4, 29.4.8, 29.4.17 and 29.4.19.

(g) Concentrated load test on track/tieback shall be as follows:

(i) apply 3.6 KN, (2.4 KN x 1.5 SF), outward for at least 10 seconds; and

(ii) apply 3.6 KN, (2.4 KN x 1.5 SF), side load in both directions for at least10 seconds. There shall be no failure or gross permanent distortion ofthe track or any part of the exterior wall.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 86/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 40/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(h) Racking test:

(i) The mock-up test chamber shall be constructed so that the simulatedfloor structure at approximate mid-height of he mock-up is moveable in ahorizontal sense parallel to the glass plane(s).

(ii) The magnitude of movement shall be 1/500 storey height or 10 mm perstorey whichever is the greater.

(iii) Displace moveable structure first in one direction, then in the otherdirection. Repeat for a total of at least 20 two-stroke cycles.

(iv) There shall be no failure or gross permanent distortion of anchors,frames, glass or panels; structural silicone shall not experience adhesiveand/or cohesive failure; glazing gaskets shall not disengage; weatherseals shall not fail.

29.8.3 Site Tests

(a) Method for field check for water leakage, but not interpretation of results, shallconform to AAMA 501.2-83, except as modified herein. Operable windowsshall be tested in the same manner as fixed wall areas. There shall be nounacceptable water leakage as defined herein. The Contractor shall providepowered scaffold, hose, water supply and manpower to perform at least twosuccessful tests, plus any unsuccessful tests. Water testing shall beconducted early in the construction schedule. Construction sequence shallinclude provisions for timely completion of test areas. Remedial measuresshall maintain standards of quality and durability and are subject to reviewwithout objection by the Project Manager.

(b) The Contractor shall periodically test sealants in place for adhesion, usingmethods recommended by sealant manufacturer. The Contractor shallpromptly replace any sealant which does not adhere or fails to cure.

(c) For structural silicone, the Contractor shall perform a peel test, using methodsrecommended by the sealant manufacturer, on at least 10 percent of the glassopenings. An acceptable alternative for shop applied structural silicone is toperform a uniform pressure test at outward design pressure for at least 10percent of the glass openings. The Contractor shall maintain recordsdescribing type of test, date of test, person conducting test, results andidentification marking of unit tested. Each unit shall be marked so thatstructural silicone batch numbers and date of application can be traced. The

Contractor shall submit records upon request.

(d) The Contractor shall verify during construction that water leakage andcondensation are effectively collected and drained to the exterior; test internalgutters by temporarily plugging weep holes and filling with water. After aminimum of fifteen minutes, the Contractor shall inspect for water leakage,correct deficiencies, re-test until successful tests are achieved and removeweep hole plugs after testing.

(e) For structural adequacy of anchorages, the Contractor shall carry out test totwice the loading of section 29.4.3 without failure. The Contractor shall submitproposals for the carrying out of such tests to the Project Manager for review

without objection. The number of tests shall be as specified.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 87/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 41/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

29.8.4 Laboratory Tests of Structural Silicone Assembly

(a) The Contractor shall provide minimum two-week advance notice to the ProjectManager before assembly of specimens and testing of specimens.

(b) The Contractor shall assemble specimens using: aluminium members with

proposed production finish; proposed structural silicone (with proposed mixratio if more than one component); proposed silicone joint size; proposedsilicon backer; proposed glass (including insulating glass edge constructionand reflective coating) or proposed panel. The Contractor shall fully curespecimens and then immerse in water for 7 days.

(c) A minimum of 3 specimens each shall be tested by tensile loading with glasssurface temperature at: 24 +/-3 oC and 71 +/- 3 oC. The Contractor shall applya tensile load in such a manner that the force per unit length corresponding tothree times design pressure is transferred through all elements in thesandwich. The load shall be applied in one minute or less (but without impact)and maintained for at least one minute.

(d) All specimens tested shall withstand the specified loading with no failure ofany element. Failure of any element(s) on one or more specimens requires anew set of revised specimens to be tested.

29.8.5 Manufacturer’s Tests of Sealants

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide to sealant manufacturers samples of all substrates, which are incontact with sealant, regardless of whether adhesion is required.

(b) For substrates which shall support adhesion, submit for record only sealantmanufacturers' reports of adhesion tests. An acceptable test method is definedby ASTM C 794. Other test methods shall be submitted for review withoutobjection by the Project Manager prior to the test being performed;

(c) for substrates to which sealant adhersion is not required, but which are incontact with sealant, submit for record only sealant manufacturers, reports ofcompatibility tests. An acceptable test method is to place the substrate onuncoated glass and apply sealant to the glass against the substrate. If theintended sealant colour is dark, the dark colour and a light colour of the sameproduct shall be used for the test. Specimen shall be subjected to continuousexposure of 2,000 microwatts per square centimetre minimum ultraviolet

radiation for a minimum of 21 days. Specimens showing discolouration of thesealant but no adhesion loss after 21 days shall be subjected to an additional120 days minimum of the same exposure. Discoloured specimens shall berated as compatible only if there is no adhesion loss after the initial andextended exposure. Extensive discolouration of the intended sealant colour,even without adhesion loss, shall be rated as incompatibility. Other testmethods shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review withoutobjection prior to the tests being performed.

29.8.6 Laboratory Tests of Stone

(a) The Contractor shall submit reports by an independent testing laboratory for

tests conducted within 30 days of submittal date. The Contractor shall submitwritten certifications that test specimens are representative of productionmaterial for the Works. The Contractor shall provide a minimum 2-weekadvance notice to Project Manager before conducting stone tests.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 88/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 42/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) As used in this Specification, the term "rift" means the plane of easiestsplitting. In stratified stones, rift is assumed to coincide with the bedding orstratification. Rift shall be identified by the quarryman on all test samples, andthe identification shall be marked on all test specimens by the party preparingthe specimens. As used in this Specification, the term "specimen" means a

single piece of stone or an anchor-in-stone assembly having specific shape,size and surface finishes.

(c) The Contractor shall perform tests for the following properties:

(i) flexural strength per ASTM C 880;

(ii) stone strength at anchors as defined herein;

(iii) water porosity as defined herein; and

(iv) density per ASTM C 97.

(d) Specimens tested in accordance with ASTM C 880 shall have the followingsurface finishes:

(i) the outdoor surface shall have its production finish and shall be thetension side;

(ii) the indoor surface shall have its production finish and shall be thecompression side;

(iii) edges shall have a finely sawn finish; and

(iv) separate groups of specimens shall be required for each outdoor finishto be provided.

(e) Specimens tested in accordance with ASTM C 880 shall have the followingnominal dimensions:

(i) depth equal to proposed thickness;

(ii) width equal to 1.5 times depth or 150 mm whichever is greater;

(iii) span equal to 10 times depth or 18 inches (457 mm), whichever isgreater; and

(iv) overall length equal to span plus 50 mm.

(f) Results shall be reported for all specimens tested. No result shall bedisregarded in computing average values.

(g) The Contractor shall test at least 20 specimens each, representing at least 5different quarry blocks in accordance with C 880. Separate sets of 20 or morespecimens shall be tested for each outdoor finish for C 880 tests. Each groupof 20 or more specimens shall consist of 4 subgroups of 5 or more specimens,representing all possible combinations of quarry block, wet or dry conditioning,and loading parallel or perpendicular to rift. Each specimen shall be identified

by quarry block, wet or dry conditioning and loading direction.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 89/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 43/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(h) Bending strength used to compute allowable stress shall be the smallest of theaverage values computed for each subgroup of 5 or more specimens tested inaccordance with C 880.

(i) For each type of proposed stone anchor, at least ten specimens shall betested, two from each of five different quarry blocks. The Contractor shall test

at least five specimens, each from a different block, with inward load, and atleast five specimens with outward load. Crosshead movement shall notexceed 0.63 mm per minute. Wet or dry condition of stone shall correspond tothe weaker condition as determined by flexural strength. Orientation of riftplane shall correspond to orientation on the building. Stone thicknesses shallbe minimum (nominal thickness minus tolerance) for anchor test specimens.Continuous kerf type anchors which exceed 300 mm in length shall be testedas 300 mm long specimens and the results interpreted as stress in the stoneat the bottom of the kerf cut. Results shall be reported for all specimenstested. No result shall be disregarded. Strength of stone at an anchor used tocompute allowable values shall be the average value for each group of 5 ormore specimens.

(j) For each proposed stone type and finish, a water porosity test shall beperformed and carried out in accordance with the following procedure:

(i) A minimum of three specimens shall be tested, each having correctoutdoor finish, indoor finish and thickness.

(ii) Each specimen shall be taken from a different quarry block. Minimumspecimen size shall be 300 mm by 300 mm.

(iii) Specimens shall be placed in a horizontal position, outdoor surfacefacing upward, such that the indoor surface is clearly visible and is not in

contact with any other surface, other than small supports.

(iv) Air temperature shall be in the range 18 to 29 oC.

(v) The Contractor shall seal to the outdoor stone surface a circular orsquare sleeve having an internal cross sectional area of at least 180cm2. The sleeve shall be at least 50 mm from stone edges. TheContractor shall fill sleeve with cold tap water to a depth of 250 +/- 6 mmand maintain test conditions for 7 days.

(vi) The Contractor shall record the times at which dampness (if any) is firstvisible on the indoor stone surface; water droplets (if any) are first visible

on the indoor stone surface; dripping of water (if any) from the indoorstone surface begins. If dripping occurs, the Contractor shall during each24-hour period collect the water for one hour and record the volumecollected. The formation of water droplets on the indoor stone surface(with or without dripping) constitutes failure. All specimens tested shallpass.

(k) Based on the above test requirements, minimum quantities of test specimensshall be as follows. To assure adequate quantities for testing, it isrecommended that at least twice the minimum number of specimens shall beprepared.

(i) C 880; total of (20) specimens, (4) specimens taken from each of (5)quarry blocks.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 90/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 44/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(ii) Separate sets of (20) or more specimens are required for each outdoorfinish for C 880 tests.

(iii) Each anchor type in stone; (10) specimens, (2) from each of (5) quarryblocks.

(iv) Water porosity test; (3) specimens for each outdoor finish; eachspecimen from a different quarry block.

(v) C 97 (density); total of (6) specimens, (3) specimens taken from each of(2) quarry blocks.

(l) In addition to the testing programme described above, quality control testingshall be carried out. For each type of stone, flexural specimens shall be wiresawn from a minimum of five percent of the total number of quarry blocks.Size of specimens shall be as specified herein.

(i) For each of the sampled blocks, flexural strength shall be determined in

accordance with ASTM C 880 for two specimens.

(ii) If at least one of the two specimens for each sampled block has flexuralstrength equal to or greater than 80 percent of the design bendingstrength as specified herein, no further testing or reduction in workingstress is required.

(iii) If for one or more sampled blocks, both specimens have flexuralstrength less than 80 percent of the design bending strength, additionaltesting or a reduction in working stress is required.

(iv) The additional testing option consists of applying the two-specimen test

and 80 percent rule to each quarry block. For any block which fails, thetwo-specimen test and 80 percent rule shall be used for each slab cutfrom the block.

(v) Any slab which fails shall be rejected. Any block which fails shall berejected unless its slabs are checked individually. The reduction inworking stress option consists of reducing the allowable bending stressin stone, and the allowable load exerted on stone by an anchor. Both ofwhich are derived from the results of other tests specified herein. Thereduction factor shall be the average of specimens from blocks whichfailed the 80 percent rule (both specimens included in average) dividedby the original bending strength. Quality control test results shall not be

used to increase allowable bending stress or allowable load exerted onstone by an anchor.

29.8.7 Test Reports

The Contractor shall:

(a) submit a certified laboratory test report in accordance with BS 5368: Part 4;include the following for the tests carried out under section 29.8.2:

(i) test results together with comparison with permitted parameters;

(ii) remarks and conclusions by the testing professionals.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 91/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 45/45 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 29 – Curtain Walling

(b) submit photographic records of the test arrangement, set-up and of theperformance of the mock-ups, and constituent components of the same,during fabrication, assembly and under test;

(c) submit two copies of Contractor’s Drawings mark-ed up by the testinglaboratory showing all changes, revisions, modifications, etc., made as a result

of testing;

(d) subsequently and before any installation work commences on the Site submitto the Project Manager for reviewed without objection revised Contractor’sDrawings incorporating the modifications made.

29.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

29.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Details of all curtain wall systems used;

(b) Drawings showing the extent of each type of curtain wall system;

(c) Particulars of materials manufacturers;

(d) Means of safe access for cleaning and maintenance;

(e) Procedures for changing panels and other typical components; and

(f) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

29.9.2 Maintenance/ Replacement Standby Materials

(a) Upon completion of construction, the Contractor shall deliver to a designatedstorage area replacement standby materials for maintenance and repair.Materials shall conform to the same requirements as materials used forconstruction.

(b) The replacement standby materials shall be stored in clearly labelledprotective boxing and/or crates and positioned on support frames and/or

storage racks which are placed in appropriate locations to ensure the materialwill not be damaged or deteriorate.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 92/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 93/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  1/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

SECTION 30 INTERNAL CLADDING SYSTEMS

30.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of the following

internal wall cladding systems, which generally comprise:

(a) finished, demountable metal wall panels, (acoustic and non-acoustic rated),skirtings, bulkheads and parapets;

(b) glass walls, roof, aluminium skirtings;

(c) all supporting steelwork and framing;

(d) all fixings;

(e) linear air grilles and louvers.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(f) steelwork refer to section 22;

(g) curtain walling refer to section 29;

(h) carpentry and joinery refer to section 21;

(i) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(j) linings, sheathings, dry wall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(k) suspended ceilings refer to section 34;

(l) architectural metal work refer to section 35;

(m) ironmongery refer to section 36; and

(n) fire protection and fire stopping systems refer to section 42.

30.2 NOT USED

30.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

CP 118 The structural use of aluminium

CP 143 Code of practice for sheet roof and wall coverings

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 729 Specification for hot-dip galvanized coatings on iron and steelarticles

BS 849 Code of practice for plain sheet zinc roofing

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 94/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  2/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

BS 857 Specification for safety glass for land transport

BS 950 Specification for artificial daylight for the assessment of colour

BS 952 Glass for glazing

BS 970 Specification for wrought steels for mechanical and alliedengineering purposes

BS 1178 Specification for milled lead sheet for building purposes

BS 1245 Specification for metal door frames (steel)

BS 1344 Methods of testing vitreous enamel finishes

BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip

BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for

general engineering purposes: plate, sheet, and strip

BS 1474 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes - bars, extruded round tubes andsections

BS 1615 Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium andits alloys

BS 2870 Specification for rolled copper and copper alloys: sheet, strip andfoil

BS 2875 Specification for copper and copper alloys: plate

BS 2901 Filler rods and wires for gas-shielded arc welding

BS 2926 Specification for chromium and chromium nickel steel electrodesfor manual metal-arc welding

BS 3111 Steel for cold forged fasteners and similar components

BS 3692 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws andnuts. Metric units.

BS 3900 Methods of tests for paints

BS 3745 Method for the evaluation of results of accelerated corrosion testson metallic coatings

BS 3830 Specification for vitreous enameled steel building components

BS 3987 Specification for anodic oxidation coatings on wrought aluminiumfor external architectural applications

BS 4255 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion frombuildings

BS 4479 Design of articles that are to be coated

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 95/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  3/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

BS 4842 Specification for liquid organic coatings for application toaluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections forexternal architectural purposes, and for the finish on aluminiumalloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coated with liquidorganic coatings

BS 5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganesesteels

BS 5140 Specification for pewter

BS 5368 Methods of testing windows

BS 5411 Methods of tests for metallic and related coatings

BS 5427 Code of practice for performance and loading criteria for profiledsheeting in building

BS 5466 Methods for corrosion testing of metallic coatings

BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structuresagainst corrosion

BS 5606 Guide to accuracy in building

BS 5750 Quality systems

BS 5821 Methods for rating the sound insulation in buildings and ofbuilding elements

BS 5889 Specification for one part gun grade silicone

BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building

BS 6105 Specification for corrosion resistant stainless steel fasteners

BS 6161 Methods of test for anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium andits alloys

BS 6180 Code of practice for barriers in and about buildings

BS 6206 Specification for impact performance requirements for flat safety

glass and safety plastics for use in buildings

BS 6262 Glazing for buildings

BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformedsections for external architectural purposes, and for the finish onaluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coatedwith powder organic coatings

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 96/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  4/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections andperformed steel sheet for windows and associated externalarchitectural purposes, and for the finish on galvanized steelsections and performed sheet coated with powder organiccoatings.

BS 6561 Specification for zinc alloy sheet and strip for building

BS 6582 Specification for continuously hot dip lead alloy (terne) coatedcold reduced carbon steel flat rolled products

BS 7346 Components for smoke and heat control systems

BS 7773 Code of practice for cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces

BS 8200 Code of practice for design of non-loadbearing external verticalenclosures of buildings

BS EN ISO140-5

 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and ofbuilding elements. Field measurements of airborne soundinsulation of facade elements and facades

BS EN 485 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet strip andplate.

BS EN 499 Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steelelectrodes for manual metal arc welding

BS EN 515 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Wrought products. Temper

designations.

BS EN 10143 Specification for continuously hot dip zinc coated and iron zincalloy coated steel: wide strip, sheet/plate and slit wide strip

NEN 2711 Vitreous or porcelain enamels - Vitreous or porcelain enamels -Terms and definitions

PD 6484 Comment on corrosion at bi metallic contacts and its alleviation

Hong KongStandards 

Code of Practice on Wind Effects - Hong Kong 1983, publishedby Building Authority, Hong Kong.

30.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

30.4.1 Specific Design and Performance Criteria

The Contractor shall:

(a) adopt the design/visual criteria shown on the Employer’s Drawings whilemaintaining the performance requirements of the Specification;

(b) select suitable materials, (sizes, thicknesses, type, fixings and sealants), all incompliance with the design and visual intent shown on the Employer’sDrawings;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 97/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  5/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(c) submit structural calculations, signed and approved by a registered structuralengineer, for review without objection by the Project Manager;

(d) prepare structural calculations, together with Contractor’s Drawings showingsufficient detail for manufacture and installation, for submission to theBuildings Department. The Contractor shall make such changes and

amendments as necessary to obtain Buildings Department approval andconsent, subject to review without objection by the Project Manager. Whencalculating loads and movements, which the system has to accommodate,refer to the Design Loads and Movement Report;

(e) design all necessary expansion and movement joints to accommodate themaximum movements that are derived from the specified design loads andmovements. Under maximum movements, the joints shall meet all theperformance requirements of the Specification; and

(f) design and carry out performance tests in accordance with BuildingsDepartment regulations

30.4.2 Loading / Structural Design Considerations

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide all components and systems to withstand all static and dynamicdesign loads without causing permanent deformation of components or thefailure of members or seals, and transmit such loads safely to the points ofsupport;

(b) provide systems which do not deflect under loading in any way that isdetrimental to any element of the Permanent Works or adjacent structural or

building elements;

(c) design the deflection of the systems to standards under BS 8200, Section 2Table 1 - Storey Height Assemblies;

(d) design the systems to withstand all vibrations caused by traffic, internaltransportation systems such as lifts, escalators, walkways, baggage hoists,trolley hoists, aircraft, helicopters, internal “wind” effects or any other suchshocks, strains, stresses and movements including operation of smoke andother mechanical ventilation that may be imposed by the users, so that theydo not cause fracture or deterioration of any element, particularly to anymoveable or openable element, of the internal cladding systems. Suitable

devices for absorbing or damping any such vibration shall be included; and

(e) design the systems to prevent the transmission of drumming noise as a resultof vibration, shocks, stress, etc., by the use of sound deadening material in allareas.

30.4.3 Dead Loads

The Contractor shall:

(a) restrict the vertical deflection of any member supporting glazing to span/250under these loadings; and

(b) restrict the deflection of support structure to span/250 or 15 mm (whichever isthe lesser under loadings)

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 98/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  6/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

30.4.4 Live Loads

The Contractor shall:

(a) confirm that no fracture, dislodgement, permanent deformation or deteriorationof the subsequent performance of any part of the internal cladding systems

will result from them being subjected to sporadic loads based on the followinggeneral loads specified in BS 6180: Table 2: Part (e):

(i) movement of the concrete slabs and loads imposed upon them;

(ii) all loads resulting from movement of the structure as a whole;

(iii) horizontally applied load acting on the surface of the internal claddingsystem arising from maintenance and cleaning operations;

(iv) a horizontally uniformly distributed load of 0.75 kN/m at 1,100mm and600 mm above finished floor level;

(v) a uniformly distributed load applied to the cladding panel of 1.0 kN/m²;

(vi) a point load of 0.50 kN applied to any part of the cladding panel;

(vii) an impact of 250 kg applied at a speed of 1.0 m/s to the buffer rail;and

(viii) other impact loads, or transferred loads, that occur during its servicelife, without sustaining repairable damage;

Loads (iv), (v) and (vi) shall be separately applied.

(b) design all internal cladding to accommodate the following loadings which aredifferent from those specified in sub-clause (a) (iv), (v) and (vi) without anyreduction in performance and without permanent deformation to anycomponent:

(i) a horizontally uniformly distributed load of 3.0 kN/m at 1,125 mmabove finished floor level, where there are protection rails;

(ii) a uniformly distributed load applied to all glazed infill panels of 1.5kN/m²;

(iii) a point load of 1.5 kN applied to any part of the glazed infill panels;

(iv) a static load of 500 N applied horizontally through a square 100 mmsides on any part of the framing;

Loads (i), (ii) and (iii) shall be separately applied.

 All other live loads specified above in (a) shall also apply.

(c) restrict the stresses in all parts of the internal cladding systems produced bythis combination of loads to the permissible stresses given in the BritishStandards;

(d) restrict the stresses for elements made of aluminium alloys to the permissiblestresses given in clause 4.3.1 of CP. 118;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 99/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  7/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(e) design all internal cladding systems to withstand operational forces tostandards under BS 8200: Section 2 as a minimum;

(f) design and construct the internal cladding systems such that they remain rigidand stable, and that no permanent deformation will be caused by maintenanceloads, impact loads and the normal use to which they are subjected;

(g) design glass thicknesses with a safety factor of 2.5; and

(h) provide internal cladding systems’ surfaces which resist heavy impactsgenerated by pedestrian traffic without noticeable change to the surfaceappearance, as defined by BS 8200: Section 2, Part 7.

30.4.5 Sound Reduction Considerations

(a) Where the internal cladding totally encloses an area (with walls continuouswith ceiling and isolates the area from adjacent public area), the internalcladding systems shall achieve a sound insulation performance of no less

than Rw 52, when measured on Site in accordance with BS EN ISO 140-5.

(b) The Contractor shall provide internal acoustic linings, where necessary, toachieve such noise reduction indices;

(c) The Contractor shall submit sealants and gaskets for review without objectionby the Project Manager and use them in the installation of the partitions withno noise leakage around the perimeter of the partition or at joints betweenindividual partitions;

(d) The Contractor shall install cladding free from rattling and buzzing.

30.4.6 Impact and Abrasion Resistance

(a) The internal cladding systems shall be sufficiently hard (including glasscoatings as stated in section 32.5.7) to resist heavy impacts from hand heldobjects and from adjacent passenger or pedestrian movements without anynoticeable change to the surface appearance, as defined in BS 8200 CategoryB, and BS 3900 Methods of test for paints: Parts E1-12.

(b) The Internal Cladding Systems shall also resist abrasion from cleaningmethods and maintenance systems identified in the maintenance manualwithout any noticeable change in surface appearance.

30.5 MATERIALS

30.5.1 Materials Generally

(a) Flat, non-perforated, fully demountable, painted steel panels of varyingheights and modules as indicated on the Employer’s Drawings.

(b) Flat, perforated, acoustically insulated, painted steel panels of varyingmodules as indicated on the Employer’s Drawings.

(c) Special shaped, non-perforated, painted steel panels.

(d) Aluminium acoustically rated louvre panels.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 100/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  8/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

30.5.2 Glass and Glazing

Refer to section 32.5.1: Glass materials generally.

30.5.3 Coatings /Treatment to Glazing System

Coatings to the glazing system shall be in accordance with section 32.5.7 (Glazing,Glazed Screens, Balustrades and Handrails).

30.5.4 Solid Panel Support Systems

The Contractor shall:

(a) take account of the fixing zones indicated on the Employer’s Drawings, whendesigning the system;

(b) provide the internal cladding systems with a supporting structure that is basefixed, with a sliding head connection to the primary structure of concrete or

steel;

(c) accommodate in the Contractor’s design of the support structure as describedin the Specification, the specified construction tolerances and deflectioncriteria for:

(i) concrete; and

(ii) steelwork;

(d) use a modular system of components to the support structure to standardizethe relationship and details between panels, panel sub-frames and the support

posts or supporting walls;

(e) prevent chemical and/or electrolytic action where dissimilar metals and/ormaterials are used together. Refer to PD 6484 ‘Commentary on corrosion atbi-metallic contacts and its alleviation’. This is of particular importance wherestainless steel, aluminium, and aluminium alloys are used. The Contractorshall provide the necessary insulation wherever dissimilar metals occur atinterfaces with works that precede the internal cladding systems; and

(f) Hot-dip galvanize all inaccessible steel in accordance with BS 729.

30.5.5 Fixings of Internal Cladding Systems

The Contractor shall:

(a) use bolts, screws, nuts and anchors of adequate strength for their designedpurpose;

(b) supply all necessary and appropriate fasteners and fixings for the internalcladding systems, associated flashings, and closures;

(c) use fixings which conform with all statutory requirements in respect of strengthand type;

(d) take adequate measures to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilarmetals and to this end attention is drawn to publication PD 6484 ‘Commentaryon corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation’;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 101/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  9/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(e) use fixings within the aluminium framing which are not visible unless indicatedon the Employer’s Drawings. Restrict visible fixings to the assembly of thealuminium elements to the support steelwork using fixing types described onthe Employer’s Drawings; and

(f) unless otherwise specified in the Specification or on the Employer’s Drawings,

observe the following basic requirements:

(i) use fixings which are suited to the likely stresses, movements andvibrations in use without allowing any wobble, creaks or deflection ofany fixtures or fittings;

(ii) all panels shall be readily demountable (for easy replacement ifdamaged) without compromising the integrity of the system ordisturbing adjacent panels; and

(iii) make access panels removable with screw fixings and retention clips,independently of any other panels.

30.5.6 Internal Wall Solid Panel Construction

Internal wall cladding systems solid panels shall be manufactured from steel with aminimal thickness of 1.2 mm, treated with suitable finish to provide a durable finishas specified. The back panel shall be mineral fibre acoustic material or mediumdensity fibre board dependant on the acoustic insulation required:

(a) cladding panels shall be geometrically arranged as shown on the Employer’sDrawings;

(b) cladding panels shall be of metal pan type construction and consist of sheet

metal brake pressed folded at all four edges with a minimum return edge of 50mm, and a radius not exceeding 3 mm. All corner folded edges shall bewelded and ground smooth, prior to finishing, to form a shallow tray;

(c) all steel panels shall be fabricated from CR4 mild steel in compliance with BS1449;

(d) glue used to bond the backing material to the metal pan shall be a singlecomponent moisture curing polyurethane adhesive;

(e) vertical joints between cladding panels shall be sealed with a serratedcompressible neoprene strip;

(f) vertical joint widths between adjacent panels shall not greater than 7 mm andnot less than 5 mm wide;

(g) neoprene strips shall be straight and recessed a nominal 6 mm from the faceof the cladding panel;

(h) cladding panels shall have various cut outs at interfaces with building servicesinstallations. Size and location of cut outs shall be either shown on theEmployer’s Drawings or as agreed by the Project Manager;

(i) cladding panels shall be protected against corrosion after fabrication and prior

to application of finishes;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 102/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  10/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(j) all cutting and drilling of cladding panels, and associated internal claddingsystems shall take place before the application of painted finishes. Site cuttingor drilling shall not be permitted except with the express permission of theProject Manager; and

(k) all exposed faces of metal shall be finished in such a way that no exposed cut

ends are left unfinished.

30.5.7 Skirtings

(a) Skirtings shall be profiled, extruded aluminium, dimensioned as shown on theEmployer’s Drawings.

(b) Skirtings shall be manufactured in the longest economical sections possible,and installed with a tight butt joint on planning grid.

(c) Skirting shall be mechanically fixed using countersunk Allen key head screwsand shall include a continuous push fit gasket to seal the junction with floor

finishes as shown on the Employer’s Drawings.

(d) Extruded aluminium locating plate shall be provided to reinforce the junctionsbetween abutting skirting sections, both in line and at corners, as shown onthe Employer’s Drawings.

(e) Skirtings shall have a polished finish to the outer face of the dentil profile, anda black paint finish to the recessed face.

30.5.8 Protect ion Rails

Where indicated on the Employer’s drawings the Contractor shall provide high and

low level protection rails as follows:

(a) Protection rails shall be of unitized stainless steel circular hollow sections.Each unit shall have welded end caps ground smooth two welded cleats whichare inserted into a 20 mm horizontal joint between two cladding panels andbolted to the cladding support structure.

(b) Protection rails shall occur only at low level or in tandem at low level and highlevel as indicated on the Employer’s Drawings.

(c) Protection rails shall nominally be located with joints on a planning module.

30.5.9 Doors

The Contractor shall:

(a) match the finishes to the metal doors to those of the surrounding panels of theinternal cladding system;

(b) use no visible fixings in the door construction;

(c) provide doors which do not twist nor deform with opening and do not rely onthe closed position to maintain their rigidity;

(d) make all doors open 90° unless otherwise shown;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 103/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  11/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(e) make all access panels readily demountable, without major lifting equipmentfor maintenance purposes, and without disturbing the surrounding elements ofPermanent Works;

(f) make all hinged access panels open 180° at all locations accessing fire hosereel equipment without disturbing the surrounding elements of Permanent

Works, and while maintaining all vertical panel to hinged access panel joints ata nominal 6 mm; and

(g) provide door frames where shown on the Employer’s Drawings which consistof steel profiles (minimum 1.6 mm section) manufactured to comply with BS1245 and fire check flush doors comply with BS 476 Part 31 (where shown onthe Employer’s Drawings); door reveals shall be continuous with surroundingpanels of same construction and finish.

30.5.10 Acoust ic and Fire Rated Material

(a) The Contractor shall provide acoustic material which is inert, non-hygroscopic,

rot and vermin proof, does not support fungi or bacteria and in compliancewith the fire requirements specified.

(b) The mineral fibres shall be at least 3 μm in diameter and not less than 200 μmin length. The fibres shall be stabilised to ensure that there is no fibremigration.

(c) The material shall not shrink, slump or otherwise consolidate when installed.

30.5.11 Movement Joints

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide movement and expansion joints as indicated on the Employer’sDrawings; and

(b) design movement joints in accordance with the design intent shown on theEmployer’s Drawings. The internal cladding systems shall accommodate allmovement of the joint in a manner which does not compromise the panel’sintegrity or appearance.

30.5.12 Gaskets

The Contractor shall:

(a) butt joint all gasket-to-gasket joints. The bonding of gaskets using othermethods shall not be acceptable. The gaskets shall perform and appear as asingle continuous material.

(b) Gaskets shall be either neoprene or silicone and fabricated off-Site in thelargest possible lengths leaving only the minimum fabrication on Site;

(c) where the gasket system comprises both extruded and moulded elements,make such elements perform and appear as a single element;

(d) design and select all gaskets to comply with the stipulations of BS 4255,

appropriate to the extrusion design and ensure that they do not permanentlydistort over the working life of the internal cladding systems;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 104/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  12/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(e) use gaskets which are free from contact with materials that have staincharacteristics, and are compatible with all substrate, sealants, and all othermaterials used in the internal cladding systems;

(f) provide written confirmation from the gasket manufacturer that the gasketmaterial and designs are suitable for their specific use in any part of the

internal cladding systems, and are compatible with all other materials andsealants used within the installation;

(g) use gaskets of black colour unless otherwise specified;

(h) use gaskets which do not shrink, warp or deteriorate within the replacementperiod specified;

(i) pre-form and factory fabricate gasket corners in ladders;

(j) select gaskets and seals to accommodate the range of dimensional tolerancesand movements associated with the design, fabrication and installation of the

internal cladding systems. Gasket shall be formed from materials capable ofmaintaining their elastic qualities and dimensions, resistant to physical andchemical attack, sufficient to maintain the acoustic performance of the internalcladding systems during its design life; and

(k) vulcanizing of gaskets shall only required where specified on the EmployersDrawings.

30.5.13 Sealants

The Contractor shall:

(a) use wet applied sealants on Site only in the locations shown on theEmployer’s Drawings;

(b) use one-part silicone sealants in compliance with BS 5889;

(c) apply sealant in accordance with the supplier’s/manufacturer’s writtenpreparatory and application procedures and the Code of Practice prepared bythe United Kingdom Sealant Manufacturers’ Confederation;

(d) submit written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer confirming thesuitability of the sealant for the application intended to the Project Manager forreview without objection. The period shall be stated during which the silicone

shall not change in appearance or colour. Any discoloration of silicone duringthis time shall not be acceptable;

(e) submit proposals to the Project Manager for review without objection of thetype and colour of silicone prior to ordering;

(f) remove excess silicone and clean all joints;

(g) apply silicone evenly without bubbles and with joints not less than 6 mm x 6mm;

(h) use sealants which are compatible with the joint surfaces and to each other,

as stated in the manufacturer’s published data or as certified by themanufacturer for each application;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 105/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  13/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(i) determine the proper hardness, compressibility or consistency of sealants inconsultation with the manufacturer, considering the joint movement andexposure for the size of joint;

(j) ensure that the silicone joints can accommodate and are compatible with anymovements to which they may be subjected;

(k) use sealant that can withstand the applicable degree of exposure to wear,abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant exposed to traffic shall have the strengthand modulus to resist damage indentation;

(l) provide adequate protection to the silicone joints during the curing process toavoid contamination by dust and other debris; and

(m) use closed cell type backing rods which are compatible with the silicone used.

30.5.14 Louvres / Air Gril les

The Contractor shall:

(a) supply and install all louvres and linear air grilles associated with and locatedwithin internal cladding walls;

(b) install linear air grilles of extruded aluminium. They shall comprise a corewithin a frame, as indicated on the Employer’s Drawings. The core sectionshall be easily removable for access to mechanical equipment. The framesection shall be fixed back to the cladding panel support post on planning grid;and

(c) use linear air grilles for supplying air as part of the mechanical services air

conditioning system. The performance of the mechanical services shall beunaffected by the general arrangement of the proposed cladding system or byother individual components.

30.5.15 Mild Steel

The Contractor shall:

(a) design all mild steel work in compliance with BS 5950: Part 1 unless otherwisespecified;

(b) use welding procedures that minimize distortion and eliminate local distortion

in the final fabrication, if rectification is necessary, propose and rectify with amethod reviewed without objection by the Project Manager;

(c) make no welds other than those shown on the Contractor’s Drawings thathave been reviewed and received a notice of no objection from the ProjectManager, including temporary attachments or repairs. If welded temporaryconnections are agreed upon, their welding and removal shall be inaccordance with clauses 19 and 29 of BS 5135;

(d) carry out surface preparation as follows:

(i) remove all rust, scale and surface contamination and leave a surface

equivalent in cleanliness to SA 2.5 quality of Swedish standard SIS05-59-00 (BS 7079: Table A1);

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 106/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  14/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(ii) use acid pickling for surface cleaning.

(iii) provide galvanizing in accordance with BS 729 giving a minimumcoating weight of 610 g/m²; and

(iv) post-treat steel after galvanizing if necessary, to achieve the thickness

of galvanizing on the steelwork as specified.

30.5.16 Stainless Steel

(a) All stainless steel shall be austenitic, non-magnetic grade A151 316 S13 to BS1449: Part 2.

(b) Material for stainless steel bolts shall be grade A151 316 S13 stainless steeland complies with the dimensional requirements as stated in BS 3692. Boltstrength shall be equivalent to grade 4.6 bolts. Washers for stainless steelbolts shall be formed from grade 316 stainless steel.

(c) Weld metal shall be deposited by an automatic or semi-automatic processwhich has mechanical properties not less than the minima specified for theweld metal deposited by electrodes complying with BS EN 499.

(d) Electrodes for metal arc welding shall be classified, coded and marked inaccordance with BS EN 499. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shallcomply with BS 2926.

(e) All visible stainless steel shall comply with BS 1449: Part 2 Table 1, type 4and shall be satin 240 grit finished. The finish shall be established on thebasis of reference samples submitted to the Project Manager for reviewwithout objection.

30.5.17 Aluminium

The Contractor shall:

(a) fabricate all aluminium framing members in compliance with BS 1474;

(b) use aluminium sheeting minimum of 3mm thick and in compliance with BS1470, BS EN 485 or BS EN 515;

(c) use only appropriate grades, strengths, and thicknesses of aluminium to meetall structural and finishing requirements. The wall thicknesses of aluminium

extrusions shall be sufficient to maintain their rigidity in the lengths required inthe final installation;

(d) manufacture all aluminium fixing brackets and cleats from the appropriategrade of alloy in compliance with BS 1474. If visible, they shall be finished tomatch the metal panels and framing members; and

(e) protect all exposed aluminium with low tack adhesive film, which shall beremoved and disposed of by the Contractor upon Practical Completion.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 107/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  15/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

30.5.18 Finishes: Polyester Powder Coat

(a) Where specified as a finish to metal panels and structure, polyester powdercoating shall comply with BS 6496 and BS 6497, and shall be applied on an

automatic continuous paint line to a minimum thickness of 80 μm andmaximum thickness to match hard coating process. Colours shall be as shownon the Employer’s Drawings. One application company and one polyesterpowder coating supplier shall be used for the internal cladding systems.

(b) The polyester powder coating thickness between similar adjacent components

shall not vary by more than 10 μm.

(c) The finish to the systems shall be in accordance with Appendix E No.6 ofTable E3 of BS 5427.

(d) All powder coated panels shall receive a clear protective top coat sealant, 70

μm thick.

(e) Any primer and surface treatment applied to panels and structure prior toapplication of decorative coatings shall have a minimum dry film thickness of

25 μm and shall be compatible with the decorative coatings. Workmanship forsurface preparation and paint application shall comply with BS 5493.

(f) Over-application of coatings of elements shall be avoided.

(g) All finished surfaces shall be smooth, free from blemishes, pinholes, tears,orange peel effect and other coating defects when evenly illuminated bydiffuse light and viewed using normal corrected vision from a distance of 1 m.

(h) Limits for acceptable production colour variations shall be establishedbetween the Project Manager and the Contractor by reference to samples/benchmarks.

30.5.19 Finishes: Aluminium Anodizing

(a) Aluminium anodizing shall comply with BS 1615 unless specified otherwise.The Contractor shall submit certification from the anodizing contractor thatanodizing has been carried out in compliance with the Specification.

(b) Where aluminium is used in the internal cladding systems and the final finishis dependent upon the base metal, the Contractor shall provide aluminiumfrom a single batch to ensure identical chemical composition.

(c) If the quantity involved for the whole internal cladding systems is in excess ofa single batch, the Contractor shall inform and agree with the Project Manageroptions for the grouping of elements and components from each batch.

(d) The Contractor shall select all aluminium alloys to provide components with auniform finished visual appearance. The alloys shall be 6063 for extrusionsand J57S for sheets.

(e) There shall be no apparent variation of final surface finish of any panels orcomponents when compared with each other. Panels or components, which inthe opinion of the Project Manager fail to achieve a uniform final surface finish,

shall be replaced.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 108/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  16/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(f) Where the finish is natural anodized, the Contractor shall submit samples tothe Project Manager for review without objection.

(g) The thickness should be determined in accordance with BS 6161: Part 1 orPart 2 non-destructive or BS 5411: Part 3 or Part 5 destructive.

30.5.20 Finishes: Vitreous Enamel

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide vitreous enamel facing sheets in compliance with BS 3830 and BS1344 Part 8 designated AA. Mild steel used for manufacture of vitreousenamel facing sheets shall be decarbonised “zero carbon” of flattened mildsteel sheet, suitable for deep drawing application;

(b) confirm that the minimum bond strength obtained by the ground coat systemor the ground coat and cover coat system is fair to excellent as defined by the Appendix to the publication “Atlas to Enamel Defects” published by the

Institute of Vitreous Enamellers 1982. “Poor” or “Bad” shall not be acceptable;

(c) provide the ground coat at the rear of the vitreous enamel facing sheet with abond strength in lap shear of 4 N/mm² between the ground coat and the facingsheet;

(d) spray all surfaces of the metal facing sheet with one ground coat and at leasttwo finishing coats of vitreous enamel;

(e) individually fire each coat of vitreous enamel and ensure uniform thickness.

The total thickness of all coats shall be between 300 and 350 μm but not more

than 400 μm. Units shall not be rejected if minor areas of the coat exceed 400

μm, providing this does not result in the occurrence of orange peel effect, hairlining or a proneness to spalling;

(f) provide coatings to the front and rear of the sheet with a similar thickness anda permitted tolerance of 20% in the coatings to the rear of the panel only;

(g) provide the finished vitreous enamelled units with a degree of gloss 75-85% inaccordance with ASTM Test Method 34625. Gloss retention on samples takenfrom the production run shall not be affected when tested in accordance withBS 1344: Part 8 - Resistance to Boiling Citric Acid;

(h) provide vitreous enamel with colour achieving a stability index not less than

98.2 average colour when tested in accordance with ASTM C 538 - 64 T tocolour retention with cupric sulphate;

(i) achieve a minimum acceptable image clarity of AA or A designation. Imageclarity shall be tested on samples accepted by the Project Manager by meansof a distinctness of image test with a PEI - GARDNER glossmeter or similarreflectometer.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 109/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  17/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(j) reject vitreous enamelling if it contains any bisque damage, burn-off, carbonboil, contamination, copperheads, crawling and tearing, crocodiling, drainlines, fish-scaling, grease marks, heat craze, lamination, excessive orangepeel (in excess of agreed standards), shore lines, spilling, star marks, waterlines, pop-off, sagging, as described in N.E.N. 2711. The rare occurrence ofsingle blisters may be accepted providing the blisters do not penetrate more

than a single coat of vitreous enamel. Blister penetrations shall be treated inaccordance with N.E.N. 2711.

30.5.21 Colour

The Contractor shall finish colour, unless otherwise specified in the Employer’sDrawings or Specification, to the RAL reference. Exact shade shall be determinedby colour match samples with a specular gloss factor of 30 % ±3 % when measuredin accordance with BS 3900: Part D5, using the 60 ° geometry method.

30.6 SUBMISSIONS

30.6.1 Particulars of the Internal Cladding System

The Contractor shall submit the following particulars of the proposed internalcladding system to the Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) details of the source, type and properties of the materials proposed;

(b) elevations, floor plans, sections and full size details. Details shall be fullydrawn (not outlined). Drawings shall include the following:

(i) assembly of each panel system including angles, corners,

construction joints, pipe intrusions etc.;

(ii) glass and metal thickness;

(iii) metal alloy, temper and finish;

(iv) glazing materials identification;

(v) sealants and gasket identification by product name;

(vi) relative layout of walls, beams, column and slabs with dimensionsnoted;

(vii) provisions for thermal movements and building movements; and

(viii) glazing details applicable to replacement glass, with outline ofprocedure for glass replacement.

30.6.2 Samples

The Contractor shall provide the samples, with relevant written trade literature andspecifications to the Project Manager for review without objection, which shallinclude but not be limited to the following:

(a) 300 mm x 300 mm sample of coatings as specified to flat sheets (includingperforated panels) and extruded sections in 600 mm length (including louvreextrusion, linear air grille extrusion) - 4 no. each;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 110/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  18/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(b) all proposed gasket types in materials and colours specified. All samples shallinclude at least one joint in 600 mm length - 2 no. each;

(c) all specified types of glass, samples 600 mm x 600 mm - 4 no. each;

(d) stainless steel samples 600 mm x 600 mm - 4 no. each;

(e) fixing - 4 no. each type;

(f) all fire stopping materials - 2 no. each;

(g) natural anodized aluminium skirting extrusion in 600 mm length - 2 no. each;

(h) each type of ironmongery;

(i) 300 mm x300 mm sample of vitreous enamel as specified to flat sheets - 2 no.each; and

(j) 1,000 mm section of all aluminium mullions and transoms - 2 no. each.

30.6.3 Prototypes

(a) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and/or clear away prototypes, of eachinternal cladding type as indicated on the Employer’s Drawings. Eachprototype shall include all visible components of the various constructions,non-visible support systems and fixings.

(b) The prototypes shall utilize the specified materials and finishes of this sectionand the Specification, but not necessarily the final production techniques.

(c) The prototypes shall be tested and examined in terms of quality, materials,interfacing details for accessibility by other trades, and workmanship by theProject Manager.

(d) The Contractor shall have the Project Manager   witness the installation anddismantling of the prototypes and record any variations to the agreed detailson the Contractor’s Drawings.

30.6.4 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall, following receipt of no objection from the ProjectManager of relevant samples and prior to commencement of internal cladding,

construct and establish one complete bay of each cladding module, asindicated on the Employer’s Drawings as benchmarks. After the ProjectManager has reviewed with no objection, the benchmark shall become thestandard to which all subsequent internal cladding works shall conform.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any internal cladding works.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 111/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  19/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

30.7 WORKMANSHIP

30.7.1 Tolerances

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide a high degree of accuracy in the fabrication and installation of theinternal cladding systems and its support structure.

(b) at the time of completion, achieve the visual requirements of the internalcladding systems. The allowable tolerances within any planning grid sectionshall be equally distributed to achieve the following requirements:

(i) wall cladding is vertical;

(ii) vertical and horizontal joints are of equal size and at equal centres;

(iii) internal cladding systems have straight lines and flat planes; and

(iv) horizontal joints are of equal size and in line between adjacent panels.

(c) perform sufficient analysis of the intended erection sequence and the overallmethod statement to meet the installation tolerances stated in theSpecification; and

(d) show on the Contractor’s Drawings the dimensional and detailed provisionsintended to accommodate the construction tolerances of the surroundingelements to ensure that all aspects of the internal cladding systems relatesatisfactorily to the Works as a whole.

30.7.2 Tolerances for Manufacture

(a) Deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimensions shall be restrictedto ±1 mm;

(b) The cladding panels shall appear smooth and flat in accordance with thereviewed benchmark. The required flatness criterion shall be 1:1,000; and

(c) All return edges of steel panels shall have a minimum external bending radiusof 1.5 mm and a maximum of 3 mm. The Contractor shall confirm the radius,which shall be consistent throughout the internal cladding systems.

30.7.3 Installation Tolerances

The Contractor shall:

(a) erect the internal cladding systems in proper alignment in relation toestablished lines and grades as shown on the Employer’s Drawings and takeaccount of the installation tolerance requirements of the internal claddingsystem such that units are accurately located, relative to grid lines;

(b) restrict the average width deviation of any joint from the nominal width to ±1mm. Any variation shall be equally distributed with no sudden changes orsteps;

(c) restrict the maximum variation in plan location from the planning grid of anypart of the cladding system to ±2.0 mm;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 112/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  20/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(d) restrict the maximum variation in height of any part of the internal claddingsystem from given datum to ±2.0 mm;

(e) restrict the maximum offset in plan, level or section between any two adjacentpanels to ±1.0 mm; and

(f) make cut outs for interfacing works to the dimensions shown on theEmployer’s Drawings or agreed on Site to ±1 mm.

30.7.4 Glass Tolerances

(a) Manufactured glass sizes shall be ± 1 mm on each straight length.

(b) Lipping of laminated glass edges shall be ±1 mm.

(c) After final processing the deviation in flatness at any peak shall be restrictedto 0.13 mm and the difference between adjacent peaks to 0.08 mm. Wherebow tolerance and wave tolerance differ, the stricter requirements shall

prevail. Direction of ripples shall be consistent.

(d) The Contractor shall submit a detailed list of tolerances to which the internalcladding Systems are fabricated and installed for review without objection bythe Project Manager. As a minimum, this shall include the following:

(i) position on plan;

(ii) level;

(iii) alignment;

(iv) joints between panels;

(v) diagonal;

(vi) eccentricity; and

(vii) inclination.

30.7.5 Louvres and Linear Air Grilles

The Contractor shall:

(a) make linear air grilles continuous with 2 mm joints at centres to matchcladding modules;

(b) provide suitable fasteners to align separate sections of linear air grille. Wheninstalled, linear air grilles shall present a continuous straight appearancewithout misalignment or distortion;

(c) mitre and factory fabricate all linear air grille corners; and

(d) fit sections of linear air grilles not connected to plenums or ductwork with anon-visible air boot, blanking plate or similar in natural silver anodizedaluminium.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 113/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  21/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

30.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

30.8.1 Durabili ty Tests

The Contractor shall:

(a) test corrosion resistance in accordance with BS 5466: Part 3, for a period of 8hours with results evaluated in accordance with BS 3745. The rating shall be aminimum of 8;

(b) test light resistance in accordance with BS 6161: Part 7. The rating shall be aminimum of 9;

(c) test ultra violet resistance in accordance with BS 6161: Part 8;

(d) test heat resistance in accordance with BS 1615: Clause 9.3;

(e) test abrasive resistance in accordance with BS 6161: Part 9 and 10; and

(f) carry out each of the above tests at the rate of one test per 2,000 m² of panel.

30.8.2 Impact Tests

The Contractor shall:

(a) test the impact resistance of the protection rail by subjecting it to the impactforce of 250 kg at a speed of 0.9 m/s at mid-span. The buffer rail shallwithstand such impact without permanent deformation or permanentindentation. The test shall be carried out at 200 m intervals;

(b) test the impact resistance of the panel surfaces to verify that they canwithstand heavy impacts generated from pedestrian traffic without anypermanent scuffing, deformation or indentation in excess of 1 mm in depth.The impact resistance test for the panel surfaces shall comply with BS 8200 Appendix G assuming performance category B as described in Table 2. Thetest shall be carried out on one panel per two hundred, randomly selectedfrom the largest panels;

(c) test the scratch resistance of the panel coating in accordance with BS 3900part E2. There shall be no penetration to the substrate under a load of 0.5 kg.The test shall be carried out on one panel per two hundred, randomly selectedfrom the largest panels;

(d) test the impact resistance of the panels in accordance with BS 3500: Part E3.The maximum permissible indentation shall be 1.0 mm. The test shall becarried out on one panel per two hundred, randomly selected from the largestpanels;

(e) test the resistance to separation from the substrate of the panel coating inaccordance with BS 3900 part E6 using a single blade tool. The coating shallcomply with Classification 0 of Table 1 of BS 3900 part E6. One such panel inevery two hundred shall be tested using this method; and

(f) provide details of tests to demonstrate the performance of materials and

finishes in resisting impact from pedestrian traffic (hands, rings, luggage,trolleys, cloth, shoes, etc.) and any other impacts resulting from adjacenttraffic movements.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 114/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  22/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

30.8.3 Acoust ic Tests

The Contractor shall:

(a) test samples of the internal cladding systems (glazed and non-glazed) toverify fulfillment of the acoustic performance requirements specified. The

samples shall represent the materials used in the systems and include at leastone horizontal joint and one vertical joint;

(b) commence the acoustic tests at times agreed with the Project Manager withresults being submitted in writing to the Project Manager within three weeks ofcompletion of the tests;

(c) calculate the acoustic ratings specified from BS 5821: Part 1: 1984 from testmeasurements of sound reduction index in accordance with BS 2750: Part 3:1980. Such tests shall be obtained from an independent acoustic laboratory,whose qualifications and abilities have been previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager and shall represent full height section of the

internal cladding systems including panel, junction joints and, whereappropriate, doors; and

(d) obtain acoustic ratings and measurements in accordance with ISO or DIN orother recognized standards equivalent to British Standards to the satisfactionof the Project Manager.

30.8.4 Tests for Finishes to Aluminium

The Contractor shall test finished aluminium panels and extrusions to the followingin addition to those specified above. Test specimens shall be at least 150 mm longand 75 mm wide with a flat-coated surface on which to conduct instrument

measurements. The Contractor shall label the test specimens to indicate exposedsurfaces. Tests shall comply with AAMA 605.2-1980 as outlined by the following:

(a) Hardness - Pencil: The finish shall achieve a minimum rating of F inaccordance with AAMA 605.7.3;

(b) Film Adhesion: The finish shall achieve excellent ‘Knife’ adhesion;

(c) Impact Resistance: There shall be no removal using a Gardener VariableImpact Tester as AAMA 605.7.5;

(d) Abrasion Resistance: The finish shall achieve an abrasion coefficient value of

20 minimum according to AAMA 605.7.6;

(e) Acid Resistance: Using the Muriatic Acid Spot Test the finish shall not showany signs of attack after 15 minutes as AAMA 605.7.7.1;

(f) Resistance to Acid Pollutants: The finish shall not achieve more than 5E Units(NBS) as stipulated in AAMA 605.7.7.3;

(g) Pollutants: Colour change shall be calculated in accordance with ASTM-D-2244;

(h) Detergent Resistance (3%) immersion at 100°F: The finish shall not show any

signs of attack after 72 hours in accordance with AAMA 605.7.7.4;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 115/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  23/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(i) Humidity Resistance 100% Relative Humidity at 100°F: The finish shall havefewer than eight blisters after 3000 hours of exposure in accordance with AAMA 605.7.8.1;

(j) Salt Spray Resistance 5% salt at 100°F: The finish shall have 1.5mmmaximum undercutting after 3000 hours of exposure in accordance with

 AAMA 605.7.8.2;

(k) Colour Retention (ASTM-D-2244): The finish shall have a maximum of 5EUnits (NBS) colour change after 5 years of exposure in accordance with AAMA 605.7.9.1.2;

(l) Chalk Resistance: The finish shall not have any more chalking than thatrepresented by a No.8 rating for colours and a No.6 rating for whites after 5years of exposure in accordance with AAMA 605.7.9.1.3;

(m) Sealant Compatibility: No deleterious effects to the coating shall occur inaccordance with AAMA 605.7.10;

(n) Alkali Resistance (Mortar Pat): The finish shall not show any signs of attackafter 24 hours in accordance with AAMA 605.7.7.2; and

(o) Erosion: The finish shall not suffer a loss greater than 20% after 5 years ofexposure in accordance with AAMA 605.7.9.1.5.

30.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

30.9.1 Demountability

The Contractor shall ensure that all visible elements of the internal claddingsystems are interchangeable and removable for purposes including maintenance.

30.9.2 Maintenance and Repair: Primary Components

The Contractor shall ensure that primary components have a predicted service lifenot less than 12 years without the need for maintenance and other than regularcleaning. The following components shall be primary components:

(a) all framing and structural support components;

(b) glass;

(c) panels; and

(d) fixings.

30.9.3 Maintenance and Repair: Secondary Components

(a) The following are secondary components which shall have a service life of notless than 8 years:

(i) gaskets and compression seals; and

(ii) sealants.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 116/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  24/24 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 30 – Internal Cladding Systems

 

(b) The Contractor shall state the predicted service life of all secondarycomponents and provide guidance on the required maintenance, replacementperiods, and methods of replacement. Secondary components shall becapable of easy replacement without compromising the structural or visualintegrity of the internal cladding systems. Components shall be capable ofreplacement without progressive dismantling of the internal cladding systems.

30.9.4 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Details of all cladding systems used;

(b) Drawings showing the extent of each type of cladding system;

(c) Particulars of materials manufacturers;

(d) Means of safe access for cleaning and maintenance;

(e) Procedures for changing panels and other typical components; and

(f) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 117/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

SECTION 31 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

31.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of carpentry and joinery which generally comprise:

(a) hardwood and softwood timber;

(b) plywood and veneered plywood;

(c) block board;

(d) hardboard;

(e) chipboard;

(f) medium density fibre board (MDF);

(g) high density fibreboard (HDF);

(h) laminates;

(i) fixings;

(j) adhesives; and

(k) preservatives

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(l) linings, sheathings, dry wall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(m) suspended ceilings refer to section 34;

(n) ironmongery refer to section 36; and

(o) painting and decorating refer to section 40.

31.2 NOT USED

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 118/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 144 Specification for coal tar creosote for wood preservation

BS 438 Laminates

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structureBS EN 622-1:1997 Fibreboards. Specifications. General Requirements

BS EN 622-2:1997 Fibreboards. Specifications. Requirements forHardboards

BS EN 622-3:1997 Fibreboards. Specifications. Requirements for Mediumboards

BS EN 622-4:1997 Fibreboards. Specifications. Requirements for Softboards

  BS EN 622-5:1997 Fibreboards. Specifications. Requirements for DryProcess Boards (MDF)

BS 1088 Plywood for marine craftBS 1186: Parts 1 and 2 Workmanship in joinery

BS 1202: Part 1 Steel nails

BS 1203 Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood

BS 1204 Parts 1 and 2 Gap filling adhesives

BS 1210 Wood screws

BS 1282 Wood preservatives. Guidance on choice, use andapplication

BS 4079 Plywood for marine craft

BS 4072 Copper/chromium/arsenic preparations for woodpreservation 

BS 5669: Parts 1 and 2 Wood chipboard and of test for particle board

BS 6206 Impact performance for safety glass

BS 6566 Plywood

BS 7331: 1990 Direct surface wood chipboard base on thermosettingresins

BS EN 438 Decorative laminate sheets

PNAP ADV-5 Tropical Hardwood Timber

31.4 NOT USED

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 119/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.5 MATERIALS

31.5.1 Timber Generally

(a) Timber shall generally comply with BS 1186: Part 1 and shall be of maturegrowth, properly seasoned and sawn square.

(b) Timber shall be free from wood wasp holes, large loose or dead knots, splitsor other defects that will reduce its strength.

(c) Pin holes and worm holes shall be permitted subject to the review withoutobjection by the Project Manager provided that there is no active infestation ofthe timber, the strength of the member is not impaired and they do not appearon the finished faces of joinery work.

31.5.2 Timber for External Use

(a) Timber shall be either hardwood or softwood suitable for external use.

(b) Softwood shall be Radiata Pine from New Zealand, and Red or White Pinefrom Canada.

(c) Temperate Hardwoods shall be Beech or China Oak. Species shall besubmitted to the Project Manager for review without objection.

(d) The Contractor shall obtain timber either softwood or hardwood from asustainable forest or plantation.

(e) The Contractor shall submit an authenticated certificate form Forest

Stewardship Council (FSC) or other approved authority.

(f) Moisture content shall be in accordance with section 31.8.1 and the specifiedmoisture content of timber shall be maintained until preservative treatmentdescribed below is applied.

(g) Clear colourless copper chrome arsenic in compliance with B2 4072 or otherpreservative previously reviewed without objection by the Project Managershall be used.

(h) Tropical hardwood including Meranti, Iroko Sapele, Angre. Mahongony, Teakand Ramin, shall not be used unless obtained from the Forest Stewardship

Council (FSC) certified forests.

31.5.3 Softwood

(a) Softwood for carpentry shall be Pine, Cedar, Spruce or China fir or otherspecies reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(b) All timber shall be appropriately stamped or marked to identify origin andgrade.

(c) All timber shall be kiln dried and vacuum impregnated to New ZealandStandard H3, or equivalent, with copper chrome arsenate, or as directedotherwise by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 120/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

(d) All softwood shall be from a verifiable sustainable forest and shall beaccredited with a certificate from the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).

31.5.4 Hardwood

(a) Hardwood shall only be used in special circumstances under the direction ofthe Project Manager, and shall be certified as originating from a sustainedresource or managed plantation as certified by the Forest Stewardship Council(FSC) or other approved authority. Consideration must be given to theprovisions of PNAP ADV-5and further Practice notes for Authorized Personsrestricting the use of Hardwoods.

(b) Density of hardwood shall be 720 kg/m3 (minimum) at 15% moisture content.

(c) The Contractor shall submit the following information to the Project Managerfor review:

(i) the species and country of origin;

(ii) the name of the concessions or plantations form which these timbersoriginate;

(iii) copies of the forestry policies implemented by these concessions orplantations which confirm that the management of the timber resource issustainable;

(iv) shipping documents which confirm that the supplier in Hong Kong hasobtained the timber form the stated concessions or plantations;

(v) certificate form the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) or other approvedauthority,

(d) Hardwood of unknown species or from unidentified sources shall not be used.

31.5.5 Plywood

(a) Plywood shall comply with BS 6566 and of the following grades, as specified:

(i) "Grade 1 veneer" - hardwood faced, as specified, for natural finish.

(ii) "Grade 2 veneer" - luan faced for painting.

(b) Bonding adhesive between veneers shall be resin adhesive classified asmoisture and weather resistant (M.R.) in BS 1203. 

(c) Nominal standard thicknesses of plywood shall be 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and25 mm.

(d) Plywood containing hardwoods of unknown species or from unidentifiedsources shall not be used. Only plywood made from softwood or temperatehardwoods that originate form the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certifiedforests or other approved authority (e.g. Douglas Fir or Birch).

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 121/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.5.6 Marine Plywood

Marine plywood shall comply with BS 1088 and 4079 bonded with Typeweatherproof and boil-proof (W.B.P.) adhesive between plys.

31.5.7 Blockboard

Blockboard shall be Grade 2 veneer for painting, and bonded with Type M.R.adhesive as in section 31.5.4.

31.5.8 Hardboard

Hardboard shall comply with BS EN 622 Part 2: 1997: "Standard" (Types SHA, SHBand SHC) or "tempered" (Type THE and THN) as specified.

31.5.9 Insulating Board

Insulating board (Soft board) shall comply with BS EN 622 Part 4: 1997.

31.5.10 Wood Chipboard

(a) Wood chipboard shall be unsanded or sanded board in compliance with BS5669: Part. 1 & 2. Veneered chipboard shall be a proprietary brand reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager. Melamine-faced chipboard shallcomply with BS 7331: 1990.

(b) All wood chipboards shall be low formaldehyde emission chipboard (Class El)unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, or polyurethane - basedchipboard with zero formaldehyde emission. Any boarding to be used in wet

areas such as kitchens shall be high moisture resistant board in compliancewith BS EN 622: 1997.

31.5.11 Glass Fibre Insulating Quilt

Glass fibre insulating quilt shall be lightweight-bonded mat weighing 12 kg/m2

uncompressed.

31.5.12 Semi-rigid Glass Fibre Slab

Glass fibre insulating board shall be semi-rigid resin-bonded glass fibre weighing45-48 kg/m3.

31.5.13 Medium Densi ty Fibreboard (MDF)

Medium Density Fibreboard shall be moisture resistant grade (MDFMR) with densityin excess of 600 kg/m3 in compliance with BS EN 622 Part 5: 1997.

31.5.14 Laminated Plastic

Laminated plastic sheet shall be BSEN 438 Class HG (Horizontal- General Purpose)or VG (Medical-General Purpose) or FR grade (0.8 mm complying with class 0/1spread of fame) as specified.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 122/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.5.15 Nails

(a) Nails shall be steel nails in compliance with BS 1202: Part 1, with "bright"finish, unless otherwise specified.

(b) Nail lengths shall be not more than the total thickness of sections to be joinedless 5 mm, or not less than twice the thickness of section through which nailsare driven.

(c) Where the thickness of the outer section through which nails are being drivenis less than half of the section to which nailing is being done, the depth ofpenetration of the nails into the latter shall be not less than 10 diameters of thenails being used.

31.5.16 Screws

(a) Wood screws shall be brass, stainless steel, alloy or other non-corroding

metal in compliance with BS 1210 with countersunk heads, unless otherwisespecified. Steel screws shall only be used for Temporary Works. Screws shallbe used for all particleboard fixing.

(b) Screw lengths shall be not more than the total thickness of sections to be joined, less 5 mm, or not less than one and a half times the thickness ofsection through which screws are driven.

(c) Where the thickness of the outer section being screwed is less than half thatof the section to which screwing is being done, the depth of penetration of thescrewing into the latter shall be not less than the thickness of the outer section.

(d) Screw cups shall be brass cups or stainless steel.

31.5.17 Masonry Nails

The Contractor shall not use masonry nails or drive pins without the expresspermission of the Project Manager.

31.5.18 Explosive Cartridges

(a) The Contractor shall obtain a notice of no objection from the Project Managerbefore using explosive cartridge operated fixings. All fixings shall be inaccordance with the Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Cartridge-

Operated fixing tools) Regulations.

(b) The Contractor shall use tools, normally of the indirect acting type, plus pinsand cartridges in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

(c) A tool shall only be used by a person holding a certificate of competency,specifying the maker and model of the tool on which he has been successfullytrained.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 123/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.5.19 Plugs

(a) Plugs for fixing to hard materials shall be proprietary plugs of plastic, softmetal, fibre or similar.

(b) Fixing to friable materials, plasterboard and the like shall be proprietary fixingsspecially designed for that situation and reviewed without objection by theProject Manager.

(c) The use of wood plugs shall not be permitted.

31.5.20 Adhesive

(a) Adhesive for wood shall be as follows:

(i) for internal use - synthetic resin adhesive classified as moisture resistantand moderately weather-resistant (M.R.) in BS 1204: Part. 1;

(ii) for external use or internal use under very damp conditions - syntheticresin adhesive classified as weatherproof and boil-proof (W.B.P.) in BS1204: Part. 1.

(b) Adhesive for fixing laminated plastic sheet shall be synthetic resin adhesiveclassified as weather-proof and boil-proof (W.B.P.) in BS 1204: Parts 1 and 2.

(c) Where the temperature exceeds 25 oC, a "warm-setting" grade of adhesiveshall be used.

(d) The use of animal glues shall not be permitted.

31.5.21 Resin for MDF Panels

 All urea formaldehyde bonded MDF panels and MUF mouldings shall bemanufactured with low emission resins conforming to European E1 emissionstandard 9 mg/100 g (minimum).

31.5.22 Wood Preservative

Wood preservative shall be a proprietary brand of exterior grade.

31.5.23 Wood Preservative for External Timber:

(a) Timber shall be free from dirt and surface moisture.

(b) The Contractor shall apply preservative by pressure impregnation inaccordance with BS 1282:1997.

(c) The Contractor shall apply preservative in a manner that is not hazardous tohealth and adhere strictly to the manufacture’s instructions.

(d) The Contractor shall complete all cutting, planning, borings, drilling, notchingor any other machining or manual operation prior to preservative treatment.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 124/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

(e) For certain timbers such as Douglas Fir, which are difficult to impregnate, theContractor shall make 20 mm deep incisions coverage of 650 per m2  in thedirection of the grain in accordance with BS 144:1997. This method shall onlybe used in timber sections exceeding 80mm thickness.

(f) For timber where impregnation is not suitable and a paint finish is not required,the Contractor shall apply 2 coats of creosote previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions

31.6 SUBMISSIONS

31.6.1 Particulars of Carpentry and Joinery

The following particulars of the proposed carpentry and joinery shall be submitted tothe Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing the fabrication details of all custom made joinery;

(b) certification confirming that all timber proposed originates from a sustainedrenewable resource or managed plantation and that the timber complies withthe requirements stated in the Specification and including results of tests for;

(i) density, and

(ii) moisture content; and

(c) manufacturer’s literature of all proprietary carpentry and joinery.

31.6.2 Samples and Prototypes

The following samples of proposed materials together with the particulars referred toabove shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) samples of all types of timber for joinery where the grain is to be left exposedor where the surfaces are to be varnished or similarly treated;

(b) a sample taken from each batch of timber in accordance with section 31.8.2;and

(c) prototypes of each type of repetitive custom joinery before starting fabrication.

31.6.3 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall, following receipt of no objection from the ProjectManager of relevant samples and prior to commencement of carpentry and joinery construct one complete module of each type of carpentry and joineryas benchmarks. Upon a notice of no objection, the benchmarks shall becomethe agreed standard to which all subsequent carpentry and joinery shallconform.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any carpentry and joinery works.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 125/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.7 WORKMANSHIP

31.7.1 Storage

The Contractor shall store timber in a dry, well ventilated place and protect from theweather.

31.7.2 Workmanship Generally

(a) Workmanship generally shall be in compliance with BS 1186: Part 2.

(b) The Contractor shall plug and screw or secure timber sections to the backingby means previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(c) The Contractor shall check location of buried services before fixing to wallsand other surfaces.

31.7.3 Timber

The Contractor shall cut timber to required sizes and lengths as soon as practicableafter commencement of installation and store the timber in a dry, well-ventilated andunder cover area.

31.7.4 Dimensions

(a) Dimensions of sections shown on the Employer’s Drawings are finished sizes.The Contractor shall allow for planing and sanding faces to finished sizes.

(b) The Contractor shall verify Site dimensions before prefabricating joinery

fittings.

31.7.5 Planed Timber

The Contractor shall plane timber for joinery on all faces; finish exposed faces to afine glass papered surfaces and round arises to 1 mm radius.

31.7.6 Framed Joinery Generally

(a) Faces of framed joints shall be square and driven together to give a close,accurate fit.

(b) The Contractor shall prepare and frame up joinery work with dry joints andstore until required for fixing.

(c) Before fixing joints, the Contractor shall put together with white glue andwedge up. Replace any sections that have warped or developed shakes orother defects.

31.7.7 Running Bonded Joints

Running bonded joints shall be cross-tongued. For work over 40 mm thick, doubletongues shall be used.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 126/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.7.8 Joinery with Clear Finish

Joinery with clear finish shall be protected from damage or discolouration. TheContractor shall submit proposals for protection to the Project Manager for reviewwithout objection.

31.7.9 Nailing

The Contractor shall:

(a) nail timber sections securely to the backing without splitting the timber;remove and replace any split timbers;

(b) punch nail heads below timber surfaces visible in completed work; and

(c) nail weather boarding to wood farming with not less than two corrosionproofed nails in the width of each board at each framing member.

31.7.10 Screwing

The Contractor shall:

(a) when specified, screw timber sections to the backing including drilling pilotholes and countersinking heads flush with timber surfaces;

(b) insert screws in full depth with a screwdriver and not hammered;

(c) leave countersink screw heads 5 mm (minimum) below timber surfaces withnatural finish; and

(d) glue in pellets cut from timber with matching colour and grain; finish off flushwith face.

31.7.11 Wood Preservative

The Contractor shall apply wood preservative to all concealed  surfaces of timberincluding framing, fillets, backs of frames, skirtings etc.

31.7.12 Moisture Content

The Contractor shall not fix laminated plastic sheet to timber with a moisture content

of more than 16%.

31.7.13 Doors and Frames Generally

Templates or formers shall be used for door opening construction. Proprietary doorssets shall not be used as former. Door frames shall not be used as formers exceptwith the express permission of the Project Manager.

31.7.14 Flush Doors

(a) Stiles and rails generally shall be 75 mm wide. For doors exceeding 900 mmwide or 2,000 mm high, stiles shall be 100 mm wide.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 127/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 128/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.7.17 Glazing Beads

The Contractor shall provide glazing beads to match surrounding timber; mitre atangles; fix with screws and cups, where specified. Glazing beads shall not be lessthan 12 mm thick.

31.7.18 Half hour Fire Resist ing Doors

(a) Half-hour fire doors shall be 50 mm solid core flush door, and shall be certifiedas having been tested in accordance with BS 476.

(b) Vision panels shall be fire resisting safety glass complying with BS 476 part 22and BS 6206

(c) Hinges with nylon bearings shall not be used in fire-resisting door assemblies.

31.7.19 One hour Fire Resisting Doors

(a) One hour fire doors shall be proprietary fire doors previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager and tested in accordance with BS 476: Part.20-23.

31.7.20 Smoke and Intumescent Seals

Fire rated doors shall incorporate proprietary smoke seals and intumescent strips incompliance with BS 476: Part. 20-23.

31.7.21 Acoust ic Doors

 Acoustic doors shall be solid core doors with air-tight seals at junctions with the doorframes and threshold. The overall door configuration shall achieve a soundinsulation performance no less than STC 51 when tested under laboratoryconditions in accordance with ASTM E90 and determined according to ASTM E413.

31.7.22 Fixing of Frames

The Contractor shall:

(a) construct door frames with properly framed joints and fix, using cramps orbolts and secure the bottom of door frames with dowels as specified in section36; and

(b) bed frames in cement mortar, leaving no gaps;

(c) for external doors, rake out external face 10 mm deep, and point with asealant previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

31.7.23 Architraves

 Architraves shall be one length between angles. The Contractor shall mitrearchitraves at angle joints.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 129/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/13 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 31 – Carpentry & Joinery

31.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

31.8.1 Moisture Content of Timber

The Contractor shall calculate moisture content at the time of fabrication by thefollowing formula:

Wet (or supplied) Mass – Dry Mass x100 = Moisture Content (percentage)Dry Mass

(a) The dry mass shall be determined by drying in an oven at a temperature of103 oC ± 2 oC until the weight is constant.

(b) The maximum permissible moisture content in timbers to be incorporated intothe Works shall be as follows: -

(i) internal timber for use in air conditioned space 12%;

(ii) internal timber generally 16%;

(iii) timbers with one face to the exterior of the building and one face to theinterior 18%;

(iv) external timbers (e.g. fencing etc.) 20%.

31.8.2 Testing Timber

(a) Each sample of timber shall be tested to determine the moisture content at thetime of fabrication.

(b) The moisture content at the time of fabrication shall be calculated from theabove equation.

(c) A batch of timber is any quantity of timber of the same type and grade, fromthe same source, covered by the same certificates and delivered to the Site atany one time.

(d) 1 sample of timber shall be provided from each batch of timber.

(e) The size of each sample shall be 1000 mm x 50 mm x 50 mm.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 130/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 131/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

SECTION 32 GLAZING, GLAZED SCREENS, BALUSTRADES AND HANDRAILS

32.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of the glazing,glazed screens, balustrades and handrails which generally comprise:

(a) glass generally for internal use;

(b) internal glazed screens;

(c) glass balustrades and associated metal balustrades (when forming part of anoverall system);

(d) toughened glass balustrades to edges of voids;

(e) cantilevered structural glazed balustrades;

(f) Other metal balustrades are specified in section 35 (Architectural Metalwork)

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(g) curtain walling refer to section 29;

(h) internal cladding refer to section 30;

(i) carpentry and joinery refer to section 31;

(j) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(k) architectural metalwork refer to section 35; and

(l) ironmongery refer to section 36.

32.2 NOT USED

32.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steelarticles

BS 952 Glass for glazing

BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip

BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip

BS 1474 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for

general engineering purposes: bars extended round tubes andsections

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 132/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

BS 1615 Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on aluminiumand its alloys

BS 1723 Brazing

BS 2926 Specification for chromium and chromium - nickel steel

electrodes for manual metal-arc weldingBS 3692 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws

and nuts. Metric units

BS 3745 Method for the evaluation of results of accelerated corrosiontests on metallic coatings.

BS 3900 Method of tests for paints

BS 4255 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion frombuildings.

BS 5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganesesteels.

BS 5357 Code of Practice: Installation of security glazing

BS 5368 Methods of testing windows.

BS 5395 Stairs ladders and walkways

BS 5411 Method of test for metallic and related coatings.

BS 5427 Code of practice for performance and loading criteria forprofiled sheeting in building.

BS 5466 Methods for corrosion testing of metallic coatings.

BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel

structures against corrosion.BS 5889 Specification for one part gun grade silicone.

BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building.

BS 6161 Methods of test for anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium andits alloys.

BS 6180 Code of practice for barriers in and about buildings

BS 6206 Specification for impact performance requirements for flatsafety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings.

BS 6262 Glazing for buildings.

BS 6399 Loading for buildings

BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformedsections for external architectural purposes, and for the finishon aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sectionscoated with powder organic coatings.

BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections andpreformed steel sheet for windows and associated externalarchitectural purposes, and for the finish on galvanized steel

sections and preformed sheet coated with powder organiccoatings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 133/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and itsalleviation

BS 6262 Code of practice for glazing for buildings

BS 8200 Code of Practice for design of non load bearing external

vertical enclosures of buildingsBS EN 485 Specification for aluminium and aluminium alloys. Sheet strip

and plate.

BS EN 499 

Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steelelectrodes for manual metal arc welding.

BCR Hong Kong Building (Construction) Regulations

CP 118 The structural use of aluminium.

32.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

32.4.1 Glazed Screens, Glazing, Balustrades and Handrail Systems

The Contractor shall:

(a) adopt the design and visual criteria shown on the Employer's Drawings; and

(b) design and select suitable materials, (sizes, thicknesses, types, fixings andsealants), in compliance with the Specification and visual intent shown on theEmployer's Drawings.

32.4.2 Support Systems for Glazed Screens, Balustrades and Handrails

The Contractor shall:

(a) design the fixings where the fixing details are shown as indicative;

(b) take account of the fixing zones indicated on the Employer's Drawings, whendesigning the system;

(c) accommodate within the design the specified construction tolerances anddeflection criteria for the support structure;

(d) use a modular system of components for the support structure andstandardize the relationship and detail between panels, panel sub-frames andtheir support posts or supporting walls;

(e) take adequate measures to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilarmetals and to this end attention is drawn to publication PD 6484 'Commentaryon corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'; and

(f) hot-dip galvanize all inaccessible steel in accordance with BS 729.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 134/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.4.3 Structural Design Responsibilit ies for Glazed Screens, Balustrades andHandrails

The Contractor shall:

(a) submit structural calculations for review without objection by the ProjectManager;

(b) design all necessary expansion and movement joints to accommodate themaximum movements derived from the specified design loads andmovements. Under maximum movements the joints shall meet all theperformance requirements of the Specification;

(c) provide all components and systems to withstand all static and dynamicdesign loads specified in the Particular Technical Specification, withoutcausing permanent deformation of components or the failure of members orseals, and transmit such loads safely to the points of support;

(d) provide systems which do not deflect under loading in any way that isdetrimental to any element of the Permanent Works or adjacent structural orbuilding elements;

(e) design and install all components and couplings in such a manner as to becapable of accommodating all deflection and specified tolerance withoutdistortion, deformation, or failure;

(f) design the deflection of the systems in accordance with BS 8200, Section 2Table 1 - Storey Height Assemblies;

(g) design the systems to withstand all vibrations caused by traffic, aircraft,helicopters, internal "wind" effects or any other such shocks, strains, stressesand movements including operation of smoke and other mechanicalventilation that may be imposed by the Authority, so that they do not causefracture or deterioration of any element, particularly to any moveable oropenable element, of the internal systems. Suitable devices for absorbing ordamping any such vibration shall be included; and

(h) design the systems to prevent the transmission of drumming noise as a resultof vibration, shocks, stress, etc., by the use of sound deadening material in allareas.

32.5 MATERIALS

32.5.1 Glass Materials Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) use laminated and toughened or float glass of suitable thickness suitablytreated to provide a durable finish;

(b) determine the thickness and safety design of the glass, having due regard tothe performance requirements of the Specification and the location within thebuilding;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 135/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

(c) heat soak all toughened glass in order to minimize the occurrence of nickelsulphide stones;

(d) cut glass to provide clean-cut, finely arrised, undamaged edges (shark teeth,serration hackle, sharp flare, flake chips, rough chips, feathered edges, shells,or other imperfections shall not be acceptable). Glass delivered to Site shallbe of the required size. No cutting or nipping of glass shall be allowed on Site.Variations in manufacture and performance of the glass shall not affect itscolour or appearance, while all glass shall be visually identical in appearanceand colour;

(e) provide glass of the quality specified in BS 952: Part 1: and carry out theglazing in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations,taking into account the recommendations of the Glass and GlazingFederation, and the requirements of BS 6262;

(f) design all glass panels to be replaceable. The Contractor shall provide a

method statement showing the methods of removing damaged glass and anyassociated metal framework and installing new components;

(g) provide all glass from a single manufacturer unless agreed otherwise by theProject Manager;

(h) provide glass which does not contain impurities which would detract in anyway from the performance or visual intent of the glazing system;

(i) use PVC setting and location blocks of a thickness equal to the specifiedspace between either the glass and rebate or bead and depth, to provide 5mm (minimum) cover of sealant;

(j) seal laminated glass edges with materials compatible with the interlayer.Delamination of the laminated glass shall not occurred; and

(k) provide glass that is free from bubbles, smoke vanes, air holes, scratches orany other defects.

32.5.2 Heat Strengthened Glass

Heat strengthened glass shall be glass that has been heat treated to approximatelydouble the strength and impact resistance of untreated glass but not to therequirements of tempered glass.

32.5.3 Fully Tempered Glass

Fully tempered glass shall be glass that has been heat treated to approximately fourtimes the strength and impact resistance of untreated glass and upon fracturewould break into small fragments.

32.5.4 Tinted Glass

Tinted glass shall comply with BS 952 and shall be body tinted of the colour andintensity specified.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 136/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.5.5 Reflect ive Glass

Reflective glass shall comply with BS 952 and shall be a proprietary product,previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager, with a reflectivecoating on the designated surface to the colour and performance specified.

32.5.6 Laminated Glass

Laminated glass shall comply with BS 952 and shall be a proprietary product,previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager, comprising two ormore sheets bonded together and incorporating a plastic interlayer to ensure theperformance specified.

32.5.7 Coatings/Treatment to Glazing

The Contractor shall provide:

(a) coatings which are either one of the following as shown on the Employer’sDrawings:

(i) fused into the inner surface of the glass thus providing a permanentlayer; or

(ii) fused onto a polyester, (or other material reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager), layer fixed between the polyvinyl butyral (PVB)interlayer.

(b) coatings/treatments/inter layers which do not crack, disintegrate or corrode inany way under the extremes of conditions outlined in the General

Specification;

(c) ceramic frit, which is fused into the surface of the glass so that it is apermanent surface, and is on the inside face of the glass. Silk screening ofthe ceramic frit onto the surface of the glass without fusing into the glass shallnot be permitted;

(d) ceramic frit which does not crack or disintegrate in any way under theextremes of conditions outlined in the General Specification;

(e) ceramic frit glass surfaces which are the same colour and have surfacefinishes of similar sheen, chromaticity and luminosity to give non-distributor

colour difference when viewed by eye and illuminated by a standard lightsource.

32.5.8 Aluminium Framing

The Contractor shall:

(a) fabricate aluminium supports to glazing in accordance with section 35(Architectural Metalwork) and the following:

(b) fabricate all aluminium framing members in compliance with BS 1474;

(c) provide aluminium sheeting a minimum of 3 mm thick in compliance with BSEN 485;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 137/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

(d) use only appropriate grades, strengths, and thickness of aluminium to complywith all structural and finishing requirements. The wall thicknesses ofaluminium extrusions shall be sufficient for their rigidity in the lengths requiredin the final installation;

(e) manufacture all aluminium fixing brackets and cleats from the appropriategrade of alloy in compliance with BS 1474. If visible, they shall be finished tomatch the metal panels and framing members; and

(f) protect all exposed aluminium with low tack adhesive film, which shall beremoved and disposed of in accordance with the Programme or whendirected by the Project Manager.

32.5.9 Mild Steel

The Contractor shall fabricate and design all mild steel work in accordance withsections 30 (Internal Cladding Systems) and 35 (Architectural Metalwork) and in

compliance with BS 5950: Part 1 where applicable, unless stated otherwise.

32.5.10 Stainless Steel

The Contractor shall fabricate and design all stainless steel work in accordance withsections 30 (Internal Cladding Systems) and 35 (Architectural Metalwork) and usestainless steel which is austenitic, non-magnetic grade A151 316 S13 to BS1449:Part 2:1975.

32.5.11 Welding

The Contractor shall fabricate and design all welds in accordance with section 35

(Architectural Metalwork)

32.5.12 Gaskets

The Contractor shall provide gaskets in accordance with sections 30 (InternalCladding Systems).

32.5.13 Sealants

The Contractor shall provide sealants in accordance with sections 30 (InternalCladding Systems)

32.5.14 Polyester Powder Coating

(a) Where specified as a finish, polyester powder coating shall comply with BS6496 and BS 6497, and shall be applied on an automatic continuous paint line

to a minimum thickness of 80 μm and maximum thickness to match hardcoating process.

(b) Colours shall be as shown on the Employer’s Drawings. One applicationcompany and one polyester powder coating supplier shall be used for theInternal Cladding Systems.

(c) The polyester powder coating thickness between similar adjacent componentsshall not vary by more than 10 μm.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 138/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

(d) The finish to the systems shall be in accordance with BS 5427 Appendix ENo.6 of Table E3.

(e) All powder coated panels shall receive a clear protective top coat sealant, 70

μm thick.

(f) Any primer and surface treatment applied to panels and structure prior toapplication of decorative coatings shall have a minimum dry film thickness of

25 μm and shall be compatible with the decorative coatings. Workmanship forsurface preparation and paint application shall conform to BS 5493.

(g) The over-application of coatings of elements shall be avoided.

(h) All finished surfaces shall be smooth, free from blemishes, pinholes, tears,orange peel effect and other coating defects when evenly illuminated bydiffuse light and viewed using normal corrected vision from a distance of 1 m.

(i) Limits for acceptable production colour variations shall be establishedbetween the Project Manager and the Contractor by reference to samples/benchmarks.

32.5.15 Alumin ium Anodizing

(a) The Contractor shall ensure that aluminium anodizing complies with BS 1615unless specified otherwise. The Contractor shall submit certification from theanodizing contractor that anodizing has been carried out in compliance withthe Specification.

(b) Where aluminium is used in the internal cladding systems and the final finish

is dependent upon the base metal, it shall be provided from a single batch toensure identical chemical composition.

(c) If the quantity involved for the whole of the internal cladding systems is inexcess of that can be made in a single batch, the Contractor shall inform andagree with the Project Manager options for the grouping of elements andcomponents from each batch.

(d) All aluminium alloys shall be selected to provide components with a uniformfinished visual appearance. The alloys shall be 6063 for extrusions and J57Sfor sheets.

(e) There shall be no apparent variation of final surface finish of any panels orcomponents when compared with each other. The Contractor shall replacepanels or components which in the opinion of the Project Manager fail toachieve a uniform final surface finish.

(f) Where the finish is natural anodized, samples shall be submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection.

(g) The thickness should be determined in accordance with BS 6161: Part 1 orPart 2 non-destructive or BS 5411: Part 3 or Part 5 destructive.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 139/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.5.16 Colour

The Contractor shall, unless otherwise specified in the Employer's Drawings orParticular Technical Specification, use colours finished to the RAL reference, exactshade shall be determined by colour match samples with a specular gloss factor of30% ±3% when measured in accordance with BS 3900: Part D5 using the 60°geometry method.

32.5.17 Special Coatings

(a) The Contactor shall use painting materials in accordance with section 40 anduse materials, workmanship, quality control to comply with BS 5943.

(b) Where indicated on the Employer’s Drawings protective “Micaceous IronOxide” coating (MIO) treatment shall be applied to structural support systems.

32.6 SUBMISSIONS

32.6.1 Part iculars of Glazing, Glazed screens, Balust rades and Handrails.

The following particulars shall be submitted to the Project Manager for reviewwithout objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing the fabrication and installation details, andsurrounding elements, to demonstrate that all aspects of the glazed screens,balustrades and handrails comply with the Specification and the Employer’sDrawings;

(b) details of the source, type and properties of all materials.

32.6.2 Samples

The following samples of proposed materials, as applicable to the Works, togetherwith relevant trade literature shall be submitted to the Project Manager for reviewwithout objection:

(a) samples 600 mm (minimum) square of all types of glass and coatings beforeordering;

(b) polyester powder coatings as specified to flat sheets and extruded sections;

(c) all proposed gasket types in materials and colours specified. All samples shallinclude at least one joint;

(d) natural silver anodized aluminium as specified flat sheets and extrudedsections;

(e) proposed joints of glazed screens, balustrades and handrails;

(f) each type of fixing, corrosion protection and finishes; and

(g) 600 mm sample of each type of handrail and buffer rail.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 140/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.6.3 Prototypes

(a) The Contractor shall where applicable to the Works, provide, maintain and/orclear away the following prototypes.

(b) The Contractor shall erect at a location directed by the Project Manager, fullscale prototypes including glazed screens, balustrades and handrails, two fullheight panels, corners, skirtings and fascias plus one movement joint forinspection of each type, prior to production of materials, utilizing materials inaccordance with the Specification, but not necessarily final productiontechniques.

(c) The prototype shall be tested and reviewed in terms of quality, materials,interfacing details for accessibility by other trades, and workmanship by theProject Manager.

(d) The Contractor shall have the Project Manager witness the installation and

dismantling of the prototypes and record any variation to the agreed details ona marked set of Contractor’s Drawings.

32.6.4 Benchmarks

(a) Following the fixing of the first glazed screen, balustrade or handrail at alocation agreed with the Project Manager. The element shall be inspected bythe Project Manager and shall, upon receipt of a notice of no objection, beused as a benchmark for installation, to monitor the quality of subsequentinstallation.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any glazing, glazed screens,balustrades and handrails works.

32.6.5 Tolerances of Designed Elements

(a) The Contractor shall submit a detailed list of tolerances to which the glazedscreens, balustrades and handrails shall be fabricated and installed for reviewwithout objection by the Project Manager. As a minimum this shall respect therequirements of sections 32.7.1 and 32.7.2 below and include the following:

(i) position on plan;

(ii) level;

(iii) alignment;

(iv) joints between panels;

(v) diagonal;

(vi) eccentricity; and

(vii) inclination.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 141/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

(b) The Contractor shall carry out sufficient analysis of the overall methodstatement and erection sequence performed of each element to thesatisfaction of the Project Manager that the installation tolerances statedabove are met.

32.7 WORKMANSHIP

32.7.1 Tolerances

(a) Glazed screens, balustrades, handrails and their support structure shall bemanufactured in accordance with the specified tolerances.

(b) Once installed, the visual requirements of the glazed screens, balustradesand handrails shall be such that, within any planning grid area, the allowabletolerances are equally distributed to ensure that:

(i) the balustrades are vertical;

(ii) the vertical joints are of equal size and at equal centers and are alwaysvertical even where the balustrade is sloping for example at ramps andthe like;

(iii) the support mullions are vertical and at even centers;

(iv) the supports have straight lines and flat planes;

(v) the horizontal joints are of equal size and in line between adjacentpanels;

(vi) the gap between the panels and structure posts is constant;

(vii) deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimension tolerances donot exceed ±1 mm; and

(viii) twist and warping do not cause any point of the glazed panel to be morethan 0.5 mm out of plane. The twist and warping shall not cause anypoint of the structural frame to be more than 2 mm out of plane.

32.7.2 Installation Tolerances

The average width of any joint between panels and supports shall not deviate fromthe nominal width by more than ±1 mm. Any variation shall be equally distributedwith no sudden changes or steps and:

(a) the maximum variation in plan location from the planning grid of any part ofthe system is ±2.0 mm;

(b) the maximum variation in height of any part of the system from given datum is±2.0 mm;

(c) the maximum offset in plan, level or section between any two adjacent panelsis ±1.0 mm; and

(d) the base plates and floor sockets are fixed to an accuracy of ±1 mm on lineand level.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 142/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.7.3 Protect ion and Delivery

The Contractor shall keep glass and plastic dry and clean during delivery and storevertically in a well-vented location carefully protected from condensation and othermoisture.

32.7.4 Workmanship Generally

(a) Glazing shall comply with BS 6262.

(b) Glass edge clearance shall be equal all round each pane, and 3 mm(minimum).

(c) Edge cover provided by sealant shall be as the table below:

Table 32.1: Edge Cover

Glass area (m2) Edge cover (mm)

Up to 0.5

0.5 to 1.5

1.5 to 4.0

Over 4.0

5

9

12

 As recommended by sealant manufacturer

(d) The Contractor shall use setting and location blocks for all panes exceeding0.2m2; locate as recommended by window manufacturer, or as BS 6262  Figure 22, but not less than 30 mm from corner of surround to end of block

nearest corner.

32.7.5 Joints

The Contractor shall provide and design movement and expansion joints as shownon the Employer's Drawings. The glazing, glazed screen systems, balustrades, andhandrails shall accommodate all movement of the joints in a manner which does notcompromise the panel’s integrity or appearance.

32.7.6 Preparation of Surrounds

The Contractor shall:

(a) ensure that rebates are clean, dry and unobstructed at time of priming andglazing;

(b) for metal surrounds, follow recommendations of compound manufacturer andsurround manufacturer in:

(i) apply a suitable primer, if required;

(ii) prepare surround and beads.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 143/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.7.7 Bedding

The Contractor shall:

(a) ensure that no voids or spaces are left in backing or bedding compounds andthat there is no metal or wood to glass contact;

(b) strip surplus backing or bedding compound as follows:

(i) to top and side edges-flush with top of rebate or bead; and

(ii) to bottom edges at 450 degree angle.

32.7.8 Pre-formed Tapes and Gaskets

The Contractor shall use preformed tapes, shims and compression gaskets forglazing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations which has been

reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

32.7.9 Fixing of Glazed Screens, Balustrades and Handrails

The Contractor shall:

(a) use fixings that comply with the “Design and Performance Criteria” stated inthis section. The Project Manager may require revised positioning of thesystem in the future and the selection of fixings shall ensure that this flexibilityis available;

(b) use bolts, screws, nuts and anchors which are of adequate strength for their

designed purpose and shall be manufactured from the specified grade ofstainless steel;

(c) provide all necessary fasteners and fixings for the systems and associatedflashings and closures; and

(d) use fixings, within the aluminium framing components, which are not visibleunless indicated on the Employer's Drawings.

32.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

32.8.1 Cleaning

The Contractor shall:

(a) remove all smears and excess glazing compound;

(b) remove mortar, plaster or concrete spillage and paint drips whilst wet; and

(c) leave clean inside and out and free from scratches.

32.8.2 Making Good

The Contractor shall replace and redecorate glass or fixing materials broken ordamaged before completion.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 144/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 32 – Glazing, Glazed Screens, Balustrades& Handrails 

32.8.3 General Testing Requirements

The Contractor shall also comply with the durability tests, impact tests, and tests forfinishes required in section 30 (Internal Cladding Systems).

32.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

32.9.1 Demountability

The Contractor shall ensure that elements of the glazed screens, balustrades andhandrails are interchangeable and removable for purposes including maintenance.

32.9.2 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Details of all glazed screens, glazing, balustrades and handrail systems used;

(b) Drawings showing the extent of each type of system;

(c) Particulars of materials manufacturers;

(d) Means of safe access for cleaning and maintenance;

(e) Procedures for changing typical components; and

(f) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 145/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

SECTION 33 LININGS, SHEATHINGS, DRYWALL PARTITIONS AND TOILETCUBICLES

33.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of the linings,sheathings, drywall partitions, and toilet cubicles which generally comprise:

(a) drywall partitions;

(b) drywall lining systems; and

(c) toilet cubicles

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(d) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(e) carpentry and joinery refer to section 31;

(f) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(g) suspended ceilings refer to section 34;

(h) architectural metalwork refer to section 35;

(i) ironmongery refer section to 36; and

(j) sanitary fittings refer to section 95.

33.2 NOT USED

33.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 4 Structural steel sections

BS 476: Part 7 Method of classification of the surface spread of flame ofproducts

BS 476: Part 6 Test methods and criteria for the fire resistance of elements ofbuilding construction

BS 729 Specification for hot dipped galvanised coatings on iron andsteel articles

BS 952 Glass for glazing

BS 1140 Specification for resistance spot welding of uncoated andcoated low carbon steel.

BS 1203 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives (phenolic andaminoplastic) for plywood

BS 1204 Specification for type MR phenolic and aminoplastic syntheticresin adhesives for wood

BS 1230 Plasterboard

BS 1387 Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes andtubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for welding or forscrewing to BS 21 pipe threads.

BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 146/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes: drawn tube.

BS 1471 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip.

BS 1474 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for generalengineering purposes: bars.

BS 2750 Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of buildingelements.

BS 2989 Continuously hot-dip zinc coated and steel

BS 2994 Cold rolled steel sections

BS 3958 Thermal insulating materials

BS 4255 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusion frombuildings

BS 4965 Specification for decorative laminated plastics sheet veneeredboards and panels

BS 5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese

steelsBS 5325 Code of practice for installation of textile floor coverings

BS 5338 Code of practice for zinc alloy pressure die casting forengineering

BS 5442: Part1 Classification of adhesives for use with flooring materials

BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steelstructures against corrosion

BS 5606 Guide to accuracy in building

BS 5669 Wood chipboard and method of tests for particle board

BS 5750 Quality systems

BS 5821 Methods for rating the sound insulation in buildings and ofbuilding elements

BS 5889 Specification of one-part gun grade silicon sealant

BS 6214 Specification for jointing materials for plasterboard

PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and itsalleviation

BS 6566 Plywood

BS EN 438 Decorative laminate sheets

BS EN 485 Specification for aluminium and its alloys. Sheet strip andplate (replaces BS 1470)

BS EN 515 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Wrought products. Temperdesignation.

BRE CP7/77 Guide to Fire stops

PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and itsalleviation

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 147/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

33.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

33.4.1 Contractor’s Responsibilit ies

The Contractor shall:

(a) be responsible for the fabrication, installation, and fire certification oncompletion of lining sheathings and drywall partitions, including co-ordinationof services penetrations and fire stopping at all elements interfaces;

(b) design the final toilet cubicle systems adopting the design/visual criteriashown on the Employer's Drawings and the requirements of the Specification. All elements of the cubicle systems shall be fully interchangeable andremovable for all purposes including maintenance.

33.5 MATERIALS

33.5.1 Part itions and Linings Generally

(a) The following partition types shall be provided:

(i) fire rated wall partition with nominal thickness of 100-200 mmmanufactured, comprising a single or multi-layer of 12.5 mm thick firerated board, fire rated on both sides of the metal stud frame and in filledwith insulation material. Maximum height of partition shall be 4,000 mm;and

(ii) non-fire rated partition with nominal thickness of 100 mm comprising of2 layers of 12.5 mm thick board on both sides of a 50 mm metal stud

frame.

(b) The Contractor shall provide all holes and penetrations for services includingall necessary ancillary supporting steelwork as required.

(c) The Contractor shall provide all fire and acoustic sealing of penetrations to thedry wall after installation of the services.

(d) All systems shall be installed with fixings, seals, gaskets, cleats, brackets,ironmongery, spacers, shims, washers, volt arrangements assessments,bedding, hives, pivots, springs, catches, stays, locks, cylinders, control clear,handles, screws and all other ancillary elements supplied by the same

manufacturer or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

(e) All dry lining shall be of moisture resistant grade.

(f) The Contractor shall provide, install and carry out final design of toiletcubicles/partitions/doors, with associated ironmongery and fittings, to toiletareas as indicated on the Employer's Drawings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 148/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

33.5.2 Joints

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide lining sheathings and dry wall systems that accommodate allmovement of or expansion joint in a manner that does not compromise the

element’s integrity or appearance;

(b) not provide horizontal joints in surfaces exposed to view except where theheight of wall exceeds the maximum available length of board;

(c) propose positions of joints where they are not specified in the ParticularTechnical Specification or shown on the Employer's Drawings;

(d) offset horizontal joints in two layer boarding by at least 600 mm;

(e) provide noggins positioned to support horizontal joints in outer layer ofboarding in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations;

(f) install openings for doors and windows in such a way that the risk of jointcracks at vertical joints is minimised;

(g) use plasterboard edge beads at abutments with dissimilar materials and atpoints of stress in accordance with the dry wall manufacturer'srecommendations and as shown on the Employer's Drawings;

(h) provide control joints in long runs of partitions and linings as recommended bythe manufacturer to relieve stresses in partitions from expansion andcontraction;

(i) provide head deflection joints to tops of partitions at beams and underside offloor slabs to accommodate deflection of the structure to ±20 mm. These shallbe cut to fit around beams, fire stopped and sealed to maintain fire and soundintegrity in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations;

(j) provide speed tape mechanical jointing at all board joints that have internalangles reinforced with joint tape; and

(k) protect external angles by drywall angles beads with plasterboard edge beadat visible unjointed abutments (25 mm leg on face of board; filled andfinished). When jointing is complete and dry, one coat drywall primer shall beapplied to the entire wallboard surface ready for finishing coats. All beads

shall be flush.

33.5.3 Fire Stopping

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide all fire stopping around partitions, linings and at junctions with non-rated partitions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, tomaintain the fire integrity of the fire compartmentation / fire zoning as shownon the Employer’s Drawings;

(b) provide all fire stopping at movement joint locations as indicated on the

Employer’s Drawings; 

(c) Refer to section 41 (Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems) for furtherrequirements of fire stopping systems.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 149/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

33.5.4 Cavity Barriers

The Contractor shall provide adequate support to edge of boards and around pipes,ducts, etc. and shall seal any gaps with a proprietary material tightly packed toprevent penetration of smoke and flame.

33.5.5 Sealants

The Contractor shall:

(a) use wet applied sealant on Site only in the locations shown on the Employer'sDrawings;

(b) use sealant in compliance with BS 5889 and as recommended by themanufacturer;

(c) obtain written confirmation from the sealant manufacturer and submit to theProject Manager for review regarding the suitability of the sealant for the

application intended. The manufacturer shall state the period during which thesilicone shall not change in appearance or colour. Any discoloration of siliconeduring this time shall not be acceptable;

(d) submit to the Project Manager for review without objection the type and colourof silicone prior to ordering;

(e) demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Project Manager that the silicone jointscan accommodate and are compatible with any movements to which theymay be subjected;

(f) use sealants which can withstand the applicable degree of exposure to wear,

abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant exposed to traffic shall have strengthand modulus to resist indentation damage;

(g) use sealants which have the lowest modulus of elasticity consistent with thedegree of exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism;

(h) use silicone with the colour as specified on Employer's Drawings; and

(i) use closed cell type backing rods which are compatible with the silicone used.

33.5.6 Timber Skirt ings

(a) Unless specified otherwise on the Employer’s Drawings, all partitions shallhave timber skirting fixed to them.

(b) Timber shall comply with BS 1186: Part 3 Class 1 and section 31 (Carpentryand Joinery).

33.5.7 Fire Rating Material

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide fire compartment walls with the minimum fire resisting period asspecified in accordance with BS476: Part 8, and Buildings Regulations for

stability, integrity and insulation; fire and smoke sealed at all junctions;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 150/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

(b) install all elements of the fire rated drywall and lining systems to comply withBS 476: Part 6 and Part 7 Class 1 Surface Spread of Flame Rating. TheContractor shall submit  fire  test certificates to verify compliance of thematerials;

(c) where indicated on the Employer's Drawings, install dry wall and lining with a

fire resistance to match the surrounding walls for structural integrity andinsulation; and

(d) ensure all interfaces with any building movement joint is fire rated 

to matchthe fire resisting period of the surrounding walls. All interfaces shall be smokesealed with a suitable sealant to maintain the fire resisting period of thecompartment.

33.5.8 Toilet Cubicles

(a) Cubicle systems shall consist of panels with high-pressure matt finishmelamine surfaces fused to core of solid phenolic material in compliance with

BS EN 438. The panels shall be resistance to water, heat, cigarette burn andchemical, easily cleaned and with a durable finish.

(b) Panels doors and pilasters of cubicle system shall be:

(i) high-pressure matt finish melamine surfaces fused to core of solidphenolic material. Face laminate shall overlap edge laminate to assurewater run-off and enhance adhesive bonding; and

(ii) solid laminate for all components shall be minimium 12 mm thick.

(c) Doors shall not slam on closing. As a minimum requirement, doors or reveals

shall have a continuous adhesive neoprene strip lining securely fixed toprevent the slamming of door. The strip shall be submitted to the ProjectManager for review without objection and shall be fixed in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations.

(d) Panels shall be fixed together by satin stainless steel angle, brackets andscrews with plastic end capping as shown on the Employer’s Drawings. Thepanels systems shall be cantilevered from wall brackets above floor level.With the exception of support legs, no part of the panel system shall touch theground.

(e) Panels between shall be fixed to satin stainless steel U-channel bracket by

stainless steel screw with plastic end capping. The channel shall be semi-recessed and securely fixed to the supporting steel post embedded in the rearwall.

(f) Edges of pilaster shall be fixed to wall with stainless steel U-channel bracketsor channels recessed into the side walls.

(g) Base of pilaster shall be screw fixed to stainless steel adjustable legsconnected to the ground pug.

(h) Proprietary labelling on the toilet cubicle partition system indicating the brandname of the system shall not be permitted.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 151/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

33.5.9 Toilet Cubicle Ironmongery and Hardware

(a) All partition ironmongery, hardware and accessories shall be die-castaluminium finished with polyester powder coating, resistant to breakage,moisture, chemical and organic solvents, durable and easy maintenance.

(b) Door hinges shall be fixed by stainless steel screws with plastic end capping.Hinges shall provide noise free operation after installation.

(c) Door locking devices shall have emergency release mechanism.Doorstop/coat hook shall be fixed to the back of the door.

(d) Accessories to the toilet cubicle system shall include but not limited to;

(i) Door locking lever with red/white indicator;

(ii) Door handle set;

(iii) Aluminium top rail with polyester powder coating.

33.6 SUBMISSIONS

33.6.1 Particu lars of Linings Sheathings, Drywall Partit ions and Toilet Cubicles

The Contractor shall submit the following particulars to the Project Manager forreview without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings detailing setting out dimensions, wall thicknesses,composition and detail of joints and interfaces with other elements;

(b) details of the source, type and properties of materials;

(c) proprietary system details at junctions;

(d) fire stopping material; and

(e) details of toilet cubicle.

33.6.2 Samples

The Contractor shall submit the following samples of proposed materials to the

Project Manager for review without objection together with the particulars referredabove:

(a) 2 no. samples of all fixings and support frames materials;

(b) 2 no. 600 mm x 600 mm sample of each finished lining, sheathing partition ordrywall condition;

(c) 2 no. samples of all fire stopping materials and cavity sound absorption;

(d) 2 no. samples of 300 mm long piece of each type of trims and beads;

(e) 2 no. samples of the solid core toilet partition/door panelling;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 152/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

(f) corner section sample of toilet cubicle door;

(g) toilet cubicle floor / ceiling anchors;

(h) 2 no. accessories for toilet cubicles including combined towel and waste bin,door stop and coat hook, toilet paper holder, and toilet seat cover dispenser

unit.

33.6.3 Benchmarks

(a) Where applicable, the Contractor shall construct a benchmark at the locationdirected by the Project Manager consisting of a 6 metre length of drywall andlining system including internal and external corner returns. Particularattention shall be paid to the following items which shall be included in thebenchmark:

(i) seals at steelwork and floor slab;

(ii) plumbness of walls;

(iii) movement joints between steel and wall, and at wall elements on thebuilding expansion joint line; and

(iv) typical service penetrations and surrounds.

(b) Where applicable, the Contractor shall provide a benchmark in the form of thefirst completed staff toilet cubicle and door module in a location reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager. The installation shall be fullyoperational and shall include all fixings, fittings, ironmongery and seals.

 

(c) The Contractor shall undertake a complete cubicle and door installation at alocation directed by the Project Manager as benchmark. 

(d) After the Project Manager has reviewed these areas with no objection, thebenchmarks shall become the standard to which all subsequent toiletcubicles, drywall and lining system shall conform.

(e) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection forthe proposed benchmarks, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any toilet cubicles or drywall andlining system works.

33.7 WORKMANSHIP

33.7.1 Tolerances

(a) The dry wall and dry lining system shall achieve the visual requirements, suchthat within any planning grid area the allowable tolerances are equallydistributed and:

(i) the partitions are vertical; and

(ii) the dry wall and dry lining system shall have straight lines and flat

planes.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 153/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

(b) Tolerances for manufacture shall be as below:

(i) restrict deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimensions to ±1mm;

(ii) make the dry wall smooth and flat. The required flatness criterion is 1:

1,000; and

(iii) tolerance of board shall not exceed ±3 mm.

(c) Installation tolerances shall be as below:

(i) account for installation tolerance requirements such that repetitive unitsare accurately located, relative to grid lines;

(ii) erect the dry wall and lining systems in alignment and in relation toestablished lines and grades as shown on the Employer’s Drawings;

(iii) unless otherwise specified, restrict the maximum variation in planlocation of any part of the system to ±2.0 mm from dimensions shownon the Employer’s Drawings;

(iv) restrict the maximum variation in height of any part of the system fromgiven datum as shown on the Employer’s Drawings to ±2.0 mm;

(v) restrict the maximum offset in plan, level or section between any 2adjacent panels to ±1.0 mm;

(vi) make cut outs for interfacing works to the dimensions shown on theEmployer's Drawings to ±1 mm; and

(vii) maintain tolerances for setting out of doors and windows from referencepoints to ±10 mm.

(d) The Contractor shall show the dimensional and detailed provisions intendedto accommodate the construction tolerances of surrounding elements on theContractor's Drawings in order to ensure that all aspects of the dry wall andlining system relate satisfactorily to the Works as a whole.

 

33.7.2 Acoust ic Integrity of Partit ions

The Contractor shall:

(a) install the Works so that there is no noise leakage paths at element interfaces,for example at the head; foot and ends of dry wall and dry lining system andaround door frames and service penetrations;

(b) When directed by the Project Manager, perform site sound transmissions losstests in accordance with BS 2750, and provide a test report demonstratingthat the installed partition meets the performance required and an averagetransmission loss (arithmetic mean of the (16) ISO and 1/3 octave bands from100 Hz inclusive) of not less than Rw 45.

(c) stagger joints in successive layers of the dry wall and dry lining system and

finally tape and seal all joints in the top layer;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 154/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

(d) install cavity absorption within dry walls to the areas indicated on theEmployer's Drawings and the total uncompressed thickness shall equal to theoverall plan thickness of the partition;

(e) provide sound insulation in accordance with table below;

Table 33.1: Sound Insulation Performance

Partition Sound insulation

thickness (mm) Laboratory (Rw) Site (Rw)100 45 43

200 50 47

(f) achieve site sound insulation rating for the partition including all servicespenetrations and interfaces with other elements.

(g) make all interfaces between walls and other adjacent elements in such a way

that the sound insulation performance of walls is not degraded, and that thesound insulation requirements are met; and

(h) incorporate flexible airtight sealing using a non-hardening sealant or othersealant reviewed without objection by the Project Manager for all connectionsto adjacent elements.

33.7.3 Sealants

The Contractor shall:

(a) apply sealant in accordance with the supplier's/manufacturer's written

preparatory and application procedures and the Code of Practice prepared bythe United Kingdom Sealant Manufacturers' Confederation;

(b) seal all ceilings / wall joints of each plasterboard layer using a continuousbead of sealant;

(c) seal all perimeter channels to the structure using a continuous bead of sealantbefore fixing plasterboard;

(d) seal all top plasterboard layers to the perimeter structure using a continuousbead of sealant.

(e) remove excess silicone and leave all joints neat and clean;

(f) apply silicone evenly without bubbles to joints not less than 6mm x 6mm;

(g) use sealants which are compatible with the joint surfaces and to each other asstated in the manufacturer's published data or as certified by the manufacturerfor each application; and

(h) protect silicone joints during the curing process to avoid contamination by dustand other debris.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 155/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

33.7.4 Partition Support System

The Contractor shall:

(a) install the dry wall and lining systems with the proprietary support framingsystem in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations and

instruction;

(b) check framing for accurate spacing and alignment;

(c) verify that spacing of installed framing does not exceed the manufacturer’srecommendations;

(d) use maximum allowable framing members for the specified thickness ofplasterboard;

(e) repair protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, or unalignedmembers before installation of plasterboard; and

(f) allow inspection of the completed supporting framing system by the ProjectManager before installation of the drywall lining. Deficiencies shall becorrected and surfaces to receive plasterboard shall be reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager before proceeding with lining boardinstallation.

33.7.5 Corrosion Protection of Steel Supports

The Contractor shall:

(a) install components which shall be resistant to any corrosion or any deleterious

effects caused by manufacturing, finishing, transportation, storage andinstallation, paying particular attention to surface damage caused by bolting orsecuring components;

(b) repair the corrosion protection system where it is damaged by Site cutting ofcomponents. Particular attention shall be paid to boundary conditions;

(c) coat all surfaces to a minimum of 80 microns with surface preparation asfollows:

(i) surface preparation shall remove all rust, scale and surfacecontamination to leave a surface equivalent in cleanliness to SA 2.5

quality of Swedish standard SIS 05-59-00; and

(ii) surface preparation shall be achieved by acid pickling, except for caseswhere the presence of paint, oil, grease, welding slag etc. render thisineffective.

33.7.6 Fixing of Linings and Drywall Systems

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide bolts, screws, nuts and anchors manufactured by the samemanufacturer as the dry wall and lining system;

(b) take account of the bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilar metals wheninstall the dry wall and dry lining system. Refer to publication PD 6484'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 156/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/12 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 33 – Linings, Sheathings, Drywall Partitions& Toilet Cubicles

(c) use fixings within the framing components which are not visible, unlessindicated on the Employer's Drawings; and

(d) isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces.

33.7.7 Workmanship for Toilet Partit ions

The contractor shall:

(a) check areas for toilet partitions before installing compartments/doors, forcorrect dimensions, plumbness of walls and soundness of surfaces that wouldaffect installation of mounting brackets;

(b) verify spacing of sanitary appliances/fittings to assure compatibility withinstallation of compartments;

(c) not install compartments until conditions are satisfactory;

(d) install compartments rigidly, straight, plumb and level in accordance with themanufacturer's installation instructions;

(e) adopt installation methods in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations for backing and proper support;

(f) not allow drilling, cutting and fitting to room finish side to be visible;

(g) maintain uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors.

(h) install top edges of doors and panels flush; doors shall be installed with anominal 150 mm floor clearance;

(i) adjust hardware for proper operation after installation.

(j) clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware and fittings after installation.

33.8 INSPECTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

33.8.1 Acoust ic Tests

When directed by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall perform Site soundtransmissions loss tests in accordance with BS 2750, and provide a test report

demonstrating that the installed lining, sheathing folding / sliding and drywallpartition system comply with the acoustic performance requirements specified insection 33.7.2 of this Specification and any further requirements of the ParticularTechnical Specification.

33.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

33.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual for toiletcubicles including, but not limited to, particulars of materials manufacturers, typical

details, procedures for changing typical components and recommendations forcleaning and maintenance.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 157/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

SECTION 34 SUSPENDED CEILINGS

34.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of the suspendedceilings which generally comprise:

(a) suspended ceiling systems these include but not limited to solid metal panels(steel or aluminum), perforated metal, mineral fibre or glass wool, metal opengrid or suspended plasterboard ;

(b) associated accessories and fittings; and

(c) smoke curtains associated with ceilings.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(d) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(e) carpentry and joinery refer to section 31;

(f) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(g) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(h) architectural metalworks refer to section 35;

(i) ironmongery refer to section 36;

(j) mechanical services refer to section 61-79; and

(k) electrical services refer to section 46-60.

34.2 NOT USED

34.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structuresBS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel

articles

BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip

BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip

BS 1474 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes: bars, extruded round tubes andsections

BS 1615 Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium

and its alloys

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 158/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

BS 2750 Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of buildingelements

BS 3745 Method for the evaluation of results of accelerated corrosiontests on metallic coatings

BS 3900 Methods of tests for paintsBS 5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese

steels

BS 5411 Method of test for metallic and related coatings

BS 5427 Code of practice for performance and loading criteria for profiledsheeting in building

BS 5466 Methods for corrosion testing of metallic coatings

BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steelstructures against corrosion

BS 5821 Methods for rating the sound insulation in buildings and ofbuilding elements

BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building

BS 6161 Methods of test for anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium andits alloys

BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformedsections for external architectural purposes, and for the finish onaluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sections coatedwith powder organic coatings

BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections andpreformed steel sheet for windows and associated externalarchitectural purposes, and for the finish on galvanized steelsections and preformed sheet coated with powder organiccoatings.

BS 8200 Code of practice for design of non-load bearing external verticalenclosures of buildings

BS 8290: Part1

Code of practice for suspended ceilings and linings of anyconstruction using metal fixing systems

BS EN485 Aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet, strip and plateBS EN 20354 Method of measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation

room

PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and itsalleviation

Property Services Agency (PSA): "Suspended Ceilings" UK(Standard). Suspended Ceilings Association (SCA): "GoodPractice" UK (Standard).

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 159/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

34.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

34.4.1 Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) handle, store and fix suspended ceiling materials in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations and Guide No.1 'Good Practice for theInstallation of Suspended Ceilings' published by the British Suspended Ceiling Association, ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements ofthis Specification; and

(b) design movement joints junctions and details that are shown as design intent onthe Employer's Drawings. The Suspended Ceilings shall accommodate allmovement in a manner, which does not compromise the panel integrity orappearance.

34.4.2 Ceiling Panel Geometry

The Contractor shall:

(a) develop the design of the ceiling system on a modular basis;

(b) restrict the planning grids and vertical datums within the building whendesigning the ceiling system; and

(c) follow the planning grids and datums as shown on the Employer's Drawings.

34.4.3 Access Requirements

Each ceiling panel shall be readily demountable allowing access to concealedservices. When repositioned the ceiling panels shall give no sign of visiblemisalignment or damage.

34.4.4 External Condit ions

 All exposed ceilings in external conditions shall have extra strength and corrosionresistance finish properties.

34.4.5 Suppor t Performance Criteria

The Contractor shall provide support framework and ceiling panels capable ofresisting the following conditions without permanent deformation, corrosion,discolouration, abrasion, cracking or any other change in surface appearance:

(a) extreme temperatures and thermal movement;

(b) pollution, particularly from traffic below;

(c) humidity;

(d) wind loads (see 'The Design Loads and Movements Report');

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 160/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(e) cleaning and maintenance;

(f) traffic throwing stones; and

(g) solar gain on surface.

34.4.6 Structural and Movement Considerations

The Contractor shall:

(a) submit structural calculations for review without objection by the ProjectManager;

(b) refer to the appropriate structural reports provided by the Project Manager whencalculating loads and movements;

(c) design all necessary expansion and movement joints to accommodate the

maximum movements that are derived from the specified design loads andmovements. Under maximum movements the joints shall meet all theperformance requirements of the Specification;

(d) provide all components and systems to withstand all static and dynamic designloads specified in the Specification, without causing permanent deformation ofcomponents or the failure of members or seals, and transmit such loads safelyto the points of support;

(e) provide systems which do not deflect under loading in any way that isdetrimental to any element of the Permanent Works or adjacent structural orbuilding elements;

(f) design and install all components, couplings in such a manner capable ofaccommodating all deflection and specified tolerance without distortion,deformation, or failure; refer to the Concrete Movements Report for fixings;

(g) design the deflection of the systems in compliance with BS 8200, 1985 Section2 Table 1 - Storey Height Assemblies;

(h) design the systems to withstand all vibrations caused by traffic, trains, aircraft,helicopters, wind loads and effects or any other such shocks, strains, stressesand movements including operation of smoke and other mechanical ventilationthat may be imposed by the users without causing fracture or deterioration of

any element, particularly to any moveable or openable element of the internalsystems; include suitable devices for absorbing or damping any such vibration;and

(i) design the systems to prevent the transmission of drumming noise as a result ofvibration, shocks, stress, etc., by the use of sound deadening material in allareas.

34.4.7 Air Flow Criteria

(a) The ceiling panels shall allow air flow to both sides of the suspended ceilings.

(b) The internal suspended ceilings shall be capable of withstanding a nominalwind loading of 0.25 kPa with a maximum deflection of span/400.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 161/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(c) The external suspended ceilings shall be capable of withstanding a nominalwind loading of 3.00 kPa with a maximum deflection of span/400.

34.4.8 Co-ordination with Mechanical Services

The Contractor shall confirm to the Project Manager that the design of thesuspended ceiling system, including linear air grilles and the overall generalarrangement is co-ordinated with the requirements of the mechanical servicesworks. (refer to section 68.6)

34.4.9 Acoust ic Performance Requirements

The Contractor shall:

(a) line each panel, where specified as sound absorptive, with a sound absorbentblanket encased in a flame-proof membrane and supported on wire gridspacers (except mineral fibre tiles);

(b) construct the ceiling system in compliance with the following sound absorptionrequirements:

The random incidence sound absorption coefficient of the typical ceiling panel,(measured in accordance with BS 3638:1987, measurements of soundabsorption in a reverberation room) provided by the installed suspended ceilingpanels as shown on the Employer's Drawings shall not be less than thefollowing:

Table 34.1: Minimum Ceiling Sound Absorption

Ceiling type Octave band centreFrequency (Hz)

125 250 500 1k 2k 4k

Mineral Fibre 0.35 0.50 0.65 0.80 0.90 0.85

Internal Metal 0.25 0.40 0.60 0.76 0.85 0.75

(c) provide suspended ceilings which do not "buzz", "ring" or make otherextraneous noise arising from fittings in the ceiling construction and caused byinternal vibration or other movements. Extraneous noise arising from localresponse of the ceiling, loose fit resonant elements and scope for friction andnoise shall be avoided by means of careful quality control in assembly andinstallation; and

(d) provide suspended ceilings which have completely acoustically sealed junctionswith interfacing elements where shown on the Employer's Drawings.

34.4.10 Smoke Curtains

(a) The Contractor shall supply and install Fire Services Department (FSD)approved proprietary smoke curtains for each of the locations shown on theEmployer's Drawings, and provide test certificates and calculations as requiredby the FSD. 

(b) The Works shall include but not be limited to:

(i) complete design and engineering of the smoke curtains/systems;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 162/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(ii) supply and installation of the smoke curtain assemblies;

(iii) supply and installation of all smoke curtain control panels and allassociated wiring to smoke curtains;

(iv) interface with control signals for activation of smoke curtain upon receiptof signal from the fire alarm and detection system;

(v) provision of all anchors, attachments, angles, steel section and the likerequired for fixing and support of the installations;

(vi) provision of all electrically operated motor and drive assemblies;

(vii) provision of extruded aluminium housings;

(viii) provision of emergency back-up power supplies for all smoke curtains;and

(ix) the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals from therelevant authorities.

(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for the structural stability of all smokecurtain components.

(d) The complete installation shall comply with the requirements of BS 7346 Parts1-5 1990. Certification for all relevant aspects of BS 7346 and FSDrequirements shall be provided.

34.5 MATERIALS

34.5.1 Mild Steel

The Contractor shall fabricate and design all mild steel work in accordance withsection 30 (Internal Cladding Systems), section 35 (Architectural Metalwork) and therequirements of BS 5950: Part 1, unless otherwise specified.

34.5.2 Aluminium

The Contractor shall:

(a) fabricate all aluminium framing members in compliance with BS 1474;

(b) use aluminium sheeting with a minimum of 3 mm thick in compliance with BSEN 485;

(c) use only appropriate grades, strengths, and thicknesses of aluminium to meetall structural and finishing requirements. The wall thicknesses of aluminiumextrusions shall be sufficient for the rigidity in the lengths required in the finalinstallation;

(d) manufacture all aluminium fixing brackets and cleats from the appropriate gradeof alloy in compliance with BS 1474. If visible, they shall be finished to match

the metal panels and framing members;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 163/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(e) protect all exposed aluminium with low tack adhesive film, which shall beremoved and disposed of by the Contractor prior to applying for a CompletionCertificate for the Works;

(f) where aluminium is used in the suspended ceilings and the final finish is

dependent upon the base metal, provide it from a single batch to ensureidentical chemical composition;

(g) if the quantity involved for the whole of the suspended ceilings is in excess ofthat can be obtained in a single batch, inform and agree with the ProjectManager options for the grouping of elements and components from each batchprior to delivery of aluminium; and

(h) select all aluminium alloys to ensure that the finished visual appearance of allcomponents is uniform. The alloys shall be 6063 for extrusions and J57S forsheets. The Contractor shall submit a chemical specification for the alloyproposed.

34.5.3 Support Systems

The Contractor shall:

(a) conceal the support system for the suspended ceilings with a manufacturer'srecommended system, with appropriate fixings to the substrate soffit ensuringcompliance with the requirements of the Specification;

(b) undertake the detailed design of all fixing details shown indicatively on theEmployer’s Drawings;

(c) take account of the fixing zones indicated on the Employer's Drawings whendesigning the system;

(d) use a modular system of components for the support structure to standardizethe relationship and detail between panels, panels and panel sub-frames, panelsub-frames and their support posts or supporting walls;

(e) prevent chemical or electrolytic action from taking place where dissimilar metalsand/or materials are used together. Refer to publication PD 6484 'Commentaryon corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'. This is of particularimportance where stainless steel, aluminium, and aluminium alloys are used;provide the necessary insulation wherever dissimilar metals occur at interfaces

with the Works that precede metal, mineral fibre and glass wool ceilings;

(f) hot-dip galvanize all inaccessible steel in accordance with BS 729;

(g) finish all alloys similarly to the samples, previously reviewed without objectionby the Project Manager, which are obtained from the identified source andcomply with the requirements of the relevant British Standards;

(h) provide a chemical specification for the alloy proposed to the Project Managerfor review without objection; and

(i) isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 164/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

34.5.4 Metal Panel Construction

The Contractor shall:

(a) select the thickness of metal panel and its backing material having due regardto the performance requirements of this Specification, the location within thebuilding, type of ceiling and effect of any perforation on the panel;

(b) arrange the ceiling panels geometrically as shown on the Employer's Drawings;

(c) construct metal pan type panel consisting sheet metal brake, pressed, folded atall four edges with a return of 25 mm minimum on the folding edge and a radiusnot less than 1.5 mm, nor greater than 3 mm. All edges shall be welded andground smooth, prior to finishing as specified to form a shallow tray;

(d) fabricate steel panels from CR4 mild steel in compliance with BS 1449;

(e) seal the joints between ceiling panels with a serrated compressible neoprenestrip;

(f) ensure that the neoprene strip, after installation, is straight and recessed anominal 3 mm from the face of the ceiling panel;

(g) provide the panels with various cut outs, upturned edges at interfaces withbuilding services installations, as illustrated on the Employer's Drawings or asagreed on Site with the Project Manager;

(h) apply corrosion protection to the panels after fabrication and prior to applicationof finishes;

(i) carry out cutting and drilling of ceiling panels and associated members beforethe application of painted finishes. Site cutting or drilling shall not be permittedexcept where specified on the Employer's Drawings or expressly permitted bythe Project Manager;

(j) finish exposed faces of metal in such a way that no exposed cut ends are leftunfinished; and

(k) polyester powder coat all metal panels, brackets, channels and other elementsused in the construction of the internal ceiling system that are visible eitherwholly or in part in accordance with BS 6497.

34.5.5 Mineral Fibre or Glass Wool Panel Construction

The Contractor shall:

(a) geometrically arrange the ceiling panels as shown on the Employer's Drawings;

(b) carry out all cutting and drilling of ceiling panels and associated membersbefore the application of painted finishes. Site cutting or drilling shall not bepermitted except where specified on the Employer's Drawings or expresslypermitted by the Project Manager;

(c) provide the mineral fibre or glass wool panels with bevelled edges not morethan 2.5 mm (measured on plan); and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 165/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(d) powder coat all brackets, channels and other elements used in the constructionof the internal ceiling system that are visible either wholly or in part inaccordance with BS 6497.

34.5.6 Linear Air Grilles

(a) Where linear air grilles are specified for supplying air as part of the mechanicalservices air conditioning system, the Contractor shall ensure that theperformance requirements of the mechanical services are unaffected by thegeneral arrangement of the proposed suspended ceiling system or by otherindividual components.

(b) Items subject to review without objection by the Project Manager shall includebut not limited to:

(i) make and model of linear air grille;

(ii) aerodynamic and acoustic performance under all mechanical servicesdesign conditions;

(iii) connection details and clearances for ductwork;

(iv) access provision for balancing facilities and fire dampers associated withmechanical services; and

(v) general installation arrangement to suit mechanical servicesperformance.

34.5.7 Smoke Curtains

(a) The control system of smoke curtains shall be 'fail-to-safety' such that in theevent of power failure, cabling, wiring or electrical system failure, the smokecurtains shall fall by gravity to their operational position, in a controlled fashion.

(b) The system shall be capable of operating in the following modes:

(i) powered descent;

(ii) powered ascent; and

(iii) gravity descent/controlled rate of fall (fail-to-safety mode)

(c) Operating speeds shall be Site adjustable between 70 mm per second and 100mm per second, to synchronize curtain descent.

(d) Powered ascent mode shall be activated manually at the smoke curtains controlpanel, by means of hold-on and timer switches, in addition to an automatic resetfacility linked to the fire alarm system.

(e) Smoke curtain assemblies shall include but not be limited to the following majorcomponents;

(i) in-line steel rollers;

(ii) curtain fabric and bottom bar;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 166/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(iii) tubular geared motor with internal limit switches; and

(iv) extruded aluminium housing with linear ceiling slot.

(f) Controls and all matters relating to the installation shall follow the smoke

extraction principles and FSD requirements.

(g) The manufacturer of the proprietary smoke curtains shall be a firm of assessedcapability according to BS 5750 Part 1 for the design, manufacture, installationand commission of automatic smoke blinds / curtains as per BS 7346 Part 31990.

(h) The manufacturer shall provide evidence of compliance with BS 7346 Part 31990 with certification from a recognized test laboratory.

(i) Curtain fabrics shall comply with BS 7346 Parts 6 and 7, and have class 1surface spread of flame. Fabric shall have a 1 hour fire resistance period in

compliance with BS 476 Part 20 1987, and 30 minutes minimum integrity at1,000°C and over.

34.5.8 Polyester Powder Coating

(a) The Contractor shall ensure that where specified as a finish to metal panels andstructure, polyester powder coating shall comply with BS 6496 and BS 6497,and be applied on an automatic continuous paint line to a minimum thickness of80 µm and maximum thickness to match the hard coating process.

(b) Colours shall be as shown on the Employer's Drawings. One applicationcompany and one polyester powder coating supplier shall be used for the

suspended ceilings.

34.5.9 Aluminium Anodizing

The Contractor shall:

(a) carry out aluminium anodising in accordance with sections 30 (Internal CladdingSystems) and 35 (Architectural Metalwork); .

(b) ensure that aluminium anodising complies with BS 1615 unless specifiedotherwise; and

(c) provide a written certificate to confirm that anodising has been carried out asspecified.

34.5.10 PVF2 Polyv inylidene Fluor ide Coatings

The Contractor shall ensure that all PVF2 coatings achieve colour uniformity andcomply with the following:

(a) Specular gloss value: 20-30 plus or minus 5 reflectivity at 60 degrees accordingto ASTM D 523-67;

(b) Dry film hardness: Pencil hardness - F minimum in accordance with AAMA605.7.7.3;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 167/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(c) Film adhesion: The finish shall achieve excellent 'Knife' adhesion;

(d) Impact resistance: No removal using a Gardener Variable Impact Tester inaccordance with AAMA 605.7.7.5;

(e) Abrasion resistance: Falling sand test method, ASTM D 968-51 (1972);

(f) Muriatic acid resistance: Using the Muriatic Acid spot test, the finish shall showno signs of attack after 15 minutes in accordance with AAMA 605.7.7.7;

(g) Resistance to acid: Not more than 5E Units (NBS);

(h) Pollutants: Colour change calculated in accordance with ASTM D 2244-68;

(i) Detergent resistance: No loss of adhesion of film to metal, and no visiblechange in appearance when examined by unaided eye. No signs of attack after72 hours in accordance with AAMA 605.7.7.4;

(j) Humidity resistance: Less than 8 blisters after 3,000 hours at 100°F and 100%RH with cabinet operated in accordance with ASTM D 2247-68;

(k) Salt spray resistance: 3,000 hours according to ASTM B 117-73 using a 5% saltsolution;

(l) Colour retention: Maximum of 5E Units (NBS) colour change as calculated inaccordance with ASTM D 2244-68, after 5 years of 45° North exposure;

(m) Sealant comparability: No deleterious effects to the coating in accordance with AAMA 605.7.10;

(n) Alkali resistance (Mortar Pat): The finish shall show no signs of attack after 24hours in accordance with AAMA 605.7.7.2; and

(o) Erosion: The finish shall not suffer loss greater than 20% after 5 years at 45°North exposure in accordance with AAMA 605.7.9.1.5.

34.6 SUBMISSIONS

34.6.1 Particu lars of Suspended Ceilings

The following particulars of the proposed ceiling systems shall be submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing the fabrication details;

(b) Contractor’s Drawings showing the dimensional and detailed provisionsintended to accommodate the construction tolerances of surrounding elementsto ensure that all aspects of the suspended ceilings relate satisfactorily to theWorks as a whole; and

(c) details of the source, type and properties of materials.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 168/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

34.6.2 Samples

The Contractor shall submit samples with relevant trade literature and specificationsto the Project Manager for review without objection in accordance with theSpecification, including but not limited to the following:

(a) 300 mm x 300 mm Polyester powder coatings as specified to ceiling panels;

(b) minimum 600 mm length of ceiling system aluminium extrusions and supportsystem framework;

(c) samples of each type of ceiling panel, louvres and grilles;

(d) all fixings; and

(e) all insulation materials in final sizes.

34.6.3 Prototypes

(a) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and/or clear away full size prototypes ofeach ceiling panel system.

(b) The arrangement for prototypes shall be as shown on the Employer’s Drawingsincluding all visible components of the various constructions, the non-visiblesupport systems and fixings.

(c) The prototypes shall utilize the specified materials and finishes but notnecessarily the final production techniques.

(d) The prototypes shall be tested and examined by the Project Manager in termsof quality, materials, interfacing details for accessibility by other trades andworkmanship.

(e) All ceiling prototypes shall be mounted in such a manner to facilitate viewingfrom the same height and angle when standing on the appropriate floor level.

(f) The Contractor shall ensure that the Project Manager  witnesses the installationand dismantling of the prototypes and records any variations to the agreeddetails on a set of Contractor Drawings.

34.6.4 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall, following receipt of no objection from the Project Managerof relevant samples and prior to commencement of suspended ceiling system,construct and establish one complete section of each type of suspended ceilingsystem in a location previously agreed with the Project Manager asbenchmarks. Upon a notice of no objection the benchmarks shall become theagreed standard to which all subsequent suspended ceiling system shallconform.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any suspended ceiling systemworks.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 169/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

34.7 WORKMANSHIP

34.7.1 Tolerances Generally

The Contractor shall ensure that at the time of handover the visual requirements ofthe suspended ceilings are such that within any planning grid section the allowabletolerances are equally distributed:

(a) the joints are of equal size and at equal centers;

(b) the suspended ceilings have straight lines and flat planes; and

(c) the joints are of equal size and in line between adjacent panels.

34.7.2 Tolerances for Manufacture

(a) Deviations in panel length, width and diagonal dimensions shall be restricted to

±1 mm.

(b) Ceiling panels shall appear smooth and flat in accordance with the benchmarkpreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. The requiredflatness criterion shall be 1:1,000.

34.7.3 Installation Tolerances

(a) The Contractor shall erect the suspended ceilings in proper alignment in relationto established lines and grades as shown on the Employer’s Drawings; submitsufficient analysis of the erection sequence and the overall method statement tothe Project Manager to demonstrate that the installation tolerances stated below

are met.

(b) Joints between panels: The actual width of any joint shall not deviate from thenominal width by more than ±1 mm or 10% of normal width whichever is thelesser. Any variation shall be equally distributed with no sudden changes orsteps. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 2 mm.

(c) The maximum variation in plan location from given datum, of any part of theceiling, shall be less than 1:1,000 over any length subject to a maximum of ±1.5mm.

(d) The maximum variation on level shall be 1:400 over any length for any

component subject to a maximum of ±4 mm.

(e) The maximum offset in plan level or section between any two adjacent panelsshall be ±0.5 mm.

(f) Cut outs for interfacing works shall be the dimensions shown on the Employer’sDrawings ±1 mm.

(g) The grid creep across the system shall not exceed ±1.5 mm in any total length.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 170/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

34.7.4 Workmanship Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) adequately protect suspended ceilings from damage and dirt; handle membranematerials carefully and kept clean if subsequently removed for access toservices for inspection or for remedial work;

(b) fix securely with additional bracing and stiffening as necessary to give a rigidsystem resistant to the specified wind uplift; and

(c) ensure that light fittings, grilles, fire barriers, etc. are in the correct positionsrelative to ceiling grid with common setting out points before starting the ceilingworks.

34.7.5 Fixing of the Ceiling System

The Contractor shall:

(a) select fixings in compliance with the performance requirements of theSpecification;

(b) use bolts, screws, nuts and anchors with adequate strength for their designedpurpose;

(c) supply all necessary and appropriate fasteners and fixings for the suspendedceilings, associated flashings and closures;

(d) use fixings which conform to all relevant requirements in respect of strength and

type;

(e) use fixings within the aluminium framing components which are not visibleunless indicated on the Employer's Drawings;

(f) restrict visible fixings to the assembly of the aluminium elements to the supportsteelwork using a proprietary system; and

(g) allow no exposed fixings unless reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

34.7.6 Service Requirements

The Contractor shall:

(a) co-ordinate the spacing of the elements comprising the support framework tothe ceilings;

(b) accommodate all service requirements, i.e.: lights, detectors, sprinklers, PAspeakers, ventilation grilles and diffusers, etc.; and

(c) bond all extraneous conductive parts of the suspended ceilings to earth inaccordance with the electrical section 57.3.4 Equipotential Bonding Conductor.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 171/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 15/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

34.7.7 Smoke Curtains Workmanship and Finishing

(a) The underside of the bottom bar shall match the surrounding ceiling system andin its retracted position shall be flush with the underside of the ceiling slot.

(b) Where smoke curtains abut at an angle, each housing shall be mitred or joinedto provide a continuous sealed housing.

(c) Where smoke curtains abut walls or columns, the maximum edge gap shall be20 mm;

(d) The maximum distance between smoke curtain edges shall be 25 mm.

(e) Curtains shall descend to 2 m above finished floor level below, except wherespecified otherwise on the Employer’s Drawings.

(f) Adjacent bottom bars shall be joined to provide a continuous element.

(g) Unless specified otherwise on the Employer's Drawings, all fixings for thesmoke curtain shall be concealed.

34.7.8 Colour

(a) The Contractor shall finish to the colour as specified. Exact shade shall bedetermined by colour match samples.

(b) The paint finish on the panels shall have a minimum light reflectance of 80%when measured in the visible light spectrum 440-700 nm in accordance with BS3900:D5. Assuming, for example, a perforated area of 22% of the total area, the

completed panel shall have a minimum light reflectance of 64%.

34.7.9 Fire Rating/Fire Separation- Surface Spread of Flame

The Contractor shall ensure that the surface spread of flame for all suspendedceilings is Class 0 in accordance with BS 476: Parts 6 and 7.

34.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

34.8.1 Testing Generally

The Contactor shall carry out the following test for all ceiling panels:

(a) Durability Tests:

(i) Corrosion resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 5466: Part 3,for a period of 8 hours with results evaluated in accordance with BS3745. The rating shall be a minimum of 8;

(ii) Light resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 6161: Part 7. Therating shall be a minimum of 9;

(iii) Ultra-violet resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 6161: Part8;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 172/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 16/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(iv) Heat resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 1615: Clause 9.3;and

(v) Abrasive resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 6161: Parts 9and 10.

(b) Impact Tests:

(i) The panel surfaces shall be tested to verify that they can resist impactsgenerated from maintenance access without any noticeable change tothe surface appearance as defined in BS 8200 Category B and BS 3900Parts E1-12: 1970 and BS 8200 Section 2 Part 7 and Appendix G fortesting methods.

(ii) The panels, subject to the above impact tests, shall have no visibleindentation marks, damage, and deterioration to the performance or riskof hazard to occupants.

34.8.2 Testing of PVF2 Coatings

(a) Test sections shall consist of finished panels or extrusions representative ofproduct-coated aluminium. Test specimens shall be at least 150 mm long and75 mm wide with flat-coated surface on which to conduct instrumentmeasurements. The coating applicator shall submit drawings or otherinformation on test specimens to indicate exposed surfaces.

(b) Tests shall be performed on exposed areas as indicated and shall meet therequirement of AAMA 605.2.

(c) Test reports shall be maintained and shall include:

(i) date when tests were performed and date of issue of report;

(ii) identification of organic coating and/or coating system tested;

(iii) statement indicating that organic coating and/or coating system testedpassed all tests or failed one or more;

(iv) in case of failure, which test(s) and description of failure(s);

(v) statement that all tests were conducted in accordance with this

Specification;

(vi) name and address of laboratory that conducted tests and issued reports.

34.8.3 Acoust ic Tests

(a) Samples of each suspended ceiling system shall be tested to verify fulfillment ofthe acoustic performance requirements specified in section 34.4.9. The samplesshall represent the materials used in the system and include at least onehorizontal joint.

(b) The acoustic tests shall commence at times agreed with the Project Manager

with results being submitted in writing to the Project Manager within threeweeks of completion of the tests.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 173/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 17/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(c) The specified acoustic ratings shall be calculated in accordance with BS 5821:Part 1:1984 and test measurements of sound reduction index in accordancewith BS 2750: Part 3: 1980.

(d) Tests shall be obtained at an independent acoustic laboratory, whosequalifications and abilities have been previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager and shall represent section of the ceiling system.

(e) acoustic ratings and measurements shall be obtained in accordance with ISO orDIN or other recognized standards equivalent to British Standards and submitfor reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

34.8.4 Tests for Finishes to Aluminium

(a) The Contractor shall test finishes to aluminium to meet the requirements of AAMA 605.2-1980 and sections 30 (Internal Cladding Systems) and 35(Architectural Metalwork).

(b) Test specimens shall be at least 150 mm long and 75 mm wide with flat-coatedsurface on which to conduct instrument measurements.

(c) The Contractor shall label the test specimens to indicate exposed surfaces.

34.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

34.9.1 Durability

 All components shall have a predicted service life of not less than 12 years.

34.9.2 Demountability

(a) The Contractor shall ensure that elements of the suspended ceilings areinterchangeable and removable for purposes including maintenance.

(b) All ceiling panels and support systems shall be demountable within thesupporting framework with hinges for access to the services void above.

(c) Secondary components shall be capable of easy replacement withoutcompromising the structural or visual integrity of the suspended ceilings.Components shall be capable of replacement without progressive dismantling of

the suspended ceilings.

34.9.3 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Details of all ceiling systems used;

(b) Drawings showing the extent of each type of ceiling system;

(c) Particulars of materials manufacturers;

(d) Means of safe access for cleaning;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 174/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 18/18 January 2011Issue No.5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 34 – Suspended Ceilings 

(e) Procedures for changing panels and other typical components; and

(f) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

34.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

The Contractor shall allow for the provision of 20 no. or 2%, whichever is thegreater, of the total quantity of each ceiling type as spares. The Contractor shallprovide the Project Manager with his recommendations in respect of storage of thespares.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 175/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

SECTION 35 ARCHITECTURAL METALWORK (INCLUDING METAL DOORS ANDSHUTTERS)

35.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of architecturalmetalwork which generally comprises :

(a) project specific metalwork including but not limited to column guards grillesand trench covers and support brackets for signage and monitors;

(b) roller fire shutters and security shutters;

(c) hand railing including fire escape stair balustrades, demountable safety rails,fixed wall mounted handrails, and open safety rails;

(d) ladders;

(e) stairs; and

(f) raised flooring

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(g) fencing refer to section 5; 

(h) pedestrian guardrailing refer to section 11; 

(i) materials for grout refer to section 16; 

(j) steelwork, including protective treatment, refer to section 22;

(k) vehicular parapets refer to section 20;

(l) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(m) carpentry and joinery refer to section 31;

(n) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(o) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(p) suspended ceilings refer to section 34;

(q) ironmongery refer to section 36; and

(r) painting and decorating refer to section 40.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 176/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.2 NOT USED

35.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structuresBS 639 Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese

steel electrodes for manual metal-arc welding

BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanised coatings on iron andsteel articles

BS 1224 Specification for electroplated coatings of nickel andchromium

BS 1245 Specification for metal door frames (steel)

BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip

BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloysfor general engineering purposes: plate, sheet and strip

BS 1474 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloysfor general engineering purposes: bars, extruded roundtubes and sections

BS 1615 Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings onaluminium and its alloys

BS1706 Method for specifying electroplated coatings of zinc andcadmium on iron and steel

BS 1723 Brazing

BS 2750 Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and ofbuilding elements

BS 2870/4/5 Copper and copper alloys

BS 2926 Specification for chromium and chromium nickel steelelectrodes for manual metal-arc welding

BS 3500 Methods for creep and rupture testing of metals.

BS 3692 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, nutsand screws. Metric units.

BS 3745 Method for the evaluation of results of acceleratedcorrosion tests on metallic coatings

BS 3900 Methods of tests for paints

BS 3987 Anodic coatings

BS 4255 Rubber used in preformed gaskets for weather exclusionfrom buildings

BS 4479 Design of articles that are to be coated

BS 5000 Rotating electrical machines of particular types or forparticular applications

BS 5135 Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbonmanganese steels

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 177/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

BS 5277 Doors. Measurement of defects of general flatness ofdoor leaves

BS 5278 Doors. Measurement of dimensions and of defects ofsquareness of door leaves

BS 5427 Code of practice for performance and loading criteria forprofiled sheeting in building

BS 5466 Methods for corrosion testing of metallic coatings

BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steelstructures against corrosion

BS 5588: Parts 1-10 Fire precautions (Code of practice for various buildings)

BS 5821 Methods for rating the sound insulation in buildings and ofbuilding elements

BS 5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings

BS 5950 Structural use of steelwork in building

BS 6100 Glossary of building and civil engineering terms

BS 6105 Specification for corrosion-resistant stainless steelfasteners

BS 6161 Methods of test for anodic oxidation coatings onaluminium and its alloys

BS 6206 Specification for impact performance requirements for flatsafety glass and safety plastics for use in buildings

BS 6459: Part 1 Specification for crank and rack and pinion overhead doorclosers

BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for applicationand stoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sectionsand preformed steel sheet for windows and associatedexternal architectural purposes, and for the finish ongalvanized steel sections and preformed sheet coatedwith powder organic coatings.

BS 6510 Specification for steel windows, sills, window boards anddoors

BS 7079 Preparation of steel substrate before application of paintsand related products

BS 7671 Regulations for Electrical InstallationsBS 8200 Code of practice for design of non-load bearing external

vertical enclosures of buildings

BS 8214 Code of practice for fire door assemblies with non metallicleaves

BS 8220:Part 1, 2 & 3 Security of buildings against crime

BS EN 485 Specification for aluminium and its alloys. Sheet strip andplate

BS EN 499 Welding consumables

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 178/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 179/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 180/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(c) Weld metal deposited by an automatic or semi-automatic process shall hasmechanical properties not less than the minima specified for the weld metaldeposited by electrodes complying with BS 639.

(d) Electrodes for metal arc welding shall be classified, coded and marked inaccordance with BS 639. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall

comply with BS 2926.

(e) All visible stainless steel shall be satin 240 grit finished. The finish shall beestablished on the basis of reference samples previously submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection.

(f) Stainless steel for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall begrade 316 S 31 complying with BS 970:Part 1. Stainless steel tubes shall belongitudinally welded tubes complying with BS 6323:Part 8, designationLW 23 GZF(S). Tubes for handrails shall be polished.

35.5.3 Aluminium

The Contractor shall:

(a) fabricate all aluminium framing members in compliance with of BS 1474;

(b) use aluminium sheeting at least 3 mm thick and in compliance with BS 1470;

(c) use appropriate grades, strengths, and thicknesses of aluminium to complywith all structural and finishing requirements. The wall thicknesses ofaluminium extrusions shall be sufficient for their rigidity in the lengths requiredin the final installation;

(d) manufacture all aluminium fixing brackets and cleats from the appropriategrade of alloy in compliance with BS 1474. If visible, they shall be finished tomatch the metal panels and framing members;

(e) protect all exposed aluminium with low tack adhesive film which shall beremoved prior to applying for a Completion Certificate;

(f) use type H 30 TF aluminium for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooringcomplying with the following:

(i) Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineeringpurposes shall comply with the following;

- plate, sheet and strip : BS 1470

- drawn tube : BS 1471

- bars, extruded round tubes and sections : BS 1474

(ii) Aluminium shall be anodized to Grade AA 25 in accordance withBS 1615.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 181/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.5.4 Fixings

(a) The Contractor shall provide fixings in compliance with the Specification. Thefixings shall have the flexibility to be repositioned in the future.

(b) Bolts, screws, nuts and anchors shall be of adequate strength for their

designed purpose.

(c) The Contractor shall supply all necessary and appropriate fasteners andfixings for the support framework.

(d) Fixings shall comply with all statutory requirements in respect of strength andtype.

(e) The Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent bi-metallic corrosionbetween dissimilar metals. (Attention is drawn to publication PD 6484'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation').

(f) Fixings within the aluminium framing components shall not be visible unlessindicated on the Employer's Drawings.

(g) The Contractor shall restrict visible fixings of the assembly of aluminiumelements using round-headed bolts.

(h) Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall comply with the following:

(i) ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts : BS 4190

(ii) ISO metric black cup and countersunkheadbolts and screws with hexagon nuts : BS 4933

(iii) metal washers for general engineering purposes : BS 4320

(iv) rivets for general engineering purposes : BS 4620

(v) wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes -rivet, bolt andscrew stock : BS 1473

(vi) stainless steel fasteners : BS 6105

(i) The length of bolts shall be such that the threaded portion of each bolt projects

through the nut by at least one thread but not more than four threads.

(j) Rag, indented bolts, expansion bolts and resin bonded bolts shall be aproprietary type reviewed without objection by the Project Manager and shallbe capable of withstanding the design working load.

(k) Galvanized bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used withgalvanized handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring.

(l) Aluminium bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used withaluminium handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 182/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(m) Stainless steel bolts, nuts, screws, washers and rivets shall be used with othertypes of handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring.

(n) Bolts, nuts, screws and washers of ferrous materials including coated ferrousmaterials shall be insulated from aluminium by non-metallic washers andsleeves.

35.5.5 Cement Mortar

(a) Mortar for grouting fixing bolts shall consist of 1 part of cement to 3 parts ofsand together with the minimum amount of water necessary to achieve aconsistency suitable for completely filling the bolt holes. The mix shall containa non-shrink admixture.

(b) Resin grout shall be a proprietary type reviewed without objection by theProject Manager and shall contain a non-shrink admixture.

(c) Mortar for building in curbs for metal flooring shall consist of 1 part of cement

to 3 parts of sand together with the minimum amount of water necessary toachieve a consistency suitable for the work. The mix shall contain a non-shrinkadmixture.

35.5.6 Welding

The Contractor shall:

(a) thoroughly clean surfaces to be joined and fit accurately using clamps and jigswhere practicable; tack welds shall only be used for temporary attachment;

(b) make joints with parent and filler metal fully bonded throughout with no

inclusions, holes, porosity or cracks: prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces ofmaterials which are self-finished and visible in the completed work; remove alltraces of flux residue, slag and weld spatter;

(c) carry out metal arc welding in accordance with BS 5135. Other methods shallbe previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager;

(d) carry out brazing in accordance with BS 1723;

(e) make butt joints that are visible in the completed Permanent Work appearsmooth and flush with adjacent surfaces; executed neatly and ground smoothall visible fillet joints in completed work where specified;

(f) apply coatings only after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have beendrilled, unless otherwise specified; remove all paint, grease, flux, rust, burrsand sharp arises Before applying coating; and

(g) make good all defects which would be visible after application of coating andthe surface shall be finished smooth.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 183/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.5.7 Metal Doors and Louvres

The Contractor shall:

(a) design and construct the final thickness and construction of the metal doors/louvres and associated frames to comply with the requirements of the

Specification;

(b) use best quality pre-galvanized steel or stainless steel (of appropriatethickness as shown on the Employer’s Drawings, to both sides, internal steelchannel sub-frame and filled with an appropriate insulation material;

(c) use steel in compliance with BS 729 and BS EN 10143 for galvanized doorsand BS 1449: Part 2 for stainless steel doors, windows and louvres;

(d) leave no visible fixings in the door/window/louvre construction;

(e) make metal doors/windows/louvres and ironmongery easily removable for

replacement if damaged, without affecting adjacent works; and

(f) make duct access panels hinged or lift off.

35.5.8 Door sets

(a) The single or double metal doors includes doors, frames, ironmongery andany other fixing accessories shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’sfixing recommendations; and

(b) Doors shall be fitted with ironmongery which has been reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager as shown on the Employer's Door Schedule.

35.5.9 Metal Door Frames

The Contractor shall:

(a) use steel profile door frames complying with BS 1245: 1975 and the conditionsfor fire check flush metal doors specified in BS 459 Part 3: 1971;

(b) fix door stops within the structural steel supports;

(c) securely hold and seal door frames, and make the top of door align with thepanel sub-frame;

(d) provide frames to the profiles shown, fabricated from 1.6 mm zinc annealedsteel;

(e) reinforce the door frames at hinges, fixings, strikes, and door closer locations;

(f) provide all cut-outs required for the installation of the security items;

(g) provide suitable cut-outs in the frames for all mortise ironmongery; and insertmetal reinforcements for attaching all ironmongery hardware.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 184/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.5.10 Acoust ic Doors and Frames

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide sound-rated metal doors /louvres with sound rated frames; seal theframes into the partition opening without noise leakage around the frame;

(b) supply sound-rated metal doors/louvres complete with perimeter (includingthreshold) seals and ironmongery to ensure that the seals operate effectively.No light shall be visible on either side of the door set when viewed indarkness, with a light source on the other side; and

(c) supply sound-rated metal doors/windows/louvres which are free from openkey holes or other openings.

35.5.11 Door Sills and Thresholds

The Contractor shall fabricate sills and thresholds that are separated from the door

frame from stainless steel to the profiles shown on the Employer's Drawings.

35.5.12 Door Gaskets/ Seals

(a) The colour of gaskets shall be black.

(b) Gaskets shall not shrink or warp and shall not deteriorate.

(c) Gaskets shall be neoprene.

35.5.13 Silicone and Sealants

(a) The Contractor shall select silicone carefully after consultations withmanufacturers. Backing rods shall be closed cell type, and shall be compatiblewith the silicone used.

(b) The Contractor shall propose the type of silicone used, which shall be clearunless otherwise specified.

(c) Silicone shall not change in appearance throughout its life.

(d) Sealants and joint fillers shall be compatible with the joint surfaces and toeach other, as stated in the manufacturer's published data or as certified bythe manufacturer for each application.

(e) The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Project Managerthat the silicone joint can accommodate and is compatible with the buildingmovements.

(f) Sealants shall have the lowest modulus of elasticity that is consistent with thedegree of exposure to wear, abrasion and vandalism. Any sealant exposed totraffic shall have strength and modulus sufficient to resist damage by traffic,including indentation.

(g) Joint sealers shall be non-sag joint sealers and shall be resilient to mildew andfungi attack.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 185/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.5.14 Door Seals

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide smoke seals and test in accordance with BS 476 Part 31.1 to suit thefinal door and frame design;

(b) use compression type seals which do not distort after use; and

(c) permanently fix the seals to the frames at jambs, threshold and head of eachdoor strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations.

35.5.15 Roller Shutters Generally

(a) Roller shutter shall be stainless or galvanised steel with slats that interlockthrough their entire length to form a continuous hinge.

(b) The shutters shall be designed to withstand a wind load calculated in

accordance with the “Code of Practice on Wind Effects, Hong Kong” with aminimum pressure of 3 kPa on the entire surface area of the shutter, unlessotherwise specified.

(c) Electrically operated shutters shall comply with the “Code of Practice forInstallation of Electrically Operated Sliding Gates, Sliding Glass Doors andRolling Shutters” published by the HK Electrical and Mechanical ServicesDepartment. The shutters shall be installed with electrical motors, associatedoverload protection, drive mechanism, limit switches, emergency stop, controlbuttons and other control devices as required by the shutter manufacturer.The electrical installation of the shutter shall comply with BS 7671:Regulations for Electrical Installations and the General Specification for

Electrical Installations in Government Buildings of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region Architectural Services Department and Cod of Practicefor the Electricity (wiring) Regulations, Electrical and Mechanical ServicesDepartment.

(d) Shutters shall have a locking device. Malleable iron shoot bolts, previouslyreviewed without objection by the Project Manager, shall be provided andfitted to the bottom bar at each end of all shutters to assist holding the shutterunder high wind conditions.

(e) The horizontal steel barrel carrying the shutter curtain shall be of suitablediameter and strength to resist deflection, rust proofed and have adequate

counter balance springs to achieve the correct balance of the shutter in allpositions.

(f) The shutter and its barrel shall be supported on brackets with adequatebearings. The brackets shall be provided with suitable fixings for attaching tothe soffit, face or side of opening.

(g) The vertical channel guides shall be stainless steel with adequate size anddepth to hold the shutter curtain under high wind conditions. They shall beprovided with adequate fixings for attaching to the soffit, face, jamb or side ofopenings or at base and apex in the case of movable mullions.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 186/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(h) Hoods and casings shall be stainless steel with adequate gauge fullysupported and braced to prevent any sagging or distortion. Access doors orplates shall be provided at the appropriate places to enable routine inspectionand servicing to be carried out.

(i) Screws, bolts and fixing lugs shall be supplied as necessary for the

assembling and fixing of the steel roller shutters.

35.5.16 Fire Rated Roller Shutters

(a) Fire resisting roller shutters shall comply with the requirements of the Code ofPractice for Fire Resisting Construction, Buildings Department.

(b) The operation of the fire shutter shall be tested according to the requirementsof the Code of Practice for Minimium Fire Services Installations andEquipment and Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Installations andEquipment, Fire Services Department and the Building Services BranchTesting and Commissioning Procedure No.3 for Fire Service Installation in

Government Buildings, Architectural Services Department.

(c) The fire rated period resisting shutters shall comply with the criterion ofintegrity relating to the method of exposure on each side separately whentested in accordance with BS 476: Part 20-24.

(d) The Contractor shall provide a test report prepared by a laboratory accreditedby the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or BuildingsDepartment to certify that the fire resisting shutter is capable of resisting theaction of fire for the specified period to the Project Manager for review withoutobjection.

(e) The fire resisting shutters shall be self-closing activated by smoke detector(s)and manual control device(s) on both side of the wall openings for automaticand manual operation respectively. The detectors installed shall comply withthe requirements of the General Specification for Fire Service Installation inGovernment Buildings, Architectural Services Department.

(f) The Contractor shall construct the fire rated roller shutter curtains, connectingcomponents and fixings from hot dipped galvanized mild steel in compliancewith BS 729 and 4479;

(g) The Contractor shall provide all control panels including interface with firealarm activating devices;

(h) The Contractor shall design the system to provide the following uponactivation of any smoke detection system:

(i) the associated fire roller shutters operates; and

(ii) alarm bells and indicating lights activate.

35.5.17 Operational Requirements of Roller Shut ters

(a) Roller shutters shall be the type as specified in the Employer’s Drawings

(b) Self-closing shutters shall be operated manually through an internal self-coiling mechanism by lifting handles or a pole and hook. The mechanism shallbe adjustable to control the effort required to raise or lower the door.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 187/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(c) Shutters operated by means of an endless chain shall be fitted with a spur orworm reduction gear such that the shutter will not fall or rise without manualoperation of the chain.

(d) For electrically operated shutters, auxiliary manually operated gear shall beprovided. The changeover shall be easily activated without climbing up to the

gearing drive mechanism to engage the gears for manual operation ordisengage the manual operating gear for electrical operation.

(e) An interlock switch shall be provided to prevent the locked roller shutters fromoperating electrically and shall be fitted on a stationary part (such as the guiderails) but not on the moving part of the roller shatters.

(f) The Contractor shall provide manual control push button switches on bothsides of each fire roller shutter with the following controls which are clearlylabelled;

(i) Open;

(ii) Close; and

(iii) Emergency Stop.

(g) The Contractor shall install manual control push button switches in lockablerecessed stainless steel boxes approximately 150 mm above floor level, or asshown on the Employer's Drawings.

(h) The operation of electrical controls and links to smoke detection systems tofire shutters shall be as follows:

(i) Motor operation:

•  Shutter for compartmentation purpose shall be provided withsmoke detectors and manual control devices on both sides of thewall openings for automatic and manual operation respectively.

•  Upon actuation of anyone of the detectors, the shutter shall start toclose. The visual and audible alarm installed adjacent to theshutter shall be raised simultaneously.

•  Shall the ‘STOP’ and ‘OPEN’ button switches be activated whilethe shutter is closing or already closed, the shutter shall stop and

re-open immediately. The shutter shall then resume the closingmotion when reaching to its rest position.

(ii) electrothermal link (ETL) operation:

•  shutter for compartmentation purpose shall be provided withsmoke detectors and manual control devices on both sides of thewall openings for automatic and manual operation respectively.

•  Upon actuation of anyone of the detectors, a DC-24V poweredsignal shall be sent form AFA control panel for melting the ETL torelease the shutter.

•  The visual and audible alarm installed adjacent to the shutter shallbe raised simultaneously.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 188/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.5.18 Roller Shutter Drives Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide motors, associated control and protective devices suitable foroperating on local electricity supply. Use totally enclosed three-phase

induction motors unless otherwise specified. The motors, driving gears, limitswitches, and control mechanism shall be accessible for inspection andservicing;

(b) provide an isolating switch with adequate electrical power supply to isolate theelectricity supply during inspection and servicing.

(c) supply and install flame proof motors for driving all electrically operatedshutters; use flameproof totally enclosed fan cooled button motors that arecertified for the appropriate group 2 casing in accordance with BritishStandards or equivalent;

(d) use motors suitable for the required duty; provide a margin of not less than10% between the continuous rating of the motor (without overloading) and themaximum power arduous operating condition, taking account of thecharacteristics of the driven machine;

(e) use motors that are suitable for use in the temperature and air conditions inwhich they are to be installed; continuously rate all motors in accordance withBS 5000 Part 99; insulate all windings of motors with Class B materials as aminimium;

(f) for motors up to 5.5kW, use the squirrel cage type suitable for direct-on-linestarting. Starting current shall not exceed 6 times full load current;

(g) use commercially silent type motors having sleeve or roller bearings. Theenclosures shall be splash/drip proof, totally enclosed pattern. If from practicalconsiderations, a motor is required to have thrust bearing, the effect of shaftexpansion shall be reduced to a minimum. Motors shall be suitable foroperation in the vertical or horizontal position;

(h) incorporate a governor unit in all roller shutters for safe closing speed of theshutters; and

(i) use electric-thermal actuating device for the fire shutter of thermal link designcapable of withstanding the pulling force imposed upon the shutter assembly

as confirmed by the shutter manufacturer.

35.5.19 Polyester Powder Coatings

(a) Where specified as a finish, polyester powder coating shall comply with BS6496 and BS 6497, and shall be applied on an automatic continuous paint line

to a minimum thickness of 80 μm and maximum thickness to match hardcoating process. Colours shall be as shown on the Employer’s Drawings. Oneapplication company and one polyester powder coating supplier shall be used.

(b) The polyester powder coating thickness between similar adjacent components

shall not vary by more than 10 μm.

(c) The finish to the systems shall be in accordance with BS 5427 Appendix ENo.6 of Table E3.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 189/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 15/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(d) All polyester powder coated surface shall receive a clear protective top coat

sealant 70 μm thick.

(e) Any primer and surface treatment applied prior to application of decorative

coatings shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 25 μm and shall becompatible with the decorative coatings. Workmanship for surface preparationand paint application shall conform to BS 5493.

(f) The Contractor shall avoid over-application of coatings of elements.

(g) The Contractor shall finish surfaces smooth, free from blemishes, pinholes,tears, orange peel effect and other coating defects when evenly illuminated bydiffuse light and viewed using normal corrected vision from a distance of 1 m.

(h) The Contractor shall establish limits for acceptable production colourvariations with the Project Manager by reference to samples/ benchmarks.

35.5.20 Protect ive Coating Micaceous Iron Oxide (MIO) Treatment

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide painting materials, workmanship, quality control and inspection incompliance with BS 5493;

(b) adopt the paint manufacturer's recommendations in respect of the supply,storage, use and application of the paint system and cleanliness of paintedsurfaces and

(c) use paint supplied by a manufacturer previously reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager; and

(d) paint steel with a zinc phosphate metal primer not more than 2 hours afterblasting; apply the primer to ensure a dry film thickness of 50 µm uponcompletion and after 24 hours the steelwork shall be painted with two-packepoxy micaceous iron oxide applied to ensure a dry film thickness of 100 µmupon completion.

35.5.21 Finish Colour

The Contractor shall provide colours finished to the required RAL reference. Theexact shade shall be determined by colour match samples with a secular glossfactor of 30% ± 3% when measured in accordance with BS 3900: Part D5 using the

60° geometry method.

35.6 SUBMISSIONS

35.6.1 Particulars of Archi tectural Metalwork

(a) The Contractor shall submit the following particulars of the proposedarchitectural metalwork to the Project Manager for review without objection:

(i) Contractor’s Drawings showing the fabrication details;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 190/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 16/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(ii) Contractor’s Drawings showing that the dimensional and detailedprovisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances ofsurrounding elements to ensure that all aspects of the architecturalmetalwork relate satisfactorily to the Works as a whole;

(iii) drawings showing layout and details of handrailing, including positions of

the different type of standards;

(iv) drawings showing details of ladders, stairs, toe plates and safety chains;

(v) drawings showing layout and details of flooring, including positions andsizes of panels and supports,

(vi) details of methods of fixing and of rag, indented, expansion and resinbonded bolts, including manufacturer's literature;

(vii) details of the source, type and properties of materials;

(viii) details of manufacturer's name and place of manufacture, and

(ix) a certificate showing that the materials comply with the requirementsstated in the Specification,

(b) For all elements of architectural metalwork, the Contractor shall provide detaildrawings and obtain review without objection from the Project Manager priorto commencement of manufacture.

35.6.2 Samples

The Contractor shall submit samples to the Project Manager with relevant trade

literature in accordance with the Specification. Samples shall include but not limitedto the following:

(a) 600 mm unit length or 600 mmx600 mm length of each element such asfinished frames, roller shutter slats, louvre blades handrails, ladders includingrungs, toe plates, flooring and curbs, safety chains;

(b) fixings and accessories for the above items including rag, indented,expansion, resin bonded bolts; and

(c) quarter section of each type of metal door set with ironmongery, fully finished.

35.6.3 Prototypes

(a) The Contractor shall provide, maintain and/or clear away full size prototypes ofeach element of architectural metalwork.

(b) The arrangements for prototypes shall be as shown on the Employer’sDrawings, including all visible components of the various constructions, andthe non-visible support systems and fixings.

(c) The prototypes shall utilize the specified materials and finishes but notnecessarily the final production techniques.

(d) The prototypes shall be tested and examined by the Project Manager in termsof quality, materials, interfacing details for accessibility by other trades andworkmanship.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 191/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 17/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(e) The Contractor shall have the Project Manager   witness the installation anddismantling of the prototypes and record any variations to the agreed detailson a set of the prototype assembly drawings prepared by the Contractor.

35.6.4 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall complete a section of each type of architecturalmetalwork as benchmark in a location previously agreed by the ProjectManager before proceeding. Upon receipt of a 'notice of no objection' from theProject Manager, the benchmark shall become the standard to which allsubsequent architectural metalwork shall conform. The extent of eachbenchmark shall be as follows:

(i) 3 m length of each element described including all accessories; or

(ii) 1 complete element such as a roller shutter, door, louvre or stainlesssteel column guard.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any architectural metalwork.

35.7 WORKMANSHIP

35.7.1 Tolerances

(a) The Contractor shall confirm that the visual requirements of all architecturalmetalwork have been achieved and allowable tolerances within individual gridlines are equally distributed:

(i) the vertical joints are of equal size and at equal centers;

(ii) metal doors/windows/louvres and ironmongery are with straight linesand flat panes;

(iii) horizontal joints are of equal size and in line between adjacent elements;and

(iv) the gap between panels /doors and framing is constant.

(b) Tolerances for manufacture:

(i) restrict element length, width and diagonal tolerances to ±1 mm;

(ii) each element of architectural metalwork shall be smooth and flat. Therequired flatness criteria shall be 1:1,000; and

(iii) all return edges to steel panels shall be formed to a minimum externalbending radius of 1.5 mm and a maximum of 3 mm. The Contractor shallconfirm the actual radius intended for fabrication.

(c) Installation tolerances:

(i) restrict the maximum variation in plan location from the planning grid ofany part of the architectural metalwork to ±2.0 mm;

(ii) restrict the maximum variation in height from given datum to ±2.0 mm;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 192/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 18/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(iii) restrict the maximum variation from plumb to ±1.0 mm;

(iv) restrict the maximum offset in plan level or section between any 2adjacent components to ±1.0 mm;

(v) cut outs for interfacing works to the dimensions shown on the

Contractor's Drawings shall be ±1 mm;

(vi) the position and height of handrailing shall be within 10 mm of thespecified position and height;

(vii) the level of the top rung of ladders and the top tread of stairs shall bewithin 75 mm of the specified level; and

(viii) the level of flooring and curbs shall be within 3 mm of the specified level.

35.7.2 Thermal Movement

The Contractor shall construct all architectural metalwork to accommodate changesin dimension and shape of its components resulting from differential servicetemperatures without any reduction in the specified performance.

35.7.3 Moisture Movement

The Contractor shall construct all architectural metalwork without permanentdeformation or reduction in the specified performance, or components resulting fromvariations in the moisture content.

35.7.4 Acoustic Performance of Doors

The Contractor shall:

(a) construct the metal doors/louvres within partitions surrounding areascontaining noise-producing building services plant such that noise andvibration, transmitted through the combination of the metal doors/louvres andthe partition, does not result in noise levels on the occupied side exceedingthe following noise rating (NR) values:

Table 35.1: Noise Reduction of Metal Doors / Louvres

 Area (s) NR

Offices 35

Toilets, entrance hall, circulation spaces 40

Note that the above values are 5NR less than the overall building servicesnoise limits for occupied areas, e.g. the overall limit for office areas is NR40;

(b) obtain information on the predicted plant area noise levels and partitionconstruction to meet the requirements above. The Contractor shall providecalculations, supported by sound insulation testing in accordance with BS2750, to show that the required performance is met; and

(c) provide metal doors/louvres which close in a controlled, quiet manner without'slamming noise'. The maximum sound level caused by door operation shall

be 68dB (Audible), as measured at 1m from both faces of the door with asound level meter set to 'F' (fast) response.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 193/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 19/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.7.5 Air Permeability of Doors and Louvres

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide metal doors/louvres to stair shafts that do not allow smoke to enter theescape route; provide sealing strips to limit the transfer of air across the

complete door set. The combined sealing details shall not permit a leakagerate in excess of 13 litre per second per meter length of gap with a differentialpressure of 15 N/m²; and

(b) provide access metal doors/louvres into risers and service enclosures withsealing strips to limit the transfer of conditioned air from the office space intothe unconditioned risers and service enclosures. The combined sealing detailsshall not permit a leakage rate in excess of 75 litre per second for completedoor system and frame with a differential pressure of 25 N/m².

35.7.6 Fixing of Metal Doors / Louvres

The Contractor shall:

(a) take adequate measures to prevent bi-metallic corrosion between dissimilarmetals, and to this end attention is drawn to publication PD 6484 'Commentaryon corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation';

(b) isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces;

(c) provide fixings which are suited to the likely stresses, movements andvibrations in use, without allowing any wobble, creaks or deflection of anyfixtures or fittings;

(d) fix items which require accessibility or removal with screws, bolts and hinges;

(e) construct access panels which are removable with screw fixings and retentionclips, independently of any other panels;

(f) pay particular attention to the interface between the door frames andreinforced concrete and concrete blockwork walls when preparing detailedContractor’s Drawings and during installation;

(g) maintain the shadow gap shown on the Employer's Drawings at the head and jamb conditions.

(h) flush the outside edge/surface of the door frame with the face of the reinforcedconcrete and concrete blockwork walls;

(i) seal the interstices between door frames and the reinforced concrete andconcrete blockwork walls with materials or firestops having the same fire-resisting period as the walls.

(j) check the dimensions, squareness and flatness of every door leaf inaccordance with BS 5278 and 5277 to verify compliance with the tolerancesstated in 35.7.1.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 194/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 20/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.7.7 Fire Rating of Doors

Where metal doors/windows/louvres are specified to be fire rated, the Contractorshall:

(a) provide metal doors/windows/louvres in compliance with BS 6510, BS 5277

and BS 5278;

(b) check all fire rated metal doors/windows/louvres for smoke penetration inaccordance with BS 476: Part 31; and

(c) ensure that the metal doors/louvres and associated ironmongery comply withthe fire rating stated in the Employer's Drawings from both sides and providetest certificates from an HOKLAS laboratory.

35.7.8 Construct ion and Installation of Roller shutters

The Contractor shall:

(a) check the actual sizes of all openings before fabrication and installation. Thesizes of all openings specified are the net openings and are given for guidanceonly;

(b) factory prepare all framing for Site assembly; design the assembly andanchorage to suit each location and specified conditions;

(c) thoroughly and evenly coat galvanized articles with zinc and ensure surfacesare free from stains, bare spots and other defects. Any cutting, drilling orwelding after galvanizing shall be treated with a suitable anti-rust base paint;

(d) assemble, secure and anchor all components in a manner not restrictingthermal movements of the components;

(e) make a shutter curtain of sufficient length to extend from the floor of theopening to the top of the barrel and then round at least a quarter of thecircumference before fixing to the barrel; furnish both jambs with channelguides;

(f) provide stainless steel bottom rails of suitable dimensions extending the fullwidth of the opening. The horizontal steel barrel carrying the shutter curtainshall be of suitable diameter and strength to reduce deflections to a minimum.The steel barrel shall be rust proofed;

(g) support the shutter and its barrel on brackets with adequate bearings; providebrackets with suitable fixings for attaching to the soffit, face or side of opening;allow provision for adjustment after the curtain is in position;

(h) construct the vertical channel guides of stainless steel fixed and built intorecesses in both sides of the wall opening;

(i) build the channel guides at each jamb into the wall and extend continuously tothe full height of the opening from the floor to within the false ceiling; securethe channel guides by rag or expanding bolts grouted in position;

(j) supply and install all wiring, controls etc., for operation of motorized shutters;wire the fire roller shutter to the isolator adjacent to each shutter controlsystem; and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 195/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 21/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(k) allow for gypsum, or similar approved, plasterboard panels, providing aminimum of 2 hours fire protection, to the ends of roller shutter supports wherea 200 mm thick reinforced concrete or blockwall detail cannot be provided.

35.7.9 Application of Silicone Sealants

The Contractor shall:

(a) apply silicone evenly without bubbles, and in joints not less than 6 mm x 6mm; remove excess silicone and all joints shall be neat and clean.

(b) apply silicone joints as small as possible to satisfy all the relevant criterion butno more than 12 mm in width;

(c) adequately protect silicone joints during the curing process to avoidcontamination by dust and other debris;

(d) Ensure that surfaces are smooth, undamaged and joint dimensions are within

limits specified for the sealant; carry out preparatory work before assembly ofthe joint;

(e) clean surfaces to which sealant are adhere using methods and materialsrecommended by sealant manufacturer; remove all temporary coatings, tapes,loosely adhering material, dust, oil, grease and other contaminants that mayaffect bond; keep joints clean and protected from damage until sealant isapplied;

(f) ensure that backing strip, bond breaker and primer are of types recommendedfor the purpose by sealant manufacturer; insert backing strips and/or bondbreaker tape into joint leaving no gaps;

(g) cover adjacent surfaces with masking tape to prevent staining and protectsurfaces that would be difficult to clean if smeared with primer or sealant;

(h) ensure that operatives observe manufacturers and statutory requirements forstorage and safe usage of sealants;

(i) use equipment and methods recommended by sealant manufacturer andapply within the recommended application life of primer and sealant, and therecommended air and substrate temperature ranges.

(j) not apply sealant to damp surfaces (unless recommended otherwise) or

during inclement weather. Do not heat joints to dry them or raise thetemperature;

(k) fill joints completely, leaving no gaps, excluding all air and ensuring firmadhesion of sealant to the joint surfaces; tool the sealant to a neat; slightlyconcave profile unless specified otherwise.

(l) protect silicone joints until cured.

35.7.10 Fabrication of Steelwork

Steelwork for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be fabricated in

accordance with BS 5950:Part 2.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 196/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 22/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.7.11 Galvanizing to Steel

(a) Steel which is to be galvanized shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance withBS 729 to a coating thickness of at least 500 g/m2.

(b) Galvanizing to steel shall be applied after welding, drilling and cutting are

completed.

35.7.12 Welding Steel

(a) Welds to steel for handrailing, ladders, stairs and flooring shall be full depthfillet welds. The welded surface shall be clean and flush before application ofthe protective coating.

(b) Steel shall not be welded after galvanizing unless permitted by the ProjectManager. If permitted, the welded areas shall be free from scale and slag andshall be treated with an appropriate coating system, reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager, and compatible with the protective system

of the parent metal.

35.7.13 Fabrication of Handrailing

Handrailing shall be discontinued at movement joints in structures. The spacingbetween standards shall be regular and shall not exceed 1.6 m. Curved handrailingshall not be made up of a series of straights.

35.7.14 Fabrication of Ladders

(a) Ladders shall comply with BS 4211.

(b) Steel ladders shall be hot-dip galvanized.

(c) Aluminium ladders shall be Grade 6082 aluminium.

(d) Rungs, extended stringers, safety cages and brackets shall be welded to thestringers of ladders.

(e) Rungs on aluminium ladders shall have longitudinal grooves and pressedaluminium alloy caps shall be fixed to open ends.

35.7.15 Fabrication of Stairs

Stairs shall comply with BS 5395:Part 1.

35.7.16 Fabrication of Flooring

(a) The shape of each panel of flooring shall be such that the panel can be easilyremoved. The mass of each panel shall not exceed 40 kg. Where intermediatesupports are provided to support flooring they shall be capable of beingremoved to provide the specified clear opening.

(b) Curbs shall be provided in concrete surfaces for flooring.

(c) Cut-outs in flooring shall be neatly shaped and shall be provided with toeplates. Cut-outs in open mesh flooring shall be trimmed with edge bars weldedto the bearing bars. The clearance between the edge of cut-outs and thecomponent passing through the cut-out shall not exceed 30 mm.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 197/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 23/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(d) The bearing bars in open mesh flooring shall be welded to the nosing bars.The transverse bars shall be riveted or welded to the bearing bars. Panels ofopen mesh flooring shall be secured with adjustable fixing clips.

(e) Chequer plate flooring shall have a non-slip pattern of a type reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager and shall be provided with lifting holes. The

flooring shall be secured to curbs by countersunk screws.

35.7.17 Fabrication of Toe Plates

Toe plates shall be fixed to handrail standards by brackets and shall be bolted orwelded to stairs and flooring.

35.7.18 Fabrication of Safety Chains

(a) Safety chains shall comply with BS 4942 and shall be capable of withstandinga breaking force of 30 kN and a proof force of 15 kN.

(b) Steel safety chains shall be 8 mm nominal size, Grade M4 non-calibratedchain Type 1 and shall be hot-dip galvanized.

(c) The links of stainless steel safety chains shall be welded and shall have aninternal length exceeding 45 mm and an internal width of between 12 mm and18 mm. Fins caused by welding shall be removed.

(d) Hooks on chains shall be fitted with a sprung securing device.

35.7.19 Installation of Handraili ng, Ladders and Stairs

(a) Handrailing shall be installed to a smooth alignment.

(b) Handrail standards, flanges, ladders and stairs shall be bolted to metalworkand shall be fixed to concrete using rag, indented, expansion or resin bondedbolts. The bolts shall be fitted into pockets left in the concrete and the pocketsshall be filled with cement mortar or resin grout.

35.7.20 Installation of Flooring

(a) Flooring and curbs shall be flush with the adjoining surfaces.

(b) Curbs shall be fitted into rebates left in the concrete and the rebates shall befilled with cement mortar.

(c) Flooring shall be closely butted and the gap between panels and curbs,adjacent panels and other surfaces shall not exceed 10 mm.

35.8 INSPECTION TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

35.8.1 General Testing Requirements

(a) Durability Tests:

(i) Test corrosion resistance in accordance with BS 5466: Part 3, for a

period of 8 hours with results evaluated in accordance with BS 3745.The rating shall be a minimum of 8;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 198/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 24/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

(ii) Test light resistance in accordance with BS 6161: Part 7. The rating shallbe a minimum of 9;

(iii) Test ultra violet resistance to BS 6161: Part 8;

(iv) Test heat resistance in accordance with BS 1615: Clause 9.3; and

(v) Test abrasive resistance in accordance with BS 6161: Parts 9 and 10.

(b) Impact Tests:

(i) Subject rails to the impact resistance test with a force of 250 kg at 0.9m/s mid span.

(ii) Test exposed metalwork panel surfaces to verify that they resist heavyimpacts generated from pedestrian traffic (e.g.: baggage trolleys) withoutany noticeable change to the surface appearance as defined in BS 8200Category B, BS 3900 Parts E1-12: 1970, BS 8200 Section 2 Part 7 and

 Appendix G for testing methods.

(iii) The panels, subject to the above impact tests, shall have no visibleindentation marks, damage, deterioration to performance or risk ofhazard to occupants.

(iv) The Contractor shall provide details of tests to demonstrate theperformance of materials and finishes in resisting impact from pedestriantraffic (hands, rings, luggage, trolleys, cloth, shoes, etc.) and any otherimpacts resulting from adjacent traffic movements.

35.8.2 Fire Tests for Doors

The Contractor shall test all components of the fire resisting metaldoors/windows/louvres and ironmongery and certify to BS 476 under the followingparts:

(a) BS 476 Part 4 (Non-combustibility test for materials);

(b) BS 476 Part 5:1979 together with AMD 3478 published 28.11.80 (Methods oftest for ignitability) designation 'P';

(c) BS 476 Part 6: Index of performance 910 not exceeding 12 and sub-index (ii)not exceeding 6;

(d) BS 476 Part 7: (Surface Spread of Flame Tests for Materials) Class 1; and

(e) BS 476 Parts 20, 21 22 to 24 (Test Methods and criteria for the fire resistanceof elements of building construction).

35.8.3 Acoustic Tests for Doors

(a) the Contractor shall carry out Site sound transmission loss tests in accordancewith BS 2750, and provide a test report demonstrating that the installedpartition and door meets the performance required. To satisfy the above thisrequires an average transmission loss (arithmetic mean of the (16) ISO 1/3

octave bands from 100 Hz to 3150 Hz inclusive) of not less than Rw40; and

(b) The Contractor shall take account of the acoustic rating requirementsspecified in the Door Schedules of the Employer's Drawings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 199/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 25/25 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 35 – Architectural Metalwork (Including MetalDoors & Shutters) 

35.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

35.9.1 Durability

The Contractor shall state the predicted service life of all architectural metalworkcomponents and provide guidance on the required maintenance, replacement

periods, and methods of replacement. Components shall be capable of easyreplacement without compromising the structural or weatherproof integrity of eachitem of architectural metalwork.

35.9.2 Primary Components

The Contractor shall ensure that the primary components are all components with apredicted service life of not less than 12 years without the need for maintenanceother than regular cleaning. The following items shall be primary components butnot limited to:

(a) column guards, grilles and trench covers and support brackets for signage and

monitors;

(b) metal doors/ louvres;

(c) roller shutters; and

(d) metal ladders and steps.

35.9.3 Operation Manual

The Contractor shall provide Operation and Maintenance Manuals for:

(a) roller fire shutters and security shutters, including mechanical and electricaldetails; and

(b) raised flooring.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 200/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 201/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

SECTION 36 IRONMONGERY

36.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements for ironmongery. Thematerials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unless otherwisestated in this section:

(a) carpentry and joinery refer to section 31;

(b) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(c) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(d) architectural metalwork refer to section 35; and

(e) painting and decorating refer to section 40

36.2 NOT USED

36.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 1210 Wood screws

BS 1224 Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium

BS 1449 Part 2 Stainless and heat resisting steel plate and sheet and strip

BS1470-7 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for generalengineering purposes

BS 1615 Anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium

BS 3621 Specification for thief resistant locks

BS 4951 Lock and latch furniture (doors)

BS 5499 Part 1 Fire safety signs

BS 5725: Part 1 Specification for builder's hardware Specification foremergency exit devices

BS 5872 Specification for locks and latches for doors in buildings

BS 6459 Door closures

BS 7352: 1990 Specification for strength, durability and performance forhinges

BS 8214 Code of practice for fire door assemblies with non metallicleaves

BSEN 58J Stainless steel

BSEN 1125 Emergency exit devices

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 202/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

BSEN 1154 Door closers

BSEN 1670 Corrosion resistance

PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and itsalleviation.

36.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

36.4.1 General Criteria

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide and fix all items of ironmongery complete with screws to the type andlength recommended by the manufacturer;

(b) take every precaution to prevent chemical or electrolytic action from taking

place when dissimilar metals and/or materials are used together. To this endattention is drawn to publication PD 6484 ‘Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation’;

(c) finish surfaces of all ironmongery, whether extruded, rolled, cast or stamped,to be visually identical in colour and texture with all finishes visible on a doorface, unless otherwise specified.

36.5 MATERIALS

36.5.1 Ironmongery Generally

Ironmongery shall be properly matched and obtained from one source.

36.5.2 Materials Generally

Materials and finishes shall comply with section 35 (Architectural Metalwork) and thefollowing standards:

(a) Stainless steel shall comply with BS 1449: Part 2.

(b) Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium shall comply with BS 1224.

(c) Anodic oxidation coating on aluminium shall comply with BS 1615 Grade AA10.

(d) Electroplated coatings of cadmium and zinc on iron or steel shall comply withBS 1706.

(e) All concealed components including lock bodies shall be protected by themanufacturer's standard finish in compliance with the above standards.

(f) Screws shall be stainless steel, brass or aluminium in compliance with BS1210 with countersunk heads unless otherwise specified to match the

ironmongery being fixed.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 203/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(g) Unless otherwise specified, materials shall be:

(i) aluminium: BS1470-7 HE9-TF alloy; or

(ii) stainless steel: BSEN58J Grade 316 (18/10/3 molybdenum bearinggrade)

36.5.3 Types of Hinges

The Contractor shall install hinges and pivot sets appropriate for the doorconstruction, location and function and of appropriate classes in compliance withBS7352 for the door size, weight and duty, allowing for the additional factorsspecified in Table 11 and Clause C.2 of BS7352. They shall be supplied withsuitable screws of identical material, finish and of sizes not less than those requiredby relevant performance tests.

Generally hinges shall be one of the following:

(a) Class A1 - Extra heavy duty hinges shall be 3.30 mm satin stainless steel,18/9 qualities, with four sets of anti-friction bearings and non-removablestainless steel pin.

(b) Class A - Heavy duty hinges shall be 2.50 mm satin stainless steel, 18/9quality, with a minimium two sets of anti-friction bearings and non-removablestainless steel pin.

(c) Class B - Standard duty hinges shall be as follows:

(i) 2.0 mm satin finish stainless steel, 18/9 qualities with four nylon-bushed

bearings; or

(ii) special hinges i.e. falling or rising butts, parliament or other hinges shallbe from the supplier's range manufactured in stainless steel or anodisedaluminium with hardened bearing surfaces finished as specified.

(d) Class C- light duty hinges shall be as follows:

(i) 1.6 mm satin finish stainless steel, 18/9 qualities; or

(ii) special hinges i.e. back flap hinges, continuous or other hinges shall befrom the supplier's product range manufactured in stainless steelfinished as specified.

(e) Hinges shall have a corrosion resistance of at least Grade 3 to BSEN1670.

36.5.4 Floor Springs 

(a) Single and double action floor springs shall be hydraulic check springmechanism sealed into an oil or hydraulic fluid box complete with a looseprotected steel box for fixing within a concrete floor and a detachable coverplate with waterproof seal.

(b) Adjustment within the box shall provide full horizontal movement for door

alignment, final positioning and height adjustment. The position of the floorspring within the loose box shall be adjustable after installation.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 204/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(c) The non-adjustable bottom strap shall be designed to suit the type, size andweight of the door but shall not be less than 160 mm long with holes for fourscrews. The top centre for double action floor springs shall be adjustable. Ifspecified, a hydraulic back check shall be incorporated effective for theopening angle of the floor spring.

(d) On single action floor springs the bottom strap and top centre shall be offset.

(e) Where floor springs are to be fitted to a fire door, the floor spring shall havebeen tested in conjunction with an appropriate fire door and past the integralfire door test in accordance with BS 476: Part 22.

(f) If the spring is to be fitted to metal doors, the specification shall be the sameexcept that a non-ferrous strap shall be provided to suit the profile of thebottom rail of the door and the top centre shall suit the top rail of the door. 

(g) Class A. - Floor springs shall be certified as tested to 500,000 cycles.

(h) Class B - Floor springs shall be certified as tested to 300,000 cycles.

(i) Sizes of floor springs shall relate to the minimum closing moment expressed inthe following table:

Table 36.1: Min. Closing Moments for Floor Springs & Door Closers

Nominal Closer SizeMinimum closing moment (Nm)

15-75 mm 90 degree

2

3

4

5

6

10

17

27

37

48

2.5

5

9

13

17

Exposed parts shall be finished to the same standard as the rest of theironmongery of the set unless specified otherwise. The top plate shall be satinfinish stainless steel, 18/10/3 quality unless specified otherwise.

36.5.5 Overhead Door Closers

(a) The Contractor shall provide closers for fire rated doors in compliance withBSEN1154 Category of Use 4, opening up to 180 degrees; ABHM Code ofPractice “Hardware for Timber Fire and Escape Doors”. Closer used on a firerated door shall be more than Size 3.

(b) The Contractor shall provide and fix closers for fire rated, un-insulated, hollowmetal doors that incorporate non-flammable hydraulic fluid.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 205/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(c) Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall install surface mountedclosers that will suit doors of either hand and be visually pleasing. The doorcloser shall have 50 mm maximum projection, plain, rectangular appearance,with solid aluminium, brass or stainless steel (not cast iron) bodies. All visiblesurfaces, including arms, shall be finished identically to other items on thedoor, with no permanent visible markings (except as required by relevantstandards).

(d) Overhead door closers shall, in compliance with BSEN1154 Class 4-8-5/2-1-1-3, power adjustable for doors from 300 mm to 1,250 mm wide and 20 kg to100 kg mass, or equivalent grade to Table 2 for doors of greater width/mass.

(e) Pull-to fittings shall be installed where space limitations could hinder standardoperation.

(f) Where the door closer is to be fitted to a fire door, the closer shall be testedtogether with door, door frame and ironmongery in accordance with BS 476:

Part 22.

(g) All closers shall be of the horizontal pattern from the manufacturers' standardrange and shall be fitted with a regular arm for face fixing with all parts andfixings of closer arms in stainless steel, unless specified otherwise.

(h) The Contractor shall submit Testing Certification for door closers undertakenin accordance with BS 6459 to Project Manager for review without objection.If testing has been undertaken in accordance with different standards, then itshall be submitted in English with material samples for review withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

36.5.6 Finish to Overhead Door Closers

Closers shall be finished as follows:

(a) The body and arm of door closer shall be finished to the same standard as therest of the door ironmongery. Where closers are supplied with a separatecover, the cover shall be protected with steel against rust, plated and finishedto the same standard as the rest of the door ironmongery. Where closer aresupplied with cover, the body shall be manufacturer's standard finish.

(b) Closer arm using manufacturer's standard finish shall be submitted for reviewwithout objection by the Project Manager.

36.5.7 Keys and Cylinders

(a) The Contractor shall provide a minimum of six keys for each lock, each fittedwith a stainless steel split ring and a 25 mm diameter x 1.5 mm thick plasticdisc engraved with the number of the lock or room in figures 5 mm minimumhigh.

(b) Keyways, thumb turns and operating handles shall be positioned at operatingheight as shown on the Employer’s Drawings.

(c) Cylinders shall be easily removable when the door is open, withoutdismantling trim but non-removable when closed. Cylinder fixing screws shallbe concealed behind lock faceplates.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 206/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

36.5.8 Master Key System

(a) The Contractor shall provide master key system and submit for review withoutobjection by the Project Manager before ordering of cylinders. The master keysystem shall be compatible with the existing system.

(b) Unless otherwise stated, keyed locks shall be construction keyed and masterkeyed to match the current systems or a modified version in compliance withthe Specification. The insertion of the reset key in any cylinder lock shallprevent subsequent access by the construction keys.

(c) Except for construction masters, master keys, changes keys and reset keysshall be shipped with the shipment(s) of ironmongery and shall be delivered bythe manufacturer directly to the Project Manager in proper sealed envelopes.Under no circumstances shall the keys be delivered to the Contractor. Lockingof doors on Site by the Contractors shall be via the use of construction keys.

36.5.9 Security Locks

(a) Security locks shall have a minimum of five levers. Pin or disc mechanismsshall have a minimum of six pin or disc tumblers or more than one row of pinsand rollers. Rows shall not be in the same plane.

(b) Forends shall have double thickness and each lock shall be capable of beingfitted to fully rebated doors with 12.5 mm or 25 mm deep rebate by theaddition of a rebating set.

(c) Keys shall be registered in the name of the Airport Authority Hong Kong andduplicates shall only be obtainable through the manufacturer. Prior to ordering,the Contractor shall agree with the Project Manager the method of ordering,

supplying and fixing to ensure the maintenance of security. Master keyingshall not be permitted for security locks.

(d) Class A - Security locks shall comply with BS 3621.

(e) Class B - Locks manufactured in compliance with BS 3621. Other features inaddition to the security bolt within the scope of BS 5872 shall comply with therelevant performance requirements of Category B of BS 5872. Note: - theaddition of a Turn on the inside invalidates certification BS 3621 which shallonly be used for ease of escape in case of fire.

(f) Exposed pads shall be satin finish stainless steel 18/10/3 quality. Rebating set

shall be nickel-plated brass to match.

36.5.10 Locks and Latches

(a) Locks and latches shall comply with BS 5872 category B.

(b) The Contractor shall provide replaceable forends, strike plates and rebatecomponents for rebated meeting edges. Materials shall match door furniturewith no exposed sharp edges or corners. The Contractor shall provide facilityfor full reversal of handing, without opening the case.

(c) Lever locks shall have a minimum of 3 levers and 2,000 differ. Cylinder locksshall have at least standard section 5 pin cylinders.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 207/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(d) Locks shall be capable of being fitted to fully rebated doors with 12.5 or 25mm deep rebates by the addition of a rebating set.

(e) Locks shall be stamped with the lock number as agreed with the ProjectManager.

(f) Locks and latches requiring lever or knob furniture shall be comply with BS4951, category 1, (See lock & latch fittings).

(g) If the springing system within the lock is incapable of sustaining therequirements of BS 4951, the handles shall be spring-loaded. If the handlesrequire bolting through the lock in compliance with BS 4951, the lock shall beholed at 38 mm horizontal or vertical centres to accommodate these bolts.

(h) Where specified locks shall be master keyed.

(i) Class A - Locks and latches shall comply with BS 5872, Category B, meeting

the performance specifications up to 500,000 operations for locks and1,000,000 operations in conjunction with lever handles.

(j) Class B - Locks and latches shall comply with BS 5872 Category A, and shallmeet the performance specification of 300,000 operations for locks, latches,bored locks or latch sets and 150,000 operations for cylinder rim night latches.They shall comply the dimensional standards set out in BS 5872.

(k) Forend and strike plate shall be satin stainless steel 18/10/3 quality. Rebatingset shall be satin stainless steel and finished to the same standard as the restof the ironmongery.

36.5.11 Lever Handles

(a) Lock and Latch fittings shall be lever handles with rose or back plate incompliance with BS 4951.

(b) The Contractor shall provide special, heavy springing against progressivelever droop (levers with sprung roses or back plates are unacceptable due topotential for damage and corrosion).

(c) Lever handles shall be round in section, minimum 19 mm diameter, withdouble security fixings incorporating captive screw thread, fixings onto theroses or back plates and positive self-tapping screw fixings onto the spindle.

(d) Lever handles shall rotate freely on a ball race bearing contained in a 25 mmdiameter cup welded to the rose or back plate to give minimal wear andfriction. The ball bearing cup shall be countersunk into the door face using thedrill provided to ensure a stabilised seating for the handle into the door.

(e) The Contractor shall provide all roses and back plates with a minimum 3 mmthickness, bored and countersunk with star drilling to accept countersunk backto back fittings. The roses shall have captive thread screw onto theappropriate lever handle. Nylon washers, circlips or star washer fixings, etc.shall not be used.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 208/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

36.5.12 Lock and Latch Fittings

(a) Centers for keyholes and spindle shall be 57 mm. The spindle shall be 7.6 mmor 8 mm square and shall project a minimum of 12 mm into each lever orknob.

(b) Unless the spindle system is able to transmit loads in compliance with BS4951, the fitting shall be bolted through the door and lock at 38 mm centres.

(c) Lever handles fixed to fire rated doors, minimum half hour fire rating, shall befitted with aluminium or similar low-melting alloy inserts for fixing or spindlehousings to prevent the spread of fire by melting of the insert, preventing thedoor being opened accidentally.

(d) Class A - Lock and latch furniture in compliance with BS 4951, Category 1,suitable for heavy duty use and shall be successfully tested to a minimum ofone million operations.

(e) Knob or lever handles shall be finished as follows: 

(i) stainless steel 18/10/3 quality; or

(ii) satin anodised aluminium; or

(iii) other finishes specified and/or to the requirements of the ProjectManager.

36.5.13 Panic Fittings

(a) Panic fittings shall match the door hardware.

(b) All panic fittings shall be low projection, to BSEN 1125 Grade 3-7-6-0-1-3-2-2-B, and comply with BS 5725: Part 1. Activating bar shall be fitted horizontallyacross the inside face of the door which shall be operated when pushedanywhere along its effective length in the direction of the exit and/or moved indownwards arc.

(c) Panic fittings with vertical shoots shall have an automatic catch, holding thebolts in a withdrawn position when the doors are opened and automaticallyreleasing the bolts on closing of the door.

(d) Panic fittings shall be capable of being opened from the other side of the doorwhen locked. The locking operation shall not interfere with exit from the inside.

(e) Panic fittings shall be complete with anti-thrust devices to prevent operation bymeans other than those described above.

(f) Panic bars should not allow escape to be compromised by padlocking a chainaround crossbars or other components and shall incorporate secret "holdunlocked“ facility.

(g) Class A - For use on fire rated doors certified by the manufacturer as suitablefor use on fire doors.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 209/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(h) Class B - For use on other doors.

(i) Panic Fittings shall be satin stainless steel finished, 18/10/3 quality or satinanodised or stoved silver finish.

36.5.14 Ancil lary Fittings

(a) Ancillary fittings and trim hardware shall match the door hardware.

(b) Pull handles and push plates shall be secured as follows:

(i) face fixed with a minimum of four screws per handle;

(ii) bolted through by 6 mm diameter (minimum) bolts and stabilised by aface fixing or semi-recessed washer on one side of the door; and

(iii) fixed in pairs by bolting through the door.

(c) Flush or surface bolts:

(i) Flush or surface bolts shall be BSEN 12051 Class 3-4-0-1-1-3-3supplied with either a holed shoot, plate or keeper at the head and dustexcluding socket at the floor.

(ii) In wet areas easy clean floor sockets shall be used.

(iii) Surface bolts shall be straight barrel bolts.

(iv) Flush bolts shall be lever action.

(v) Bolts shall have a 9.5 mm (minimum) diameter shoot.

(d) Push plates, kick plates shall be manufactured to allow not more than 4 mmgaps to the edge of the door or doorframe. Satin stainless steel plates shallnot be less than 1.6 mm thick. Satin anodised aluminium plates shall not beless than 3 mm thick. Plates shall be drilled and countersunk at not less than225 mm centres for 8 gauge screws for kick plates and 6 gauge screws forpush plates. Plates shall have round corners and all sharp arises removed.

(e) Door stops shall be floor mounted and shall have more than one fixing or plugwithin the floor to prevent rotation or bending. Wall mounted door stops shall

be concealed fixing and project sufficiently to prevent damage to doors andironmongery. Door stops shall not be provided for doors with back checkclosers which can be opened through greater than 100 degrees, beforeencountering a wall or item of furniture or other obstruction, or for small riserdoors.

(f) Door holders shall be floor mounted. The design and installation shall allowaccess for cleaning and replacement of spring mechanism as required.

(g) Cabin hooks shall have the staples properly welded or brazed to backplates. 

(h) Limit stays and friction stays shall be capable of limiting the opening of the

door and retaining it in the open position.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 210/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(i) The size of door selector shall suit the depth of rebate and width of doorleaves. On external doors opened outward, the door selector shall be screwedunder the frame pattern.

(j) Indicating sign plates shall have the same finish as push plates. Satinanodised aluminium plates shall not be less than 1.6 mm thick. Self-luminousexit signs shall comply with BS 5499: Part 2.

(k) Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols shall have the same finish aspush plates manufactured in compliance with BS 5499: Part 1.

36.5.15 Fitt ings to Cupboards and Drawers

(a) Fittings to drawers, cupboards and other joinery fittings shall have qualitymatching the door hardware.

(b) Hinges shall be stainless steel or chromium plated brass as stated in sub-

section 36.5.3 d) Class C.

(c) Standard drawer locks shall be cast zinc with a brass, or chromium platedbrass cap approximately 22 mm diameter with a four-tumbler cylinder and a 4mm thick brass bolt.

(d) Flush or surface bolts shall have a minimum of a 6 mm diameter shoot.

(e) Bales catches shall have a 9.5 mm diameter ball mounted in a faceplatematching striking plate.

(f) Magnetic door catches shall have a plastic casing with overall length not less

than 45 mm.

(g) Flush pulls shall be 100 x 50 x 18 mm deep fixed with four countersunkscrews.

(h) Drawer pulls shall be 7.5 mm diameter rod bent twice to form handle 100 x 25mm overall, Each leg shall be fitted with 3 mm threaded rod with one enddrilled and tapped at least 15 mm into the leg and the other end fitted with twoflat washers and a nut.

(i) Fittings shall be finished as follows: 

(i) stainless steel; or

(ii) satin anodised aluminium; or

(iii) chromium plated brass as specified on the Employer’s Drawings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 211/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

36.6 SUBMISSIONS

36.6.1 Particulars of Ironmongery

The Contractor shall submit the following particulars of the proposed ironmongery tothe Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) fully detailed catalogues, wiring diagrams, certificates of compliance or otherdocumentary evidence that the ironmongery complies with the Specification;

(b) details of the source, type and properties of materials;

(c) door ironmongery schedule including all other separate ironmongery itemswhen samples have been reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. All components shall be identified by manufacturers' name, reference number,country of origin, the requirements of smoke stop, fire rated doors, detail doorthicknesses, handing, and master key system.

(d) Upon receipt of a notice of no objection from the Project Manager,ironmongery schedule shall form the basis for which all ironmongery shallconform. No alteration to this schedule shall be permitted without the expresspermission of the Project Manager.

36.6.2 Samples

In addition to the requirement stated in section 35 (architectural metalwork), theContractor shall provide one sample for each type of ironmongery for review withoutobjection by the Project Manager prior to placing order. The sample shall become astandard to which all specified ironmongery shall conform.

36.6.3 Benchmark

Refer to section 35 (architectural metalwork).

36.7 WORKMANSHIP

36.7.1 Workmanship Generally

(a) The Contractor shall provide and fix all items of ironmongery with screws tothe type and length recommended by the manufacturer, suitable for fixing to

wood or metal as appropriate and to suit the door leaf and frame.

(b) All items of door ironmongery shall be provided with clear fixing instructionsand all mortised items and door closing devices shall be supplied with fixingtemplates.

36.7.2 Preparation for Ironmongery

The Contractor shall:

(a) check that doors, frames and the like are true and plumb before commencinginstallation;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 212/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(b) not fix any item until heavy work, background finishes and decorations in thearea are completed, to a suitable condition to receive the installation and theenvironmental conditions are suitable for installation of the Works. If a lockmust be fitted before completion of such work, install temporary constructionlevers;

(c) leave in place inner wrappings, or re-wrap items after installation, forprotection until applying for a Completion Certificate for the Works. Nomasking tape or the like shall come into contact with finished surfaces;

(d) check mechanical items for correct operation, both before and afterinstallation;

(e) set out and install all items in the location according to the Employer’sDrawings, schedules provided and product markings, to the correct hand andwith the correct face showing on each side;

(f) install each item to the supplier’s recommendations with proper tools,including drilling lead holes, etc.;

(g) provide suitable fixings, protect and make good finishes, and handle carefullyto avoid damage;

(h) ensure that each unit is installed to the door for which it is provided; and

(i) mount each universal arm type, surface mounted overhead closer body on thedoor face where it is least visible.

36.7.3 Fixing Ironmongery

(a) The Contractor shall form mortise and holes for lock cases, furniture and thelike using proper routers, jigs and templates, removing a minimum of materialbut in no case shall the fire, acoustic, security and other performancerequirements be comprised.

(b) All mortising of doors and frames shall be carefully carried out especially itemsmortised into half-hour fire rated doors and frames such that their fire-ratedperformance shall not be invalidated. Items mortised into one-hour fire rateddoors and frames shall be protected by intumescent materials. For locks andlatches this protection shall comprise a layer of intumescent sheet  on eachside of the lock or latch case. Any other mortised items shall be painted with

intumescent paint before installation.

(c) Screws shall be properly inserted to drilled pilot holes by a screwdriver with acorrect size. Screws shall not be hammered in.

(d) Lever handles shall be fitted to roses by screw thread fixing and bycountersunk screws to the spindle. The roses or back plates shall be fittedback to back with countersunk head back to back through fixings. All othervisible fixings shall have countersunk heads.

(e) Screws shall be replaced when burred during installation. Where required,screw or bolt threads shall be plugged to suit the construction.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 213/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

(f) The Contractor shall adjust, clean and lubricate all items after installation tosupplier recommendations and the requirements of the Specification; replaceitems or fixings damaged during installation; protect surfaces after installationfrom dirt and damage.

36.7.4 Restrictions on the Fitting of Ironmongery

The Contractor shall not:

(a) alter, or permit to be altered, any item without the manufacturer’s writtenapproval, particularly any component which might affect fire, smoke oracoustic control ratings, including planing or trimming of any door edge, ordamage any intumescent or other seals or any glass item.

(b) remove any permanent marking affixed to a component to indicate fire, smokeor acoustic performance;

(c) apply masking tape, or the like to finished surfaces but remove ironmongeryand accessories before executing any subsequent background finishing orrepair process; and

(d) use harsh brushes, abrasives or chemicals on finished surfaces but maintainas follows:

(i) timber finishes: wipe with mild detergent and dry, using soft cloths.

(ii) anodised aluminium: wipe with medium strength detergent, on softcloths.

(iii) stainless steel: wipe with medium strength detergent or white spirit, onsoft cloths. The Contractor shall not use chlorine-based cleaners, ortreat nearby finishes with acids or other chemicals to avoid tarnishing.

36.7.5 Magnetic Door Locks

(a) Where specified, the Contractor shall fit all security doors with magnetic doorlocks and wiring to the access control system.

(b) Magnetic locks shall be of a concealed type or surface mounted type.

(c) The Contractor shall check that door setting out tolerances does not affect

efficiency of the magnetic lock system. Magnetic locks shall also comply withthe provisions of GMWS Section 104 – Access Control System.

36.7.6 Packing

(a) The Contractor shall supply ironmongery suitably boxed and delivered in setswhere appropriate and marked in a manner to suit site installationrequirements.

(b) When ironmongery is delivered in sets, each set shall be bagged and labelledwith the door number to which it is to be fixed.

(c) The Contractor shall supply all items with appropriate fixing screws of a lengthand pattern to suit the construction. Screws shall be cross-headed andpackaged with their components.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 214/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 36 - Ironmongery

36.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 

Refer to section 35 architectural metalwork.

36.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE 

36.9.1 Operations and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual forironmongery including, but not limited to, one complete set of manufacturer's fixingdetails for all components, wiring diagrams and maintenance instructions.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 215/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

SECTION 37 HARD FLOOR FINISHES

37.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of hard floorfinishes which generally comprise:

(a) granite paving:

(b) resin bonded floor tiling;

(c) screeds;

(d) quarry floor tiling ;

(e) epoxy wearing surface;

(f) ceramic floor tiling ; and

(g) hard flooring accessories.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(h) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(i) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(j) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(k) architectural metalwork refer to section 35

(l) flexible floor finishes refer to section 38

(m) wall finishes refer to section 39; and

(n) sanitary fittings refer to section 95.

37.2 NOT USED

37.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

The Standards and Codes of Practice specified in this section are listed below forinformation only. The Contractor shall comply with the edition of the Standard orCode of Practice listed in the text when stated, or the latest edition when no editionis listed.

 AS 1428.4 Tactile ground surface indicators for the orientation ofpeople with vision impairment

Buildings Department Design Manual Barrier Free Access 1997

BS 12 Specification for Portland cements

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 216/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

BS 146 Specification for Portland blast furnace cement

BS 410 Specification for test sieves

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 882 Specification for aggregates from natural sources for

concreteBS 890 Specification for building limes

BS 1197 Part 2 Concrete floor tile and fittings

BS 1199 and 1200 Specification for building sands from natural sources

BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete

BS 4027 Specification for sulphate resisting Portland cement

BS 4131 Terrazzo tiles

BS 4483 Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement ofconcrete

BS 4721 Specification for ready mixed building mortars

BS 4887 Mortar admixtures

BS 5224 Specification for masonry cement

BS 5262 Code of practice for external renderings

BS 5385 Code of practice for the design and installation ofterrazzo tile and slab, natural stone, and compositionblock floorings

BS 5492 Code of practice for internal plastering

BS 6319 Testing of resin and polymer/cement compositions for

use in constructionBS 6431 Ceramic floor and wall tiles

BS 6717 Parts 1 and 3 Pre-cast concrete paving blocks

BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites

BS 8203 Code of practice for installation of sheet and tile flooring

BS8204 Screeds, bases and in-situ floorings

BS EN 176 See BS 6431: Part 6 for BI Tiles

CP 118 The structural use of aluminium

37.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

37.4.1 Design Input from the Contractor

The Contractor shall:

(a) install the hard floor finishes as specified on the Employer’s Drawings andshall provide a written method statement showing his intended use ofmaterials and workmanship to satisfy the performance criteria of theSpecification;

(b) select suitable materials, (thickness, type, fixings and sealants), in compliancewith the design and visual intent shown on the Employer's Drawings;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 217/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(c) design all beds and determine all movements and tolerances of the granitepaving relating to the primary structure, accommodating all performancerequirements as specified;

(d) provide a very high quality of workmanship on these elements to ensure thatthe final appearance is of a high uniform quality;

(e) provide well finished junctions between the new paving and existing floorfinishes as shown on the Employer’s Drawings;

(f) ensure that the hard floor finishes achieve the slip resistance specified in theParticular Technical Specification and the relevant codes and standards forthe particular hard floor finish; and

(g) design all movement joints, waterproofing to movement joints and interfaceswith movement joints. All movement joints shall have a bridging membrane toensure that any liquid entering the joint cannot discharge anywhere except at

specifically provided drain outlets

37.4.2 Performance Criteria for Granite Paving

(a) The Contractor shall ensure that the finished floor is within ±5 mm of thefinished floor level datum.

(b) Unless shown otherwise, the dimensional composition of granite pavingfinishes shall be:

(i) nominal 100 mm overall,

(ii) comprising 30 mm granite floor tile and 70 mm screed.

(c) The granite paving finish shall accommodate the following in floor services:

(i) small power distribution in screed in 25 mm diameter conduits laid onstructural slab;

(ii) pipework;

(iii) 300 mm x 32 mm trunking; and

(iv) access and outlet boxes.

37.4.3 Performance Criteria for Resin Bonded Tiling

Unless specified otherwise, the floor finish zone for resin bonded tiles above theconcrete structure shall be as follows:

(a) waterproofing membrane;

(b) nominal 88 mm screed;

(c) adhesive; and

(d) 12 mm resin bonded floor tiles.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 218/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.4.4 Performance Criteria for Ceramic Tiles and Quarry Tiles

Unless specified otherwise, the finish zone for quarry tile floor finish above theconcrete slab base shall be as follows:

(a) waterproof membrane;

(b) 50 mm mortar bed; and

(c) 25 mm quarry tile.

37.4.5 Design Parameters for Epoxy Wearing Surface

The Contractor shall design the epoxy wearing surface with regard to:

(a) appropriate flooring thickness (with a minimum of 2 mm);

(b) use of proprietary floorings suitable for use in airport conditions,

(c) concrete base preparation requirements;

(d) flooring/concrete adhesion requirements;

(e) any requirements for reinforcement of flooring;

(f) structural movement joints/control/construction details;

(g) method of laying;

(h) skid resistance of surface for the location's end uses indicated herein;

(i) capacity to withstand hydrostatic pressure; and

(j) all interfaces.

37.4.6 Structural Movement

The Contractor shall:

(a) address performance criteria with regard to movements occurring duringinstallation which include, but not limited to:

(i) dimensional composition of floor finishes;

(ii) floor services;

(iii) designed construction tolerances;

(iv) movement joints; and

(v) structural slab finish.

(b) be responsible for the installation and performance of all floor interfaces and isrequired to seek confirmation of movement and loading requirements;

 

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 219/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(c) site structural movement joints immediately over or cantilevered in relation tothe structural joints in the slab.

37.4.7 Design Loadings

The Contractor shall ensure that the paving accommodates the following structuralslab design loads:

(a) imposed live loads:5 kN/m²+ 1 kN/m² (partitions);

(b) dead loads: 3 kN/m² (2.4kN/m² floor finishes including screed, 0.6kN/m² ceilingfinish); and

(c) point loads: 9 kN.

37.5 MATERIALS

37.5.1 Granite Paving

The granite paving works shall include the following:

(a) the provision of natural granite floor tiles to floor slabs, ramps, stair treadsnosings and risers;

(b) the provision of natural granite skirting tiles;

(c) all bedding screeds including reinforcement mesh where required;

(d) all movement joints, stress relief joints and demarcation floor joints;

(e) edge profiles and screed angles;

(f) special applications to highlight guide paths for the blind and disabled;

(g) sundry items, including:

(i) metal cover plates and housing to electrical access and outlet boxes;

(ii) threshold matting and floor grating system;

(iii) miscellaneous metal cover plates at floor interfaces; and

(iv) isolation membranes.

37.5.2 Types of Granite

(a) Type 1:Grey granite, honed or flamed finish shall match Employer’s sampleprovided.

(b) Type 2:Black granite, polished finish shall match the Employer’s sampleprovided.

(c) Type 3:Homogeneous dark grey granite, honed finish shall match theEmployer’s sample provided.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 220/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(d) Type 4:Grey granite, flame textured finish shall match the Employer’s sampleprovided.

(e) Type 5:Black granite, flamed finish shall match the Employer’s sampleprovided.

(f) The control samples shall visually match or be similar to the types describedabove and comply with all performance criteria as specified in theSpecification. Areas of application shall be as shown on the Employer'sDrawings.

37.5.3 Granite Slabs

The Contractor shall:

(a) supply and lay granite slabs to areas indicated on the Employer’s Drawings in

500 mm x 500 mm x 30 mm granite slabs. Other size tiles at interfaces (forexample with external cladding, escalators, moving walkways, lifts, etc.) shallbe as shown on the Employer’s Drawings;

(b) construct the granite stair treads and risers to the profiles shown on theEmployer's Drawings;

(c) obtain a notice of no objection from the Project Manager for the Contractor'sproposed granite slab manufacturer;

(d) use the same type of stone in one enclosed area supplied by the same quarryin quality assured batches; and

(e) cut and pre-finish the upper surface of the slabs prior to delivery.

37.5.4 Movement Joints

(a) All movement joint covers shall have a total horizontal movement capability ofat least 95 mm (+ 60 mm, - 35 mm) unless otherwise specified.

(b) All movement joint covers shall have a total lateral movement capability of 20mm in each direction unless otherwise specified.

(c) The loading capacity of the joint shall be sufficient to support repeated load

from vehicles exerting a total force of 35 kN - this force being applied acrossfour hard rimmed tyres having a contact area of 20 cm x 20 cm. The loadingcapacity of the joint shall comply with the loading criteria specified.

(d) All movement joints covers shall be manufactured from 6063 T6 gradeextruded aluminium or equivalent with a 25µm natural satin anodised finish;and

(e) All joints shall be supplied mitred cut and welded with welds ground flush andpolished to match surrounding metal on exposed faces.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 221/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(f) All movement joint covers shall be proprietary types from one manufacturer,unless otherwise specified on the Employer's Drawings. The Contractor shallobtain a notice of no objection from the Project Manager before materials areordered.

(g) All movement joints shall have a waterproof membrane bridging the jointbonded to the waterproofing either side of the movement joint or, where thereis no waterproofing, bonded to the structural slab either side. The bridgingwaterproof membrane shall be provided with proprietary drain outlets,minimum one per movement joint or one per 20 m length of movement joint,whichever is greater. The drain outlets shall be connected to the drainagesystem as shown on the Employer’s Drawings.

37.5.5 Bedding Screed for Stone Paving

(a) The Contractor shall lay the stone tiles onto a semi-dry bedding screed in sucha manner that future access to electrical conduits or other structural fixings to

the reinforced concrete slab is achieved without breakage. Typical tiles shallbe lifted without breakage, except for the first tile:

(b) Granite paving slabs shall be bedded by the semi-dry mix method. Thebedding mix consists of 1 part of cement to 3.5 to 4 parts of concreting sandby volume. The sand shall comply with BS 882 1983, Table 5, Grade M, andshall have less than 10% of fine material passing a 150 µm BS 410 test sieve.The water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.55, and the water addition shall begauged to produce a mix satisfying the following tests:

(i) when a sample of mortar is squeezed in the hand, the sample retains itsshape and does not crumble, the hand being left slightly moist; and

(ii) when a sample is compacted on the base, no film of water forms on thesurface.

(c) Bedding material shall be ready mixed and 3 no. cubes per week shall betaken for testing purposes.

37.5.6 Types of Resin Bonded Tiling

(a) The Contractor shall utilise the proprietary materials specified, ensuring thatthe resin bonded floor tiles of comply with the specified standards stated in theParticular Technical Specification. The floor tiles supplied and installed shallbe visually similar to the control sample. Areas of installation shall be asshown on the Employer’s Drawings.

(b) Dimensional composition of the resin bonded floor tile finishes:

(i) nominal 600 x 600 floor tile grid where full tiles are used.

(ii) nominal 600 x 300 and 300 x 300 tile grids where half tile and quarter tileare used.

(c) use epoxy resin based adhesive and grout. The grout shall be pigmented to

match the colour of the resin bonded floor tiles as per sample reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 222/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.5.7 Types of screeds

(a) The Contractor shall supply and lay screeds as indicated on the Employer’sDrawings which include:

(i) floor screeds and reinforcement (where required);

(ii) granolithic screed;

(iii) waterproofing additives;

(iv) acid resistant hardener;

(v) chemical resistance additives;

(vi) epoxy insulation coatings;

(vii) protection and covering materials;

(viii) sundry items i.e. - edge angles, metal tread nosings; and

(ix) movement joint covers.

(b) Screeds occur in the following typical locations;

(i) under homogeneous, ceramic, quarry and carpet tiles;

(ii) as granolithic screed on all enclosed concrete staircases and in switchand plant rooms; and

(iii) as exposed screed externally (granolithic screed).

37.5.8 Screeds Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) confirm that all proprietary screeds or proprietary components of screeds havecurrent Agrément Certificates as issued by the British Board of Agrément orsimilar body which has been reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager;

(b) take account of high relative humidity levels that may be encountered on Siteand adjust the curing procedures in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations;

(c) develop screeding details to provide a base which supports the finisheswithout subsequent cracking or loss of grout; and

(d) provide a finish to screeds in areas to be carpeted which shall remain freefrom cracks and not in any way adversely affect carpet finishes or carpetbonding.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 223/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.5.9 Granolithic Screeds

(a) The Contractor shall lay high strength granolithic screed as indicated on theEmployer's Drawings. The floor screed shall be in accordance with BS 8204Part 2 Table 2 and be capable of high wear and abrasion.

(b) The Contractor shall confirm the mix and materials to be used which shall beas follows:

(i) Cement: ordinary Portland to BS 12 or Portland blast furnace incompliance with BS 146.

(ii) Fine aggregate: natural sand of uniform colour in compliance with BS882 grading limit M.

(iii) Coarse aggregate: 10 mm single sized with mechanical properties incompliance with BS 882, clause 4.4.

(iv) The mix proportions of the above shall be 1:1:2. The finish surface shallbe as specified in section 37.5.10 (d) or (e).

37.5.10 Screed Finishes

(a) Wood Floated Finish (as substrate to mortar bed etc.)- The Contractor shalluse a wood float to give an even, but slightly coarse, texture with no ridges orsteps.

(b) Smooth Floated Finish (self finished screed)- The Contractor shall use handfloat, skip float or power float to give an even surface with no ridges or steps.

(c) Trowelled Finish to Receive Applied Floor Finishes (i.e. carpet, vinyl etc.)

The Contractor shall:

(i) float the screed to an even surface with no ridges or steps;

(ii) hand or power trowel the screed to give a uniform smooth appearance,but not polished surface, free from trowel marks and other blemishes,and suitable to receive the specified flooring material; and

(iii) adequately protect the surface from construction traffic.

(d) Trowelled Finish for Wearing Surfaces (granolithic screed, general areas)

The Contractor shall:

(i) float the screed to an even surface with no ridge or steps;

(ii) as soon as the surface is hard, steel trowel by hand or machine; retrowelat least twice at intervals until a hard closed finish is obtained and thereis little or no effect from further trowelling; and

(iii) leave the finished surfaces uniform, smooth and free from trowel marksand other blemishes.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 224/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(e) Non-slip Trowelled Finish for Wearing Surfaces (granolithic screed, areasrequiring safety measures)

The Contractor shall:

(i) float screed to an even surface with no ridges or steps;

(ii) as soon as the surface is hard, steel trowel by hand or machine; retrowelat least twice at intervals until a hard closed finish is obtained and thereis little or no effect from further trowelling;

(iii) leave the finished surfaces uniform, smooth and free from trowel marksand other blemishes; and

(iv) apply silicon carbide or aluminium oxide, graded between BS 410 sieves1.7 mm and 500 µm, sprinkling evenly at the rate of 1 kg/m2  andtrowelled into the surface while the concrete is still plastic.

37.5.11 Quarry Floor Tiling

(a) The Contractor shall install the quarry tile flooring based upon the Employer'sDrawings. The Contractor shall select materials within the range of theprescribed texture pattern and colour, sizes, thickness, types and locations offixings, joints and sealants. Quarry floor tiling works shall include the followingelements:

(i) quarry tiles 194 mm x 194 mm x 25 mm;

(ii) mortar beds and/or sub screeds;

(iii) waterproofing to floor;

(iv) stress relief joints;

(v) retaining angles, screed angles;

(vi) sundry items ; and

(vii) quarry skirting tiles 194 mm x 112.5 mm x 12.5 mm.

(b) Quarry tiles shall conform to BS 6431: Parts 1 and 3, with coving to match with joint locations as per Employer's Drawings.

(c) The Contractor shall base the floor tile setting out on the planning grid, alignwith wall tiles and not vary more than ±1.0 mm in all dimensions.

(d) The Contractor shall use tiles that are flat across the surface and straightalong the edges.

(e) The Contractor shall use tiles from a standard range with plain non-slip finish.

(f) All quarry tiles shall be supplied from one manufacturer and applied according

to manufacturer’s written recommendations.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 225/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.5.12 Ceramic Floor Tiling

The Contractor shall:

(a) construct all ceramic tiles in compliance with BS 6431:Parts 1 and 3, withcoving to match with joint locations as shown on Employer's Drawings. Theceramic floor tiling works shall include the following:

(i) the provision of ceramic floor tiling, skirtings and anti-slip stair nosingtiles;

(ii) all concrete preparations including installation of waterproofing whererequired;

(iii) all movement joints/stress relief and demarcation floor joints;

(iv) metal accessories;

(v) all metal angle edge profiles;

(vi) metal frame drain covers;

(vii) protection; and

(viii) testing.

(a) provide ceramic floor tiles with matching calibre with the wall tiles (i.e.: worksize) and shall not vary more than ±0.75 mm in all dimensions;

(b) use tiles that are flat across the surface and straight along the edges;

(b) select tiles from a proprietary range for review without objection by the ProjectManager; and

(c) use ceramic tiles supplied from one manufacturer, combine and use thematerials according to manufacturer’s written recommendations.

37.5.13 Ceramic Tile and Quarry Tile Adhesive

The Contractor shall use the tile adhesive recommended by the manufacturer andapplied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed recommendations.

37.5.14 Epoxy wearing surface

The Contractor shall:

(a) construct the epoxy wearing surface works based upon the Employer'sDrawings; lay two-part epoxy resin bonded wearing course onto the screeding;and

(b) provide uniformity of texture and colour throughout the epoxy wearing surface.The colour shall be reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 226/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.5.15 Edge Profiles- Screed Angles

(a) The Contractor shall retain the floor finish at all edge conditions by means of 5mm thick aluminium angle in compliance with CP 118 as indicated on theEmployer's Drawings. The angles shall be fixed to the structural slab bymeans of M8 zinc plated bolts fixed to socket anchors in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations.

(b) Joints of 2 mm wide shall be filled with a two part polyurethane self-levellingsealant. The sealant shall be compatible, including colour, with all contactingsurfaces i.e. floor slabs, other jointing materials and angles.

(c) The Contractor shall effectively isolate the aluminium angle and any otherassociated aluminium components from the cementitious screed.

37.5.16 Metal Framed Access and Outlet Covers

The Contractor shall:

(a) at the locations shown on the Employer's Drawings, supply and fix recessedaluminium or stainless steel access or outlet covers. These shall consist ofouter frames and cover frames of extruded aluminium alloy or stainless steelsections as specified in the Employer’s Drawings;

(b) use the bolts and anchors of a proprietary type;

(c) fill the access cover with slabs and finishes to match the surrounding floorareas as shown on the Employer's Drawings; and

(d) match the pattern and the colour of the finish to the surrounding floor area.

37.5.17 Electrical Service Penetrations

The Contractor shall grout and seal the electrical outlet boxes in position. The groutshall be as specified herein.

37.5.18 Tactile Tiles

(a) The tactile floor tiles shall be purpose made in accordance with the AustralianStandard, AS 1428.4, with minimal adaptation and shall match the pavingmodules.

(b) The tactile tiles shall be bedded in accordance with the Specification and thesetting bed shall be adequately compacted to avoid "Lipping" of adjacent tiles.

(c) The Contractor shall install tactile tiles with high level of slip resistance.

(d) The Contractor shall install the tactile tiles with the performance criteria forcompressive strength, modulus of rupture, density, absorption, abrasionresistance and flexural strength in accordance with the Specification.

(e) The Contract shall install tactile tiles as shown on the Employer’s Drawingsand in compliance with the Design Manual - Barrier Free Access 2008.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 227/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.6 SUBMISSIONS

37.6.1 Particulars of Hard Floor Finishes

The following particulars of the proposed hard floor finishes shall be submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection before proceeding:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing the layout, fabrication and details of each floorfinish;

(b) copies of the manufacturer's latest published technical literature for thematerials specified;

(c) details of the source, type and properties of material;

(d) details indicating the movement capability and load capacity of all movement joint cover assemblies; and

(e) the suitability of materials used in exterior seals subject to UV exposure.

37.6.2 Stone Samples

The Contractor shall provide samples of each stone type defining the limits ofnatural variation in colour, tone, markings, and impurities within the Works asfollows:

(a) 3 no. slabs 500 mm x 500 mm of the extreme lightest colour of eachprescribed type;

(b) 3 no. slabs 500 mm x 500 mm of the average colour of each prescribed type;

(c) 3 no. slabs 500 mm x 500 mm of the extreme darkest colour of eachprescribed type;

(d) 3 no. samples of each stone type containing the longest acceptable impurity,not being bigger than a Hong Kong 50 cent coin or as acceptable to theProject Manager;

(e) 3 no. samples of the proposed tactile tiles to enable selection of colour and toverify reflectance values and calculate luminance contrast;

(f) one sample 500 mm long of a stair tread to the profile as shown on theEmployer's Drawings;

(g) one sample 500 mm x 500 mm of a T-junction of the movement joint in thespecified finish;

(h) one sample 500 mm long of aluminium angle to the following dimension: 90mm x 90 mm x 6 mm;

(i) one sample of each bolt type as specified;

(j) one sample of each anchor type as specified;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 228/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(k) one sample each type of metal framed access cover;

(l) representative sample of typical control joint; and

(m) samples of all grouts, mastics, sealants and non-slip inserts used.

37.6.3 Screed Samples

The following samples of proposed materials with relevant written trade literaturewhich shall include but not limited to the following shall be submitted to the ProjectManager for review without objection:

(a) 500 mm x 500 mm sample of non-slip granolithic floor finish, and each type ofscreed specified;

(b) a 600 mm length of movement joint cover; and

(c) a 600 mm length of aluminium screed angle.

37.6.4 Ceramic Floor Tile, Resin Bonded Tiles and Quarry Tile Samples

The following samples of proposed materials with relevant written trade literatureshall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection. Sample shallinclude but not limited to the following:

(a) 3 no. of samples for each type of tile (nominal size); and

(b) 600 mm long sample of grout.

37.6.5 Epoxy Wearing Surface Samples

The following samples of proposed materials with relevant written trade literatureshall be submitted to the Project Manager for review without objection. Sample shallinclude but not limited to the following:

(a) 500 mm x 500 mm sample of floor finish; and

(b) 600 mm long sample of relief and grout joint.

37.6.6 Prototypes

The Contractor shall provide 3 no. on-Site areas of each type of finished hard floor,starting with the bedding screed, each 5,625 mm x 6,000 mm in extent incorporatingbay joints. The prototypes shall be reviewed without objection by the ProjectManage to assess the colour, visual quality and consistency of the floor finish.

37.6.7 Benchmarks for Stone

(a) The Contractor shall provide, at locations to be determined by the ProjectManager, one benchmark area of finished floor incorporating granite slabs.The extent of the areas shall be 15 m x 15 m each and shall commence atslab preparation and incorporate all bay joints, edge profiles, trench accesscovers movement joint covers etc.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 229/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 15/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(b) These benchmark areas shall be reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager. No laying of the remaining granite paving shall be commenced untila notice of no objection is issued by the Project Manager.

37.6.8 Benchmarks for Screeds and Epoxy Wearing Surfaces

(a) The Contractor shall provide, at locations to be determined by the ProjectManager, one 3,000mm x 3,000mm bay of each type of screed and epoxywearing surface finish as indicated on the Employer's Drawings. Thebenchmark area shall incorporate a structural movement joint and cover, anda typical screed angle edge.

(b) These benchmark areas shall be reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager. No laying of the remaining epoxy wearing surfaces shall becommenced until a notice of no objection is issued by the Project Manager.

37.6.9 Benchmarks for Ceramic Floor Tiling and Quarry Tiling

(a) The Contractor shall provide, at locations to be determined by the ProjectManager, 3.0 m x 3.0 m area of each ceramic floor tile and quarry tiling typeas indicated on the Employer's Drawings.

(b) These benchmark areas shall be reviewed by the Project Manager. No layingof the remaining ceramic floor tiling and /or quarry tiling shall be commenceduntil a notice of no objection is issued by the Project Manager.

37.7 WORKMANSHIP

37.7.1 Design and Construction Tolerances for Granite Paving

The overall thickness of bedding and granite shall not vary from the nominalthickness shown on the Employer’s Drawings by more than 5mm.

37.7.2 Condition of Structural Slab

Prior to commencement of the hard floor finishes, the Contractor shall confirm to theProject Manager that the existing surfaces are sufficiently flat to obtain the specifiedflatness of finished surfaces, considering the permissible minimum and maximumthickness of the bedding material.

37.7.3 Levelling the Base

The Contractor shall supply and lay a levelling screed where required.

37.7.4 Laying Movement Joints

(a) The Contractor shall fix structural movement joint covers in accordance withthe detailed Employer's Drawings and floor plans, following the manufacturer'srecommendations and installation guidelines.

(b) All visible joints shall be accurately aligned relative to grid lines and co-ordinated with the grid of the floor tiles.

(c) Joint covers shall be either invisibly spliced or joint sections staggered suchthat the joint is continuously linked.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 230/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 16/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(d) The Contractor shall set the horizontal width of the movement joint at the timeof installation taking account of thermal expansion at time of installation.

(e) Movement joint covers shall be affixed to the base (and upstands) by meansof expanding bolt anchors at centres recommended by the movement jointmanufacturer. All anchor bolts shall be zinc plated.

(f) Movement joint covers shall be fixed such that the upper surface of the jointshall finish flush with the top of adjacent floor finishes.

37.7.5 Laying Granite Slabs and Bedding

The Contractor shall:

(a) lay the granite tiles in bays; check control dimensions are aligned with theplanning grid as shown on the Employer’s drawings;

(b) follow the direction of grain indicated on the Employer’s Drawings andmaintain this grain direction when the stone is laid throughout the Works;

(c) thoroughly brush clean and soak with clean water the base concrete surfacestwenty-four hours prior to laying slabs. Pools of surplus water shall beremoved prior to applying slurry:

(i) Immediately prior to laying the bedding, a neat cement/water slurry of acreamy consistency shall be thoroughly scrubbed into the dampconcrete substrate.

(ii) The finished floor level shall be established with dots and rules. The firstlayer of bedding shall be laid within twenty minutes of slurrying andcompacted with a wooden screeders float to provide an acceptable basefor the second bed. The first bed shall be a nominal 40 mm thickness.

(iii) The second layer of bedding shall then be laid to a surcharge to give acompacted nominal thickness of 30 mm. No more than 2 hours shallelapse between the two layers of bedding. The degree of surcharge ofthe second shall be determined by initial trials.

(d) immediately after laying the second bed, coat the back face of the granitepaving slabs with a brush; applied neat latex modified cement/water slurry of a

thick creamy consistency; place slab onto the bedding, care being taken toavoid depression of bedding at the corners, and are driven to level with arubber mallet;

(e) constantly supervise screeded bed compaction to obtain consistency incompaction of the bed, particularly with reference to the hand float compactionof the lower layer and provision of correct surcharge of the upper layer; and

(f) not carry out Site cutting without the express permission of the ProjectManager. Site cutting shall be by means of electric diamond saws; allow forflat edge grinding for small dimensional fit. All Site cut edges of the granitetiles shall be straight and devoid of chips and spallings on the finished side.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 231/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 17/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.7.6 Grouting and Finishing of Granite Slabs

The Contractor shall:

(a) use latex modified grout. The grout shall be pigmented to match the colour ofthe granite slabs as per sample reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager;

(b) firmly set the paving slabs level and bed onto the bedding screed forming 2

mm (±0.5 mm) joints to adjoining slabs;

(c) extrude excess bedding material at the edge not abutting adjacent slabs whenthe granite slabs are driven to their final elevation;

(d) rake and fill the joints solid with grout after bedding the slabs;

(e) recess the top surface of the joint by 1 mm;

(f) ensure that the vertical displacement ("lipping") of adjacent paving slab edgesis not greater than 1 mm;

(g) ensure that void within the bedding does not exceed 5% of the area of theslab, does not lie within 20 mm of the edge of the slab, nor within 20 mm ofother voids and that the sum of the longest and shortest dimension of any voidshall not exceed 60 mm;

(h) cover the floor surface with polythene batten protected at edges, remainingcompletely untrafficked for 48 hours save for passage of floor layers on footand finishing operations and shall not expose the floor surface to the

maximum loadings for 28 days;

(i) ensure that the floor is protected prior to issue of the associated CompletionCertificate;

(j) on application for the Completion Certificate, ensure that the finished level of

the floor is to a datum ±2 mm at all interfaces and to datum ±3 mm betweeninterfaces; and

(k) no gaps greater than 2 mm shall be permitted beneath a 3 m metal straightedge placed firmly anywhere on the finished floor.

37.7.7 Granite Tile Finish

The Contractor shall:

(a) construct the finishes of tiles to the grades shown on sample tiles which havereceived a notice of no objection from the Project Manager;

(b) provide honed finish tiles to all general circulation areas;

(c) provide black tiles with a polished finish to all accent paving to the generalcirculation areas;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 232/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 18/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(d) where non-slip functions are required, provide flamed finish tiles to the designpattern as shown on the Employer's Drawings; and

(e) grout stair nosings with carborundum inserts. The colour of the carborundumstrips shall be matt black.

37.7.8 Staircase Treads and Risers

The Contractor shall:

(a) bed the slabs directly on to concrete or steel staircase structure by means ofun-reinforced ordinary Portland cement/sand screed. All laitance shall beremoved to expose coarse aggregate before applying a styrene butylenerubber bonding slurry prior to screeding. Where indicated on the Employer'sDrawings stainless steel mechanical fixings shall be used for fixings of thetreads; and

(b) incorporate the stair non-slip tread inserts, bonded into pre-cut grooves tomanufacturer's recommendations, located in tread profile as shown on theEmployer’s Drawings.

37.7.9 Laying Resin Bonded Floor Tiling

The Contractor shall:

(a) lay the resin bonded floor tiles onto a solid, level and at acceptable level ofmoisture content bedding screed. From the laying of the screed a period oftime (approx. 1 week per cm of thickness) must elapse before proceeding toinstallation of tiles;

(b) install the tile by adhesive strictly in accordance with the tile manufacturer’srecommended methods, which has been submitted for review withoutobjection by the Project Manager;

(c) apply the adhesive strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommended methods;

(d) form flexible bay joints base on the tiling grid as shown on the Employer'sDrawings;

(e) make the bay joint nominally 5 mm wide ±1 mm and fill with a nominal 4 mm

thick sheet of separating material reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager;

(f) ensure that the depth of the separating sheet material (compressible spacer)is as shown on the Employer's Drawings and shall reach at least to the top ofthe structural slab to avoid bridging of the bedding screed to the adjacent bay;

(g) use rectangular strips of closed cell polyethylene foam backing materials as abacking strip for the mastic sealant;

(h) ensure that a full depth open joint of 3 mm is left at the floor perimeter andinterfaces with the skirting tile or the concrete columns. The joint shall befinished similar to a bay joints;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 233/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 19/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(i) point the joints with an epoxy resin based sealant which is compatible with theresin bonded floor tiles. The colour of the bay joints shall be grey to match thetile as per samples previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager;

(j) construct joints with the nominal depth of 10 mm;

(k) apply the mastic by gun;

(l) prior to the application of the mastic, prime the faces of the tiles to themanufacturer's recommendations;

(m) tape edges of the tiles on either side of joints before application of jointsealant;

(n) recess the top surface of the flexible bay joint filler by 1 mm;

(o) finish the mastic joint flush with the surrounding tile;

(p) install the through coloured mastic to match the colour of the resin bondedfloor tiles and avoid colour variation, mottling or unevenness of finish;

(q) ensure that the same type of tile in one enclosed area is supplied by the samemanufacturer in quality assured batches; ascertain and satisfy the ProjectManager that the resin bonded floor tiles supply source achieves the quantityof paving in the above areas; and

(r) if the tiles have an inherent manufactured pattern lay all tiles with the patternorientating in the same direction consistently throughout the works.

37.7.10 Screed Workmanship Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide a standard of workmanship which complies with BS 8000: Part 9(Code of Practice for cement/sand floor screeds and concrete floor toppings);

(b) not alter the screed to accommodate other trades unless such work is clearlyspecified on the Employer's Drawings or subsequently receives a notice of noobjection from the Project Manager; and

(c) carry out all finishing operations at optimum times in relation to the setting andhardening of the material and shall not wet surfaces to assist surface workingor sprinkle cement onto the surface.

37.7.11 Level, Flatness and Tolerance for Floor Screeds

(a) The Contractor shall restrict the permissible deviation in level of surface ofscreeds (allowing for thickness of coverings) and toppings from datum to 3mm; avoid sudden irregularities in level.

(b) When measured with a slip gauge in accordance with BS 8204: Part 1, Figure

3 or equivalent, the variation in gap under a straightedge (with feet) placedanywhere on the surface shall be not more than the following:

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 234/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 20/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(i) screeds to receive dust sealer:

5 mm under a 3 m straightedge;

(ii) screeds to receive sheet or tile finishes bedded in adhesive:

5 mm under a 3 m straightedge; and2 mm under a 1 m straightedge.

(iii) enclosed staircases:

2 mm under a 1 m straightedge.

(iv) screeds to receive carpet finish:

2 mm under a 3 m straightedge.

37.7.12 Batching of Screed Mixes The Contractor shall specify the proportions of mixes made with dense aggregatesby weight. Volume batching shall only be permitted on the basis of the previouslyestablished weight: volume relationship(s) of the particular materials using accurategauge boxes.

37.7.13 Mixing Screeds

The Contractor shall:

(a) use only admixtures which do not contain calcium chloride;

(b) use only the minimum necessary water content of mixes to achieve fullcompaction, low enough to prevent excessive water being brought to thesurface during compaction;

(c) thoroughly mix materials to a uniform consistency. Mixes other than no-finesshall be mixed in a suitable forced action mechanical mixer. A free fall type(drum) mixer shall not be permitted and hand mixing shall not be permitted;and

(d) use material that is sufficiently plastic for full compaction.

37.7.14 Screed Additives

The Contractor shall:

(a) where shown on the Employer's Drawings, incorporate a proprietarywaterproof compound within the screed mix, all in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations, to provide a completely waterproof surfaceto the screed;

(b) incorporate chemical/acid resistant additives into the screed mix, asrecommended by the manufacturer for the applications indicated on theEmployer's Drawings;

(c) ensure that all additives are suitable for their intended purpose and are at alltimes compatible with all constituent, adjacent materials and finishes.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 235/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 21/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.7.15 Suitability of Bases to Receive Screeds

The Contractor shall:

(a) before commencement of work, verify that bases are flat enough to permitspecified levels and flatness of finished surfaces, considering the permissibleminimum and maximum thickness of the screed/topping.

(b) clean bases of plaster, dirt, dust and oil; and

(c) verify that bases are dry enough for applying the screed to achieve thespecified requirements.

37.7.16 Bonded Screed Construction

The Contractor shall:

(a) shortly before laying the screed, completely remove mortar matrix from thesurface of the concrete to expose the coarse aggregate over the entire area ofthe hardened base slab using abrasive blasting or, pneumatic scabbling(for in-situ slabs only). All dust and debris shall be removed;

(b) keep the base slab well wetted for several hours before laying the screed;remove free water and then brush in the recommended bonding agent cementslurry;

(c) lay the screed while the slurry is still wet to ensure a good bond; and

(d) comply with the requirements of BS 8204.

37.7.17 Laying and Joints in Screeds

The Contractor shall:

(a) unless otherwise specified, cast screeds continuously as far as possiblewithout defined joints using 'wet screeds' between strips or bays; co-ordinateand confirm the positions of bay joints as shown on the Employer’s Drawings;

(b) where the location of bay joints is not shown on the Employer’s Drawings,confirm bay joint locations with the Project Manager before commencing work;

(c) where applicable, form square edged with surfaces securely fixed; compactthoroughly at edges to give level, closely abutted joints with no lipping.

37.7.18 Conduits into Screed

The Contractor shall:

(a) form-up haunches in cement and sand in a ratio of 1:4 on both sides ofconduits before laying the screeds. A minimum cover of 20 mm over theconduit shall be provided. The conduit shall be solidly bedded in mortar andfixed securely to the concrete slab; and

(b) overlay conduits which are cast into screeds with a 500 mm wide strip of steelfabric in compliance BS 4483, reference D49. The reinforcement shall beplaced at mid depth between the top of the conduit and the screed surface.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 236/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 22/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.7.19 Level, Flatness and Tolerance for Ceramic Tiles and Quarry Tiles

(a) permissible deviation in level from datum for all floors shall be a maximum of±10 mm over 3 m. The Contractor shall provide adequate falls to drainageoutlets in wet areas as shown on Employer’s drawing.

(b) The Contractor shall ensure that sudden irregularities do not occur. Thevariation in gap under a 2 m straight edge (with feet) placed anywhere on thesurface shall not be more than ±3 mm when measured with a slip gauge inaccordance with BS 8204: Part 1, Figure 3 or equivalent.

37.7.20 Preparation of Bases for Ceramic Tiles and Quarry Tiling

The Contractor shall:

(a) wash and brush the concrete floor slab and leave it free from pools of water,oil, curing agents, loose particles, laitance, dust etc.;

(b) apply a slurry bond coat of neat cement/water to the prepared slab with adepth of no less than 1.5 mm;

(c) not allow the slurry bond coat to skin over before a semi-dry, well compacted,3:1 sand/cement screed is applied. The screed shall be cured for 28 daysminimum; and

(d) fix the tiles using a proprietary adhesive mortar incorporating epoxy resin andhardener previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

37.7.21 Joint Widths for Quarry Tiles

The Contractor shall provide nominal 6 mm wide joints between tiles that arecontrolled by using spacer pegs.

37.7.22 Joint Widths for Ceramic Tiles

The Contractor shall provide nominal 3 mm wide joints between tiles controlled byusing spacer pegs.

37.7.23 Setting Out and Joints for Ceramic Tiles and Quarry Tiles

The Contractor shall:

(a) survey the areas for tile flooring to establish the setting out point for the floorand wall tiles. All floor and wall tiles shall be set out on a modular gridreflecting the tile module and both surfaces shall be co-ordinated onto this gridas indicated on the Employer's Drawings;

(b) make joints to line, continuous and without steps;

(c) make joints in floors parallel to the main axis of the space or specifiedfeatures;

(d) keep cut tiles/slabs to a minimum;

(e) keep joints in walls and floors in alignment;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 237/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 23/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(f) provide nominal 6 mm wide joints between tiles controlled by using spacerpegs;

(g) provide relief joints every 4 m. Such joints shall be neoprene extrusions withextruded aluminium edges; and

(h) provide a 10 mm mastic joint around the perimeter of all rooms.

37.7.24 Fixing Ceramic Tiles and Quarry Tiles Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) avoid unintended colour/shade variations within the tiles for use in eacharea/room by thoroughly mixing variegated tiles;

(b) use an adhesive which is compatible with the background/base;

(c) fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the background/base andtile backs;

(d) provide edge details as indicated on the Employer's Drawings;

(e) construct the finished floor flat and at a consistent level as indicated on

Employer's Drawings ± 3 mm with a maximum difference of 2 mm over any 3metre length. There shall be no lips between adjacent tiles;

(f) ensure that, where floor finishes abut other floor finishes, the junction is levelwith all joints aligned, as detailed and specified on the Employer's Drawings;

(g) cut the perimeter of the floor or around openings, obstacles, etc. and trim inaccordance with details shown on the Employer's Drawings. The tiles shall beset out from the centre of the room. All cuts shall be made with a diamondtipped wet saw, and all exposed cut edges shall match uncut tiles;

(h) set out the gullies at the joint of four tiles as shown on the Employer'sDrawings;

(i) before the bedding material sets, make adjustments necessary to give aregular appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lightingconditions;

(j) clean surplus bedding material from the joints and face of tiles withoutdisturbing the tiles;

(k) Within the maintenance duct zones, treat the floor slabs using water resistantcoating, laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions;

(l) provide adhesion over the whole tile area; and

(m) when joints are hard, clean and protect the whole tile flooring.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 238/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 24/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.7.25 Grout for Ceramic Tiles and Quarry Tiles

The Contractor shall:

(a) use acid resistant epoxy grout, waterproof, sanitized and matching the tiles.The grout shall not be applied until the bedding material has hardened. The joints shall be a minimum of 5 mm deep and free from dust and debris. All joints shall be completely filled, tooled to a profile reviewed by the ProjectManager without objection and wiped down to leave a surface free fromblemishes;

(b) grout the tiles as soon as set firm using a grout previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager, colour shall be as reviewed samples;

(c) grout all joints to the full depth of the tile; remove all debris from the tile jointsprior to grouting. The width of the grouting joint shall vary from the specified joint width by more that +/-1 mm and any deviations shall be non-accumulative;

(d) ensure that the grout joint is a 'washed' joint. The grouting shall be washed outto the bottom line of the arrise; and

(e) install a waterproof membrane where indicated on the Employer's Drawings.Waterproofing shall be applied liquid (painted) as manufacturer's printedrecommendations.

37.7.26 Level, Flatness and Tolerance for the Epoxy Wearing Surface The Contractor shall:

(a) restrict the permissible deviation from datum for all floors to a maximum of ±5mm over 3 m;

(b) avoid sudden irregularities. The variation in gap under a straightedge (withfeet) placed anywhere on the surface when measured with a slip gauge inaccordance with BS 8204: Part 1, Figure 3 or equivalent shall not be morethan the following:

Wearing Course: 5 mm under a 3 m straightedge2 mm under a 1 m straightedge

37.7.27 Preparation for the Epoxy Wearing Surface

The Contractor shall:

(a) before the application of the epoxy wearing surface, confirm to the ProjectManager that the existing surfaces are suitable for the application of the epoxywearing surfaces;

(b) prepare the bases by dust free grit blasting (vacuum blasting) to remove alltraces of surface laitance, dirt, dust and oil. Allow surface to dry; and

(c) apply primer in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions to allsurfaces and remove all loose material before application. The primer shall be

a solvent free epoxy resin ground coat or a trowelling ground coat to ensurefull coverage.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 239/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 25/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.7.28 Application of the Epoxy Wearing Surface

The Contractor shall apply the epoxy wearing surface coating strictly in accordancewith the manufacturer's written instructions and shall:

(a) seed with natural crushed and fire dried emery grain;

(b) sweep off and seal with epoxy sealer, after hardening;

(c) confirm that the finished coating has the following properties:

(i) adhesion to concrete minimum 1.5 N/mm²;

(ii) compressive strength greater than 50 N/mm²;

(iii) flexural strength greater than 25 N/mm²;

(iv) modulus of elasticity less than 10,000 N/mm²; and

(v) flammability: self extinguishing;

(d) restrict the use of day joints to a minimum, but where required, form them atchanges of direction, abutments or movement joints;

(e) not apply coatings in wet weather or when the temperature is below 5°C; avoidthe application of coatings in direct sunlight and protect coatings from rain forat least 24 hours after application;

(f) ensure that surfaces appear smooth with no ridges or surface imperfections;

and

(g) unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, protect the surface from wind,draughts and strong sunlight immediately after laying; and avoid trafficking ofthe area until the material is fully cured.

37.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

37.8.1 Testing Stone Paving

The Contractor shall:

(a) confirm that the source of each material chosen can provide the quantity andconsistent quality of material required at the required rates of production;

(b) confirm that the source of each material chosen complies with the followingtechnical criteria of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

(i) C97 Density of material > 2,560 kg/m³;

(ii) C97 Co-efficient of water absorption < 0.4%;

(iii) C99 Modulus of rupture> 10.34 Mpa;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 240/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 26/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(iv) C170 Compressive strength > 131 Mpa; and

(v) C880 Flexural strength > 131 Mpa; and

(c) provide evidence of the quarrying and manufacturing capability including:

(i) quarry /manufacturing process;

(ii) availability of stone;

(iii) output of quarry;

(iv) output of processing plant;

(v) batching and numbering;

(vi) methods of transportation and storage;

(vii) future availability of stone; and

(viii) previous experience.

37.8.2 Testing Screeds

The Contractor shall:

(a) test the level and surface irregularity of the screeds to verify that they arewithin the tolerances stated in the Specification using the method described in Appendix A of BS 8204 Part 2. The Contractor shall conduct this test at the

frequency of one test per 100 m² of screed;

(b) test the adhesion between the screed and the substrate by tapping the surfacewith a hammer. A hollow sound indicates poor adhesion and the Contractorshall carefully cut out the defective area paying particular attention to serviceswithin the screed and relay the screed. The re-laid area will be tested again foradhesion;

(c) conduct

(d) the adhesion test at edges and corners of bays, and

(e) verify the soundness of the screed to be category A as defined by BS 8203Table 1 by using the BRE Screed tester described in Appendix C.

37.8.3 Testing Quarry Tiling

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide documentary evidence to the Project Manager that the quarry tilesrecommended for use by the Contractor have been subjected to the followingtests and have achieved satisfactory results:

(i) determine the dimensions of the quarry tiles in accordance with BS 6431Part 10;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 241/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 27/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(ii) determine the surface quality of the quarry tiles in accordance with BS6431 Part 10;

(iii) determine the water absorption of the quarry tiles in accordance with BS6431 Part 11;

(iv) determine the modulus of rupture of the quarry tiles in accordance withBS 6431 Part 12;

(v) determine the scratch hardness of the quarry tiles in accordance with BS6431 Part 13;

(vi) determine the resistance to deep abrasion of the quarry tiles inaccordance with BS 6431 Part 14;

(vii) determine the co-efficient of linear thermal expansion of the quarry tilesin accordance with BS 6431 Part 15;

(viii) determine the resistance to thermal shock of the quarry tiles inaccordance with BS 6431 Part 16;

(ix) determine the chemical resistance of the quarry tiles in accordance withBS 6431 Part 18; and

(x) determine the moisture expansion of the quarry tiles in accordance withBS 6431 Part 21;

(b) check the flatness of the finished floor in accordance with BS 5385 Part 3clause 23.4; and

(c) check the deviation in tile surfaces at either side of tile joints to verify that it iswithin the limits set down in BS 5385: Part 3 clause 23.4.

37.8.4 Testing Ceramic Tiles

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide documentary evidence to the Project Manager that the ceramic floortiles recommended for use by the Contractor have been subjected to thefollowing tests and have achieved satisfactory results;

(i) determine the dimensions of the ceramic floor tiles in accordance withBS 6431 part 10;

(ii) determine the surface quality of the ceramic floor tiles in accordancewith BS 6431 part 10;

(iii) determine the water absorption of the ceramic floor tiles in accordancewith BS 6431 part II;

(iv) determine the modulus of rupture of the ceramic floor tiles in accordancewith BS 6431 part 12;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 242/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 28/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

(v) determine the scratch hardness of the ceramic floor tiles in accordancewith BS 6431 part 13;

(vi) determine the co-efficient of linear thermal expansion of the ceramicfloor tiles in accordance with BS 6431 part 15;

(vii) determine the resistance to thermal shock of the ceramic floor tiles inaccordance with BS 6431 part 16;

(viii) determine the chemical resistance of the ceramic floor tiles inaccordance with BS 6431 part 19;

(ix) determine the crazing resistance of the ceramic floor tiles in accordancewith BS 6431 part 17; and

(x) determine the resistance to surface abrasion of the ceramic floor tiles inaccordance with BS 6431 part 20;

(b) check the flatness of the finished floor in accordance with BS 5385 to verifythat it is within the limits defined in clause 2.8.6.232; and

(c) check the deviation in the surfaces at either side of the joints to verify that it iswithin the limits set down in BS 5385 part 3 clause 23.4.

37.8.5 Testing Epoxy Wearing Surface

The Contractor shall:

(a) conduct one pull-off test per 100m² to verify that adhesion to the substrate is a

minimum of 1.5 N/mm² and log according to ISO9000;

(b) test the compressive strength of the coating in accordance with BS 6319 Part2 to verify that it exceeds 50N/mm². The Contractor shall conduct three ofthese tests for each batch of material;

(c) test the flexural strength of the coating in accordance with BS 6319 Part 3 toverify that it exceeds 25 N/mm². The Contractor shall conduct three of thesetests for each batch of material; and

(d) test the modulus of elasticity of the coating in accordance with BS 6319 Part 3to verify that it is less than 10,000 N/mm².

37.8.6 Testing of Movement Joint Covers

The Contractor shall submit independent Test Certificates and reports from aindependent testing laboratory, previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager, indicating and interpreting test results relative to the compliance of themovement joint specified in the Specification.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 243/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 29/29 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 37 – Hard Floor Finishes

37.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

37.9.1 Protection

The Contractor shall provide protection to the entire installed hard floor tile area (i.e.100% coverage of the installed area) which shall be maintained until SubstantialCompletion of the Project. The protection system shall include without limitation thefollowing:

(a) chipboard density 600 – 650 kg/cm ( 15 mm thick x 2,440 x 1,220mm)

(b) softboard density average 300 kg/cm ( 12 mm thick x 2,440 x 1,220mm); and

(c) polythene sheeting, multifold to give sheet width of 4 Lm ( 1,000 gauge (250micron) x 25 m roll length).

37.9.2 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual for hard floorfinishes including, but not limited to, particulars of material manufacturers, quarrysource of stone, material finishes, hard floor finish composition, movement joints,expansion joints, access panels, adhesives, sealers, grouts and cleaningrequirements.

37.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

The Contractor shall allow for the provision of 20 no or 2%, whichever is the greater,of the total quantity of each floor tile as spares. The Contractor shall provide the

Project Manager with his recommendations in respect of storage of the tiles.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 244/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 245/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  1/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

SECTION 38 FLEXIBLE FLOOR FINISHES

38.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of flexible floor

finishes which generally comprise:

(a) vinyl tiles;

(b) vinyl sheets (including cushioned vinyl);

(c) carpeting;

(d) carpet tiles;

(e) raised access flooring; and

(f) accessories

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(g) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(h) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(i) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(j) architectural metalwork refer to section 35;

(k) hard floor finishes refer to section 37;

(l) wall finishes refer to section 39; and

(m) sanitary fittings refer to section 95.

38.2 NOT USED

38.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476 Fire tests on buildings materials and structure

BS 1006 Light testing of carpet

BS 1711 Solid rubber flooring

BS 1982 Fungal resistance of panel products

BS 2677 Testing of pile yarn

BS 3260 Semi flexible PVC (vinyl) floor tiles

BS 3261 Un backed flexible PVC flooring

BS 3661/20 Testing of organic solventsBS 4052 Testing of thickness loss

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 246/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  2/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

BS 4098 Testing of pile thickness recovery

BS 4223 Carpet tufts

BS 4682 Carpet dimensional stability

BS 4790 Flammability

BS 4797 Moth/ insect proofing

BS 5085 Part 2 and 3 Cellular PVC backed flexible PVC Flooring

BS 5325 Code of practice for installation of textile floorcoverings

BS 5588 Fire precaution in the design, construction, and use ofoffice buildings

BS 5808 Underlays for textile wall coverings

BS 6266 Code of practice for the fire protection of electronicdata processing installations

38.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

38.4.1 Design Input by the Contactor  

The Contractor shall install the flexible floor finishes based upon the Employer'sDrawings and the requirements of the Specification. The Contractor shall selectmaterials within the range of the prescribed texture pattern and colour, sizes,thicknesses, types and locations of fixings, support system, joints and sealants all inaccordance with the Specification.

38.4.2 Structural Requirements of Raised Access Floors

Raised Access Floor shall comply with the following requirements:

(a) Uniformly distributed load - 12.0 KN/m2.

(b) Concentrated load - 4 KN over 25 mm2.

(c) Deflection shall not be more than 1/250 of the shortest span or 225 mmwhichever is less, up or down from the unloaded plane when subjected to theloadings mentioned above, for a period of 24 hours.

(d) The system shall sustain for 5 minutes, 3 times the specified static loadingswithout collapse, at any position in the panel.

(e) Base area of the pedestal shall not be less than 10,000 mm2 and shall be fixedto the floors by mechanical means in addition to adhesives.

(f) Pedestals shall not be permanently deformed by more than 1.00 mm per 100mm in height when subjected to a steady horizontal moment of 90 mm up to amaximum applied load of 50 Kg, applied to the uppermost part for 5 minutes.

(g) Pedestals shall sustain a vertical load of 4 x 18 KN over an area of 50 x 50mm for a period of 5 minutes without collapse and 3 x 13.5 KN applied through

a panel over one quadrant of the head.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 247/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  3/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(h) Free movement in an unloaded pedestal at the maximum and minimumadjustable position shall not exceed 1.00 mm per 100 mm height. The freemovement shall be induced by the application of a horizontal force of 5 N.

(i) The adjustable device on the pedestal shall be locked and not become loosedue to vibration during the life of the system. It shall be possible to release the

locking by means of a tool if re-adjustment is necessary.

(j) The length of threading for the upper part of the pedestal shall not be less than60 mm.

(k) Where a supplementary support structure is required to accommodatevariations greater than construction tolerances, i.e. to bridge service ductsetc., such bridging shall comply with all the relevant requirements of thespecifications.

38.4.3 Design of the Support System for Raised Floor System

The Contractor shall:

(a) note that the details shown on the Employer's Drawings are indicative and theContractor shall be responsibility for the final design;

(b) note the fixing zones indicated on the Employer's Drawings when designingthe system;

(c) incorporate into the raised floors a supporting structure that is base fixed tothe concrete slab;

(d) develop a modular kit of parts approach to the support structure to standardise

the relationship and detail between panels, panel sub-frames and supportposts or supporting walls.

38.5 MATERIALS

38.5.1 Vinyl tile or Sheet Finishes

(a) Sizes and thicknesses of the flexible tile and sheet finishes shall be asspecified hereafter unless instructed otherwise by the Project Manager. TheWorks shall be executed by a specialist contractor previously reviewed by theProject Manager.

(b) Semi-flexible PVC tiles shall comply with BS 3260, size 225 x 225 or 300 x300 and 2.5 mm thick.

(c) Un-backed flexible PVC (vinyl) tiles shall comply with BS 3261: Type B, size225 x 225 or 300 x 300 and 2 mm thick.

(d) Foam backed PVC (vinyl) sheet shall comply with BS 5085: Part 2 and 3 mmthick overall. The wearing layer of the PVC (vinyl) sheet shall comply with BS3261: Type A 1.5 mm thick.

(e) Adhesive shall be recommended by the tile or sheeting manufacturer and

reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(f) Polish shall be emulsion polish of a type recommended by the tile or sheetingmanufacturer and reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 248/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  4/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

38.5.2 Carpet

(a) Carpet shall be of a type and colour and in accordance with the Specification,and of a brand reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(b) Carpet shall be laid on screed, treated with a sealant reviewed without

objection by the Project Manager to reduce dust and pollution.

(c) Carpet shall be either of the following qualities as specified as shown on theEmployer’s Drawing:

(i) "General contract quality carpet" for use in single occupant offices,committee and conference rooms, small libraries, staff quarters, lightwear corridors and other areas as specified; or

(ii) "Heavy contract quality carpet" for use in public rooms, general offices,reception areas, busy corridors and other areas as specified.

(d) Carpet shall be manufactured by one of the following methods as shown onthe Employer’s Drawing:

(i) single or face-to-face traditional loom;

(ii) needle insertion loom;

(iii) needle punch, fibre bonded, flocked or knitted; or

(iv) other weaving machinery producing the quality of carpet in compliancewith the Specification.

(e) The composition of the pile yam shall be fibres of one of the following:

(i) wool or wool blended with up to 20% nylon;

(ii) nylon with antistatic properties for general use;

(iii) polypropylene;

(iv) blend of fibres with antistatic properties for general use; or

(v) blend of fibres formulated to provide full antistatic properties to meet therequirements specified by International Business Machine (I.B.M.) or

International Computer Company (I.C.L.) for computer floor coverings.

(f) The warp and weft, where applicable, shall be cotton, jute or polypropylene.

(g) The back coating shall be evenly spread with no build-up at the selvedge ofthe carpet and which gives fray-resistant finish to cut edges.

(h) The quality and application of the back coating shall be such that:

(i) its penetration shall assist tuft anchorage without wicking into thesurface pile;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 249/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  5/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(ii) the finish carpet shall be seamed without gumming the needle andsewing thread, due to softening of the compound; and

(iii) folding of the carpet shall not cause permanent creasing.

(i) The backing coating shall:

(i) not deteriorate substantially with age or low temperature;

(ii) not become sticky with temperatures and humidifies experienced whenlaid in Hong Kong, or in transit thereto; and

(iii) be capable of spot cleaning using dry cleaning solvents without seriousdeterioration.

(j) Carpets shall be dyed by a process employed strictly in accordance with thedyestuffs manufacturer's instructions to produce full and even penetration ofthe fibres with minimum degradation of the yam.

(k) Foam backed carpets shall not be permitted.

38.5.3 Colour Fastness of Carpet

Colour fastness of carpet to meet the requirements of the following table:

Table 38.1: Colour Fastness of Carpet

Colour fastness

Related to

Minimum Acceptable

Grade

Method of Test

Light 5 BS 1006

Wet and dry rubbing 4 Pile yarn assembled andtested in accordance with BS

2677

Shampooing 4 Test on finished carpet inaccordance with the

recommendations of theSociety of Dyers and

Colourists

Organic Solvents 4 BS 3661/20

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 250/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  6/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

38.5.4 Physical Properties of Carpet

Physical properties of the finished carpet to be in accordance with the followingtable;

Table 38.2: Physical Properties of Finished Carpet

Properties Requirements Methods of Test

Total mass Requirement as to mass shalldepend upon construction of

finished carpet and the amountof back coating applied toachieve the required tuft

anchorage

BS 4223

(method 12)

Number of tufts per 100sq. cm

Minimum 1000 BS 4223

(method 8)

Thickness loss underdynamic loading

Thickness loss after 1000impacts not more than 25%

BS 4052

Using dynamicloading machine on

original pilethickness

Thickness loss Thickness loss after BS 4052

Thickness; compressionand recovery

Percentage compressionrecovery not less than 60%

BS 4098

On original pilethickness

Dimensional stability;extension due to

mechanical action

Mean non-recoverable not toWrap 1 %, Weft 1%

BS 4682: Part 1

Dimensional change whenimmersed in cold water; to

determine behaviour ofthe carpet when subjected

to total saturation incleaning or shampooingwhen excessive water is

applied

Dimensional change not toexceed Warp 2%, Weft 2%

BS 4682: Part 3

Flammability Shall not propagate flame afterremoval of nut and the charredarea must not exceed 35mm

radius

BS 4790

Moth proofing The carpet shall bepermanently moth proofed

BS4797

38.5.5 Resistance of Carpet to Wear

(a) The Contractor shall satisfy the Project Manager that the proposed productscan sustain the wear anticipated.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 251/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  7/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(b) The Contractor shall submit tests or reports illustrating the suitability of theproposed products, or list locations, preferably in Hong Kong, where theproposed products have been laid for a period of at least 2 years, or producesatisfactory evidence from overseas to endorse the suitability of the proposedproducts.

38.5.6 Carpet Tiles

(a) Carpet tiles shall be of the same size so that they could be easilyinterchanged, relocated or replaced.

(b) The Contractor shall cut out special tiles, with proper edging around, toreceive floor socket or outlet.

(c) All carpet surfaces shall be "Scotch-guarded", or other protective treatmentpreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. No unravellingof yam at edge of module shall be permitted.

(d) All carpet tiles shall be dimensionally stable (resist shrinkage) in anycircumstance.

38.5.7 Environmental Requirements

(a) The Carpet manufacturing company shall have acquired either the “ISO14001:1996 – Environmental Management Systems” or the “Eco-Managementand Audit Scheme (EMAS) of Denmark” or a similar standard reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

(b) Carpet shall be completely free of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).

(c) Carpet backing shall be PVC free.

(d) Adhesives shall be free of synthetic latex and have no volatile organiccompound emissions. Water-based adhesives or adhesive-free installationshall be used.

(e) Metal complex dyes and acid dyes shall not be used for dyeing.

(f) Carpets shall be long lasting, having a service life of not less than 10 years.

(g) Carpets shall not contain harmful substances or have any odour. They shallpass the testing and labelling program run by the “Carpet and Rug Institute’s

Indoor Air Quality Carpet Testing Programme” (USA) or the “Danish IndoorClimate Labelling” (Demark) or “GUT” (European association forenvironmentally friendly carpets) or similar standard reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

(h) Carpets shall not contain any harmful substances that prevent them frombeing reused, recycled or accepted by a landfill for final disposal.

38.5.8 Carpet Underlays

The Contractor shall provide underlay, which shall be one of the following types incompliance with BS 5808:

(a) felt;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 252/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  8/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(b) cellular;

(c) rubber crumb; or

(d) composite underlay.

38.5.9 Carpet Grippers

(a) Carpet grippers shall have two rows of small angled pins at not less than 50mm centres projecting 4 mm from a preformed strip.

(b) The Contractor shall submit samples of carpet grippers for review withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

38.5.10 Adhesive for Carpet

 Adhesive for fixing carpet shall be as recommended by the carpet manufacturers

and be compatible with the sub-base. Storage and use shall be in accordance withthe manufacturer’s recommendations, e.g. the British Adhesive Manufacturers Association booklet "Safe Handling of Adhesives in Industry".

38.5.11 Carpet Release Bond Agent

Release bond agent shall be reviewed without objection by the Project Manager andcomprise either a proprietary release coating or other system. The release coatingsystem shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations.

38.5.12 Anti Static Resistance

(a) Where specified, the carpet tiles shall be constructed using anti-statictreatments in either or both the pile yarn and backing.

(b) The static control level shall be a maximum of 3.0 kV, measured under thestandard conditions of 23 °C ±1 °C and 25 % ±2 % relative humidity.

(c) The Contractor shall submit proposals for complying with the Specification tothe Project Manager for review without objection.

38.5.13 Raised Access Flooring

(a) The raised floor deck shall be installed with fully removable load bearingpanels, interchangeable, and supported on adjustable pedestals.

(b) The floor system shall be sturdy, rigid, and firm, constructed from moistureresistant and rot proof material. The design of the system shall preventvibration, rattles, rocking squeaks and other noises. Floor panels that are cutshall be supported by additional pedestals and shall have framing modifiedaccordingly.

(c) The Contractor shall provide panel location system to securely locate eachpanel and prevent rocking. The system shall not rely on the perimeter wall forlateral stability and shall provide resistance to rolling loads (as AFA Rolling

Load Guide Notes Series 1 No.2 1988). The floor system shall remain stablewhen groups of panels are removed for access or maintenance or any otherreason; and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 253/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  9/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(d) The Contractor shall provide 3 sets of lifting apparatus to facilitate access tosub-floor for maintenance and alteration.

38.5.14 The aluminium Components for Raised Floor System 

The Contractor shall:

(a) detail design the extrusions and material thicknesses while maintainingdimensions shown on the Employer's Drawings;

(b) obtain the total quantity of each material or component from the same supplieror manufacturer unless otherwise agreed with the Project Manager;

(c) fabricate all metal framing members from extruded aluminium in compliancewith BS 1474;

(d) provide aluminium sheeting of minimium 3mm thick with framing a minimiumof 1.6mm in compliance with BS 1470; BS EN 485 and BS EN 515;

(e) use the most appropriate grades, strengths, and thicknesses of aluminium tomeet all structural and finishing requirements. The wall thicknesses ofaluminium extrusions shall be sufficient for the rigidity in the lengths requiredin the final installation; and

(f) provide all aluminium fixing brackets and cleats manufactured from the mostappropriate grade of alloy in accordance with BS 1474. They shall be finishedto match the metal panels and framing members if visible.

38.5.15 The Support System for Raised Floor System

The Contractor shall:

(a) take every precaution to ensure that no chemical or electrolytic action takesplace where dissimilar metals and/or materials are used together. To this endattention is drawn to publication PD 6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'. This is of particular importance wherealuminium and aluminium alloys are one of the surfaces. The Contractor shallprovide the necessary insulation wherever dissimilar metals occur atinterfaces with works that precede the Works;

(b) take every precaution to isolate aluminium components from cementitioussurfaces;

(c) hot-dip galvanise all inaccessible steel in accordance with BS 729;

(d) obtain all alloys of similar finish from an identified source reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager and in compliance with the requirements ofthe relevant British Standard; provide a chemical or other manufacturer’swritten specification for the alloy proposed.

38.5.16 Access Floor Accessories

 All necessary accessories such as ramps, stairs, railings, air grilles, skirting trims,vertical edging panels, all shall be of a similar standard or quality to the main floor

system.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 254/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  10/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

38.5.17 Provision for Service Outlets and Cut Panels

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide and install perforated panels (full panel size) for air supply. Location ofthe service panels and details of perforation size and pattern are shown on the

Employer's Drawings;

(b) provide cut outs for services in the raised floor panels for electrical and otheroutlets as located on the Employer's Drawings;

(c) ensure that performance of the panel is in no way impaired due to theintegration of such cut outs and panels; and

(d) ensure that any cutting of panels does not affect the water or moistureresistance of the panels.

38.5.18 Floor Grilles in Computer Rooms

(a) The Contractor shall supply and install perforated raised floor tiles in computerroom style raised floors including associated air balancing dampers.

(b) The perforated panels shall be used for supplying air as part of the mechanicalservices air conditioning. The performance requirements of the mechanicalservices shall not be affected by the Contractor's selection of perforated panel.

(c) Perforated panels shall provide a minimum 20 % free area.

(d) Perforated panels shall be easily removable to enable access to air balancingfacilities and shall be suitable for heavy pedestrian traffic.

(e) The maximum pressure drop across a perforated panel at a 2.5 m/s facevelocity shall be 20 Pa.

38.5.19 Floor Panels

 All panels shall be of the following dimensional requirements:

(a) removable and fully transferable in position and direction;

(b) closely fit to all perimeters with gap no greater than 15 mm and the edgepanels shall be located to prevent movement;

(c) before application of load, the platform floor surface shall be levelled to +/- 1.5mm over any 5 m2 or +/- 6 mm over the entire floor;

(d) under no load condition, the concavity or convexity of the panel shall notexceed 0.75 mm when measured horizontally parallel to any edge or along thediagonal, and the deviation due to twist shall not exceed 1 mm;

(e) panel deviation from square or work size shall not exceed +/- 0.5 mm;

(f) edge strips if utilised, shall be firmly fixed and shall not peel or becomedetached or break. The edging shall resist a pull off strength of 5 N for 5

minutes;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 255/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  11/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(g) edges of panels shall be chamfered at an angle of 5 degrees for easy removalof panels.

(h) site-cut edges of panels shall be treated to resist fire, moisture, and attack byvermin etc.;

(i) the dead load of the raised access floor system shall not exceed 1 KN/ m2.

38.5.20 Hydrothermal Requirements of Floor System

(a) The platform floor system, including the pedestals, panels, floor covering andfixings shall withstand the following conditions, without any delamination orother forms of deterioration:

(i) temperature 5 deg. C, relative humidity (RH) 90% on both sides of thefloor panels;

(ii) temperature 5 deg. C and 95% RH in the floor void side of the panels,

temperature 25 deg. C and 25% RH on the room side of the panels;

(iii) temperature 8 deg. C and 99% RH in the floor void side of the panels,temperature 23 deg. C and 55% RH on the room side of the panels;

(iv) temperature 30 deg. C and 30% RH in the floor void side of the panels,temperature 19 deg. C and 60% RH on the room side of the panels; and

(v) temperature variation from 0 deg. C to 60 deg. C with RH 95% on bothsides of the floor panels.

(b) The material shall, under the conditions stated in a), comply with the structural

and loading requirements stated in sub-sections 38.4.2 and 38.5.19. Thematerial content of the floor panels shall not be capable of absorbing moisture.

38.5.21 Fire and Safety Requirement of the Raised Floor System

(a) The raised floor system shall be non-combustible.

(b) The raised floor system shall comply with BS 6266 clause 4.4 and BS 5588:Part 3 clauses 11.3.1 and 11.3.2.

(c) The raised floor system shall achieve, within the cavity, Class 1 classificationswhen tested in accordance with BS 476: Part 7; an index of Performance (1)

not exceeding 12 and a sub index (i) not exceeding 6 when tested inaccordance with BS 476: Part 6.

(d) All supporting structure shall be incombustible and shall have a melting pointof not less than 600 oC.

(e) All supporting structure shall have a thermal property such that meantemperature of the upper panel surface shall not increase by more than 140 

oC, when subject to the 1 Kg crib fire test.

(f) Materials shall be non-combustible and approved by the Fire ServicesDepartment. It shall be compatible with all other materials used in the raised

floor system.

(g) The conductivity for insulation shall not be more than 0.036 w/m deg. C at 24oC.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 256/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  12/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

38.5.22 Electrical Properties of the Raised Floor System

(a) The system shall have the electrostatic properties such that the resistancebetween the surface of the floor covering and the main building earthcontinuity conductor shall be between 5x105 and 2x10 10 ohms at RH 50%.

(b) All metallic components of the floor system shall be capable of beingelectrically bonded in compliance with section 38.7.9.

38.5.23 Durability and Other Properties Required of the Raised Floor System

(a) All materials shall be resistant to the growth of fungi, micro-organisms and theattack by insects.

(b) The materials shall be in compliance with BS 1982 method of test for fungalresistance and manufactured building materials made of or containingmaterials of organic origin.

(c) The materials used in the system shall not give off any unpleasant odours tothe occupants of the building.

(d) The system supporting components and the floor panels shall have aminimum life of 25 years.

38.6 SUBMISSIONS

38.6.1 Particulars of the Flexible Floor Finishes

The following particulars of the proposed flexible floor finishes shall be submitted to

the Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing the fabrication, setting out, joints and details ofall flexible flooring systems;

(b) details of the source, type and properties of all materials;

(c) relevant and current manufacturer’s literature; and

(d) test certificates for carpet to demonstrate that it complies with therequirements of the specification.

38.6.2 Samples

The following samples of proposed materials shall be submitted to the ProjectManager together with the particulars referred above:

(a) 600 mm x 600 mm samples of each vinyl proposed;

(b) 600 mm x 600 mm samples of each carpet and underlay proposed;

(c) 3 vinyl tiles;

(d) 3 carpet tiles;

(e) 5 sample floor panels;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 257/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  13/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(f) trims;

(g) thresholds;

(h) nosings; and

(i) 5 no. pedestals

38.6.3 Prototypes

The Contractor shall provide one complete raised access floor assembly comprising4 panels mounted on the pedestal system (on a substrate the same as the building),and including power points, access systems, etc.

38.6.4 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall, prior to commencement of the raised floor system,construct and establish flexible floor, as detailed below, at location agreed by

the Project Manager as benchmarks. Upon receipt of the Project Manager'snotice of no objection, the benchmarks shall become the standard to which allsubsequent flexible floor system shall conform;

(i) vinyl finish area 3 m x 3 m including joints and edges to other finish;

(ii) carpet floor area 8 m x 8 m including joints and edges to other finish;and

(iii) raised Floor area with floor finish size 3 m x 3 m.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for

the proposed benchmarks, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any flexible floor works.

38.7 WORKMANSHIP

38.7.1 Tolerances for Raised Access Flooring

(a) Raised access floor pedestals shall be adjustable to provide a finished floorlevel within ±1.5 mm over 5 m in any direction. Tolerances shall be non-accumulative;

(b) Raised access floor panel levels:

The difference in height between adjacent finished panels shall not exceed 0.5mm after the application of the specified load and shall not exceed 3.25 mmbetween the edge of any panel being subjected to any combination of theloadings specified and the nearest edge of any adjacent unloaded panel;

 

(c) Panel flatness:

(i) the concavity or convexity of any panel under no load conditions shallnot exceed 0.75 mm when measured across a 600 mm module andparallel to any edge or diagonally across the module; and

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 258/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  14/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(ii) the deviation due to twisting under no load conditions of any corner inrelation to the other three shall not exceed 1.0 mm over a 600 mmmodule. This standard shall be maintained when the panel is subjectedto the environmental conditions and also after the removal of anyconcentrated or distributed loads;

(d) Panel Squareness:

The panel deviation from square shall not exceed 0.5 mm on the diagonallength;

(e) Panel Dimensions:

The deviation from the specified size of the panel shall not exceed ±0.5 mm;

38.7.2 Workmanship for Vinyl Tile or Sheet

The Contractor shall:

(a) store rolls after delivery, but before laying, in accordance with themanufacturer’s recommendations. Deformed rolls shall not be used;

(b) not use tiles or sheet which have deteriorated in stock or which have atendency to curl at the edges and corners;

(c) thoroughly clean the screed or backing from grease, oil, wax, paint, dirt or dustand fill  all cracks, minor holes and services penetration with a fillerrecommended by the tile or sheeting manufacturer and reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager;

(d) lay all tiles, floor and wall sheeting strictly in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations. Preheating single tiles shall not bepermitted;

(e) apply adhesive in a thin film and spread evenly with a notched or plain trowelas recommended by the manufacturer. If a notched trowel is used the notchesshall be of the size recommended and shall be renewed periodically to ensurethe correct spread of adhesive;

(f) closely butt joints and cut accurately at right angles to the tiles or sheetsurface to an agreed design and with only the minimum necessary jointing;

(g) weld joints of PVC sheet to form a continuous surface with PVC welding rodscoloured to match the sheeting;

(h) relay any areas insufficiently bonded or showing an uneven surface. The fullwidth of vinyl sheet, and a minimum length at least equal to twice the width,shall be re-laid. There shall be no patch repairs within the width of a sheet;

(i) after laying thoroughly clean, the tiling or sheeting with water and a detergentrecommended by the manufacturer; apply two coats of non-slip, matt emulsionpolish;

(j) protect the floors with covering reviewed without objection by the Project

Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 259/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  15/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

38.7.3 Workmanship for Carpet

(a) The Contractor shall install carpet and underlays in compliance with BS 5325. 

(b) The Contractor shall install carpets so that they are flat and of even tension.Carpet shall not be displaced by movement of people or objects on the

surface to the point where permanent slackness, rocking or rippling is caused.

(c) The Contractor shall closely fit edges to skirting cover fillets or otherperimeters; joint carpet at doorway within the thickness of the closed door;secure doorway terminations of carpet by sealing, whipping or binding beforeseaming or covering with cover strips where they abut dissimilar materials.

(d) No carpet jointing shall be permitted at right angles to a door location within 2m of any door centre line without the express permission of the ProjectManager.

(e) No fitting-out of areas with small pieces or off-cuts shall be permitted.

(f) Carpet tiles on raised floor panels shall either be stuck down with double-sidedtape or alternatively with a bonding agent, which shall be integral with thebacking of the tile previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

38.7.4 Laying Carpet Underlays

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide underlays in all cases except as follows:

(i) where foam or felt backing is an integral part of the carpet proposed;

(ii) where the carpet is to be fully adhered in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations;

(iii) where the manufacturer recommends that no underlay is required;

(b) ensure the base is smooth, clean, and dry and compatible with the underlayand carpeting. Adhesive shall be compatible with the base, underlay andcarpet;

(c) lightly smooth the underlay by hand to ensure that it lies flat with no bubbles or

wrinkles visible on the surface; secure the underlay sufficiently to precludemovement when the carpet is laid over it.

38.7.5 Seaming and Jointing Carpets

The Contractor shall:

(a) plan the layout of the carpet to keep seams to the minimum practicable.Seams should be unobstructive and positioned such that:

(i) they run the length of the area;

(ii) traffic runs along the length rather than across the seams; and

(iii) seams are not placed in areas subjected to heavier or twisting wear or indoorways or narrow accesses.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 260/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  16/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(b) seam or joint carpet by one of the following methods:

(i) machine or hand sewing: sew seams to the full length and properly lockoff; stitch to an even tension and ensure the seam lies flat after laying;protect the raw edge of the pile where necessary, to prevent loss of pilealong the seam;

(ii) reinforced tape and adhesive (cold applied): ensure that the adhesive isdry before stretching;

(iii) heat bonded tapes: ensure that adequate penetration of adhesive byapplying sufficient heat and pressure simultaneously; or

(iv) seaming cement: joint foam backed or unitary-backed carpets with acontinuous bead of seaming cement to the full length of the primarybacking and joint under compression.

38.7.6 Installation of Carpets

The Contractor shall secure carpets by using one of the following methods:

(a) Carpet gripper method (suitable for woven, tufted, and secondary backedbonded carpet):

(i) plug and screw or nail carpet gripper strip around the perimeter 6-8mmfrom the skirting;

(ii) use recommended adhesives between screws and nail centres;

(iii) stretch carpet over the gripper using knee kickers,

(iv) trim the edge of the carpet;

(v) ensure that it is securely trapped in the gap between the gripper and theskirting; and

(vi) use power stretchers for installations over 7 m long or wide and use adouble row of carpet grippers.

(b) Fully adhering method (suitable for all types of carpet):

(i) ensure that the floor is properly dry, free from dust, and contaminants,

which may affect the adhesion;

(ii) spread adhesive evenly and only applied to an area that can be properlybonded and laid at one time;

(iii) obtain maximum adhesive contact by brushing or rolling in accordancewith the manufacturer's recommendations;

(iv) cut edges straight and square before adhesion in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations;

(v) trim the carpet to the perimeter before the adhesive dries;

(vi) do not permit traffic installation of furniture on adhered areas for at least24 hours.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 261/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  17/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(c) Release bonded method (suitable for all types of carpet):

(i) apply the release agent before adhering generally in accordance withthe sub-section b) above.

38.7.7 Carpet Protection and Cleaning

The Contractor shall:

(a) clear all carpet areas of tools and waste;

(b) remove all pieces of partly loose warp or face yam with napping scissors;

(c) rectify any lumps, surface irregularities and areas of inadequate or uneventension that are apparent; and

(d) employ a specialist carpet cleaner to clean the installed carpet immediatelyprior to handover using a method reviewed without objection by the Project

Manager.

38.7.8 Workmanship of the Raised Access Floor

The Contractor shall:

(a) before commencement of the work, ensure that the substrate is adequate toaccept the raised floor system and adequate for the fixings to be fully effective;ensure that any mechanical fixings are clear of the reinforcement in thestructural slab;

(b) seal and clean the sub-floor before the raised floors installation is

commenced; continue cleaning during installation to prevent entrapment of dirtor rubbish in the floor cavity;

(c) fix the raised floors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendationsensuring compliance with design and performance requirements;

(d) set out accurately the raised floors to give level floor free from undulations,steps, ridges, bumps, ripples, and lipping. Rocking panels shall not beaccepted. The floor shall not exhibit noise in use, and shall be able to resist allrolling loads without creep and shall feel solid and substantial underfoot;

(e) design and fit bay divisions and movement joints in the raised floors where

necessary fitted to co-ordinate with wall joints and other elements as shownon the drawings;

(f) whenever such alteration is required, agreed the visual criteria with the ProjectManager prior to such alterations being carried out.

38.7.9 Earth Bonding of the Raised Access Floor

The Contractor shall bond to earth all extraneous and exposed conductive parts ofthe raised access floor system as defined by the latest IEE Regulations and theCode of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations of EMSD.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 262/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  18/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

38.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

38.8.1 Tests of Carpet Tiles Construction

The Contractor shall carry out the following tests on the carpet tiles construction atthe rate of one of each test for every one thousand tiles supplied:

(a) Fibre content and carpet tiles dimensions shall be tested in accordance withBS 3655.

(b) Total carpet tiles weight, total pile weight, pile weight above backing, pileheight and weft density shall be ascertained in accordance with BS 4233.

(c) Change in surface structure shall be ascertained in accordance with BS 6659.

38.8.2 Tests of Carpet Tiles Performance

The Contractor shall carry out the following tests of carpet tiles performance at the

rate of one of each test for every 1,000 tiles supplied:

(a) Insect resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 4797.

(b) Mildew resistance shall be tested in accordance with BS 6085.

(c) Tuft withdrawal shall be tested in accordance with BS 5229.

(d) Changes in surface texture and colour shall be tested in accordance with BS6659 (hexapod drum test).

(e) Thickness loss under dynamic loading shall be ascertained in accordance with

BS 4052.

(f) Thickness loss under static loading shall be ascertained in accordance withBS 4939.

(g) Changes in surface structure and colour shall be ascertained in accordancewith BS 6659.

(h) Light fastness, shampoo fastness and rubbing fastness shall be tested inaccordance with BS 1006.

(i) Residual oil content shall be ascertained in accordance with BS 3582.

(j) Static electrical propensity and electrical resistance shall be tested inaccordance with BS 6654.

(k) The effects of a small source of ignition shall be tested in accordance with BS4790 (hot metal nut test) and with BS 6307 (methanamine tablet test).

(l) DCM soluble matter shall be determined in accordance with BS 3582.

(m) Abrasion resistance shall be tested in accordance with Wool IndustryResearch Association Handbook II.

(n) Durability factor and fibre integrity shall be tested in accordance withInternational Wool Secretariat TM 283.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 263/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  19/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(o) NBS flooring radiant panel test shall be carried out in accordance with DIS9239 and ASTM E 648.

(p) Toxic gas emission shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 662, F814-83and F814-84.

(q) Fray resistance shall be tested in accordance with ISO 10833.

(r) The effect of chair castors shall be tested in accordance with ISO DTR 4918;and

(s) The dimensional stability of the carpet tiles shall be tested using the"Aachener Test" as developed by The Deutsches Teppich - Forschunginstitut

of Aachen, Germany. The permissible maximum change shall be ±0.1% fromthe initial to the final measurement.

38.8.3 Testing for raised floor

(a) Load Tests:

The Contractor shall:

(i) carry out area and point load tests to a minimum of two times thespecified load;

(ii) load test single panels representative of the 600 mm x 600 mm panelsize to demonstrate their capability of supporting the specified loadareas, partition loads, contained area loads, and point loads;

(iii) carry out load tests utilising a single system panel supported on 750 mm

x 750 mm floor on its support system; place panels on these supports toprovide bearing areas equal to an actual installation;

(iv) apply loads through a load application apparatus which simulates theactual contact areas and land/panel interfacing for that particular type ofloading;

(v) apply loads to the panel in increments and deflections of the panel shallbe measured at each load increment;

(vi) load to design load in a minimum of four loading increments, thenunload, then reload to design load in four increments, then continue

loading in increments to failure or to twice design load (whichever occursfirst);

(vii) where a loading type (i.e. a point load through a 200 mm diameter pad)can be located anywhere on a panel, load test the panel by locating theloading at the most critical location on the panel;

(viii) carry out load testing of single panels, with and without the serviceholes, as described above. If the physical make-up of a panel with orwithout service holes is essentially the same, load tests of panels withthe holes present may be used to demonstrate adequacy of the panelswithout holes;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 264/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  20/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(ix) test 10% of pedestals on Site with a 3 kg soft body weight rotatedthrough an arc of 90° at a radius of 1m to strike the head of the pedestal.No deformation or failure of fixing shall occur. The test shall notcommence until 48 hours have elapsed from the time any adhesive hasbeen used to install the pedestal; and

(x) where the Contractor can demonstrate by structural analysis that onespecified loading condition and/or load location is more severe or morecritical than others, use load tests of panels under that more severe orcritical condition to demonstrate adequacy of the panel for other loadingconditions or locations.

38.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

38.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual to the Project

Manager including, but not limited to, the following:

(a) details of the manufacturers of all types of flexible floor finishes;

(b) details relating to the necessary intervals between cleaning cycles and provideguidance to the Project Manager on vacuuming of primary and secondarytrafficked areas. Particular reference should be made to the use of twin motorupright cleaners and their frequency of use;

(c) methods for cosmetic cleaning of stains including guidance on treatments forwater and oil based stains;

(d) wet cleaning and powder cleaning methods and guidance on procedures andthe relative advantages and disadvantages of each method considering areas,special machines, cost, time and convenience;

(e) repair and replacement of small areas of the finishes;

(f) protection methods for flexible floor finishes during cleaning of adjacent hardfloor finishes; and

(g) all other maintenance requirements deemed necessary for the properperformance of the flexible floor finishes.

38.9.2 Durability for Raised Floors

(a) The Contractor shall provide primary components which have a predictedservice life of not less than 12 years without the need for maintenance, otherthan regular cleaning. The following components shall be primarycomponents:

(i) all framing and structural support components;

(ii) panels; and

(iii) fixings.

(b) All other components shall have a predicted service life of not less than 8years.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 265/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification  21/21  January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works 

Section 38 – Flexible Floor Finishes 

(c) The Contractor shall state the predicted service life of all components andprovide guidance on the required maintenance, replacement periods andmethods of replacement.

(d) Secondary components shall be capable of easy replacement withoutcompromising the structural or visual integrity of the raised floor. Components

shall be capable of replacement without progressive dismantling of the raisedfloor.

38.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

38.10.1 Spare finishes

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide spare flexible floor finishes 3 % of the total installed;

(b) submit full details and instructions for storage to the Project Manager (Tilesshall not be off-cuts).

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 266/322

 

[this page not used]

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 267/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  1/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

SECTION 39 WALL FINISHES

39.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of wall finishes that

generally comprise:

(a) render;

(b) plaster;

(c) ceramic wall tiling;

(d) stone wall tiling;

(e) resin bonded wall tiling; and

(f) accessories.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(g) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(h) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(i) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(j) architectural metalwork refer to section 35;

(k) hard floor finishes refer to section 37;

(l) flexible floor finishes refer to section 38; and

(m) sanitary fittings refer to section 95.

39.2 NOT USED

39.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 12 Specification for Portland cements

BS 146 Specification for Portland blast furnace cement.

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 882 Specification for aggregates from natural sources forconcrete

BS 890 Specification for building limes

BS 1191 Specification for gypsum building plasters

BS 1199 & 1200 Specifications for building sands from natural sources

BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip

BS 3148 Methods of test for water for making concrete

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 268/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  2/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

BS 4027 Specification for sulphate resisting Portland cement

BS 4254 Specification for two part polysulphide

BS 4551 Methods for testing mortars, screeds and plasters

BS 4721 Specification for ready mixed building mortars

BS 4887 Mortar admixtures

Part 1 Specification for air entraining (plasticising) admixtures

BS 5224 Specification for masonry cement

BS 5262 Code of practice for external renderings

BS 5270 Bonding agents for use with gypsum plasters andcements

BS 5492 Code of practice for internal plastering

BS 5385 Wall and floor tiling

BS 6431 Ceramic floor and wall tilesBS 6452 Beads for internal plastering and dry lining

Part 1 Specification for galvanized steel beads

BS 8000 Workmanship on building sites

Part 10 Code of practice for plastering and rendering

BS 8204 Screeds, bases and in -situ floorings

39.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

39.4.1 Contractor’s Responsibilit ies

The Contractor shall:

(a) Install the wall finishes based upon the Employer's Drawings and therequirements of the Specification.

(b) For all wall tiling:

(i) design the fixing method for wall tiles including any bedding, render,adhesive or mechanical fixings;

(ii) submit the design and Contractor’s Drawings, showing sufficient detailsfor installation, for review without objection by the Project Manager;

(iii) provide and install tiles using the method as recommended by the tilemanufacturer, including the preparation of the wall substrate, laying, jointgrouting, protection and cleaning before applying for a CompletionCertificate;

(iv) adopt the design/visual criteria shown on the Employer’s Drawings;

(v) unless shown otherwise, align wall tile joints with floor tile joints andprevent dimensional creep; and

(vi) set out floor and wall tiles from the setting out points where shown onthe Employer’s Drawings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 269/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  3/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

39.5 MATERIALS

39.5.1 Rendering

(a) Ordinary Portland cement shall comply with BS 12.

(b) Water shall comply with section 20 (Concrete) and tested in accordance withBS 3148.

(c) Sand for mixes not incorporating lime shall be from either clean hard durablecrushed rock or clean sand free from salt and shall conform to the gradinglimits set out below;

Table 39.1: Grading of Sand for Renders

B.S. Sieve Percentage by weight passing B.S. Sieve

5.00 mm 100

2.36 m 90 – 100

1.18 mm 70 – 100

0.60 mm 40 – 80

0.30 mm 5 – 40

0.15 mm 0 – 10

(d) Sand for mixes incorporating lime shall be clean natural sand free from salt toconform to the grading limits set out below;

Table 39.2: Grading of Sand for Render Mixes with Lime

B.S. Sieve Percentage by weight passing B.S. Sieve

2.36 mm 100

1.18 mm 90 – 100

0.60 mm 55 – 100

0.30 mm 5 – 50

0.15 mm 0 – 10

(e) Lime shall comply with BS 890 and section 26 (Masonry and Blockwork).

(f) Admixtures and additives shall comply with BS 4887 and section 26 (Masonryand Blockwork).

(g) Bonding agents shall be compatible with the substrate and finish and shall beproprietary products previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager. They shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations and shall be supplied in containers clearly marked in thefactory with the expiry date. Expired material shall not be used.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 270/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  4/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

39.5.2 Plastering

(a) Steel lathing, shall comply with BS 1369: Part 1 from a manufacturerpreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager, and shall beeither:

(i) plain expanded type of 6mm short way mesh coated with tight coatgalvanizing and weighing not less than 1.6 kg/m2; or

(ii) ribbed expanded type similarly coated and weighing not less than 2.25kg/m2.

(b) Galvanized steel corner beads, plaster stops and movement joint beads shallhave expanded metal wings and the details reviewed without objection by theProject Manager.

(c) Wire netting shall comply with BS 1485, of 0.9 mm galvanized wire and 50 mmmesh.

(d) Staples shall be galvanized steel wire staples.

(e) Tying wire shall be 1.25 mm annealed steel wire, galvanized in compliancewith BS 433.

(f) Gypsum plaster shall be retarded hemihydrates gypsum plaster in compliancewith BS 1191: Part 1, Class B of the following types:

(i) Undercoat Plaster

Type a – 1 Browning plaster

2 Metal lathing plaster

(ii) Final Coat Plaster

Type b – 1 Finish plaster2 Board finish plaster

(g) Gypsum plaster shall be delivered to Site in sealed containers and stored inweather tight structures with a raised floor. The Contractor shall store differenttypes of consignments separately and use in the order of their delivery.

(h) Plasterboard shall comply with BS 1230: Part 1 “gypsum lath" or "gypsum

baseboard".

(i) Nails for "lath" or "baseboard" shall be 30 x 2.6 mm plasterboard galvanizedsteel nails, jagged shank type in compliance with BS 1202: Part 1:

(i) 30 x 2.65 mm for plasterboard not exceeding 12.7 mm thick; and

(ii) 40 x 2.65 mm for plasterboard 19 mm thick.

(j) Reinforcement for joints in plasterboard shall be jute scrim cloth not less than90 mm wide.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 271/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  5/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

39.5.3 Premixed plaster

(a) Premixed plaster shall be factory produced by weighted combination of plasterraw materials and chemicals and supplied to Site in bags. Mixing with cleanwater shall be required before application.

(b) Premixed plaster shall be either cement based or gypsum based.

(c) Cement based plaster shall contain mineral filler material as aggregate andPortland cement as main binder, with additives for improved compressivestrength and reduced shrinkage.

(d) Gypsum based plaster shall be used in internal weather protected areas only,and shall contain pre-mixed minerals, gypsum based rendering materials andadditives which could be applied in one single thick application withoutcracking and separation from the substrate.

(e) The premixed plaster shall comply with BS 5262, BS 5492 and BS 1191. The

premixed plaster manufacturing company shall have acquired ISO certificationin their manufacturing process of the premixed plaster product.

39.5.4 Specialist and Proprietary Plaster / Renders

(a) Acoustic plaster shall be a proprietary plaster, previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager, free from asbestos, mixed and applied inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

(b) Stone chippings for exposed aggregate rendering or Shanghai plaster shall begranite, white stone or marble chippings, graded from 3 to 5 mm, and freefrom dust.

(c) Resin, epoxy, urethane and acrylic based decorative finishes shall beproprietary products applied by specialist contractors previously reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

39.5.5 Ceramic Wall Tiling

Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall comply with BS 6431, Group A IIa or B IIa with waterabsorption not exceeding 6% and to the sizes stated on the Employer’s Drawings.Tiles shall be glazed, white or coloured as required with flat cushion edge orinclusive spacer lugs as required.

39.5.6 Resin Bonded Wall Tiling

Tiles shall be from a manufacturer previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager and comply with the standards as specified in the Specification.The tiles shall have 1 mm x1 mm chamfer along all exposed edges unless otherwisespecified. The Contractor shall submit samples for review without objection by theProject Manager. 

39.5.7 Stone Wall Tiling

(a) Stone (granite) wall tiles shall be produced by a manufacturer reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

(b) The surface of the tiles shall be cut and pre-finished at the point ofmanufacture prior to delivery.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 272/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  6/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(c) The Contractor shall ensure that the wall tiles conform or are similar in size,thickness, texture and colour to the tiles in adjacent areas and that the sametype of stone is supplied by the same quarry in quality assured batches. TheContractor shall ascertain and satisfy the Project Manager that the electedsupply source shall achieve the quality and quantity of tiling in areas to matchwith existing.

(d) Following the cutting of the tiles along a certain grain, this grain direction shallbe maintained when the stone is laid.

39.5.8 Mosaic Tiles

Unless otherwise specified, mosaic tiles shall be from a manufacturer previouslyreviewed without objection by the Project Manager and as follows:

(a) glass mosaic tiles shall be fully vitrified glass tile size 20x20 mm and 4 mmthick, regular in shape, free from cracks or sharp edges and uniform in colourand texture;

(b) glazed ceramic mosaic tiles shall be similar to glazed wall tiles but size 18x18mm or 25x25 mm and 5 mm thick and with square edges; and

(c) unglazed vitreous mosaic tiles shall be size 18x18 mm or 18 x38 mm or 38x38mm and 4 or 5 mm thick with matching coved tiles and from the colour rangespecified.

39.5.9 Adhesives

 Adhesive for tiles or mosaics shall be a proprietary brand that has been reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

39.6 SUBMISSIONS

39.6.1 Particu lars of Wall Finishes

The following particulars of the proposed wall finishes shall be submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection prior to the installation of finishes:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings which shall illustrate setting out, interfaces, internal andexternal corners and skirting details;

(b) details of the source, type and properties of materials; and

(c) current technical literature.

39.6.2 Samples

(a) The Contractor shall submit the following samples of proposed materials to theProject Manager, together with the particulars referred above, for reviewwithout objection:

(i) 3 samples of each type of tile;

(ii) 3 additional samples of the extreme lightest colour of each type of resinbonded tile and stone tile;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 273/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  7/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(iii) 3 additional samples the extreme darkest colour of each type of resinbonded tile and stone tile;

(iv) samples of stone tile anchors;

(v) samples of all grouts, mastics and sealants; and

(vi) representative samples of typical control joints.

(b) The Contractor shall submit sample panels of 3 m x 3 m for all wall, tile or slabfinishes including joints, edge details, pointing etc. and obtain a notice of noobjection from the Project Manager.

39.6.3 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall, following receipt of no objection from the ProjectManager of relevant samples and prior to commencement of wall finish works,construct and establish benchmarks as part of the wall finish works at

locations to be determined by the Project Manager.

(b) The benchmark area shall include each wall finish material, incorporating atleast one external corner and one internal corner. The extent of the each areashall be minimum 3 m wide and 3 m high from floor, skirting to ceiling.

(c) After the Project Manager has reviewed these areas with no objection, thebenchmark shall become the standard to which all subsequent wall finishworks shall conform.

(d) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a new

proposed benchmark before proceeding with any wall finish works.

39.7 WORKMANSHIP

39.7.1 Tolerances

Finished surfaces shall have no sudden irregularities. The tolerances for ceramicwall tiles shall be in accordance with BS 6431.

39.7.2 Rendering Workmanship

The Contractor shall:

(a) mix mortar or plaster in compliance with section 26 (Masonry and Blockwork);

(b) protect existing work with boards, dust sheets, and the like. Droppings onfinished work shall be cleaned off immediately;

(c) keep plant and tools clear and free of traces from previous mixes;

(d) not use mechanical coating methods of application without permission of theProject Manager;

(e) hack off extraneous concrete projections and fins;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 274/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  8/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(f) remove efflorescence, laitance, oil, grease, all traces of release agents, dirt,and loose material by dry brushing or scraping;

(g) protect surfaces from weather and ensure that they are completely compatiblewith the finish to be applied before commencement of work;

(h) at junctions between dissimilar solid backgrounds in the same plane which areto receive the same applied finish, fix a strip of steel galvanized lathingextending 150 mm (minimum) in width each side of the junction, nailed with40mm nails or stapled to plugs at 100 mm centres on both edges;

(i) clean all laitance, dust, oil or any other such substances from the concretesurface;

(j) mix splatterdash to consist of (1:2) cement : coarse sand or granite fines witha bonding agent such as a styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) latex, an ethylvinyl acetate (EVA) emulsion or an acrylic emulsion previously reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager;

(k) apply splatterdash to concrete vertical surfaces and soffits immediately afterstriking formwork. The mixture shall be applied by dashing it on the wall togive a complete coverage with a rough texture not exceeding 5 mm thickness.The surface shall be maintained moist for 24 hours;

(l) allow splatterdash to cure and harden for at least two days before applyingrendering/bedding screed;

(m) Where finish or screed is to be bonded to hardened or existing concrete wallor base:

(i) thoroughly hack concrete to remove laitance and expose coarseaggregate shortly before applying finish or screed;

(ii) thoroughly clean and wet surface 24 hours before applying finish orscreed and remove surplus water; and

(iii) brush neat cement slurry into damp surface immediately before applyingfinish or screed, or

(n) apply proprietary bonding agent previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations;

(o) construct movement joints at maximum 4m centres in each direction equallyspaced or as shown on the Employer’s Drawings or as directed by the ProjectManager to comply with dimensioned requirements.

39.7.3 Rendering Finishing

(a) Surface finishes shall be either:

(i) smooth finish: - finish with a steel trowel or power float to a smoothsurface, free from blemishes;

(ii) wood float finish: - finish with a dry wood float to give an even overall

surface;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 275/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  9/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(iii) textured finish: - finish by stippling, scraping or other means to produce atextured surface reviewed without objection by the Project Manager;

(iv) rough cast finish: - throw onto the undercoat a wet mix of aggregate andcementitious material; or

(v) machine applied textured finish: apply in accordance with themanufacturer's recommendations.

(b) Wall and ceiling finishes shall be smooth, flat and to correct line and level.Maximum deviation permitted in surfaces shall be 3 mm from a 1,800 mmstraight edge. Angles and corners shall be right angles, unless otherwiserequired, with walls and reveals plumb and square.

(c) The Contractor shall prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out of walland ceiling finishes by a means previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager.

(d) Immediately after laying, the Contractor shall protect surface of renders or in-situ finishes from wind, sunlight, wear, discolouration or other damages untilcompletion.

39.7.4 Plasterboard workmanship

The Contractor shall:

(a) carry plasterboard on edge, and stack plasterboard flat on level surface,properly supported to prevent sagging or bending. Plasterboard shall bestacked off the ground inside a building;

(b) keep plasterboard dry,  prevent mould growth, and programme deliveries tominimize storage periods on Site during periods of high humidity;

(c) fix plasterboard with fixing in compliance with BS 8212;

(d) fix plasterboard to wood bearers as follows:

(i) nail boards at each support at 150 mm centres, setting out from thecentres of the board and 15 mm (minimum) from edges; and

(ii) provide gap of 3 to 5 mm between edges;

(e) treat joints, etc. in plasterboard as follows:

(i) fill all joints, nail holes and other imperfections with board finish plaster;and

(ii) press strips of joint reinforcement into the plaster, trowel flat and allowthe plaster to set,  but not dry out before commencement of generalplastering.

39.7.5 Plastering Workmanship

The Contractor shall:

(a) use plastering and rendering in compliance with BS 5492 and BS 5262;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 276/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  10/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(b) dub out if necessary to correct any inaccuracies, in layers 10 mm (maximum)thick in same mix as the first coat;

(c) allow drying out before the next coat is applied. Total thickness of dubbing outshall not exceed 25 mm;

(d) cross scratch each coat to provide key;

(e) fix steel lathing as follows:

(i) fix taut with the largest dimension of mesh running perpendicular todirection of supports;

(ii) apply one coat of bituminous paint to cut ends;

(iii) fix at 100 mm centres to wood with staples, to brickwork or concrete inaccordance with section 39.7.2.h) and to steelwork with tying wire at 75mm centres; and

(iv) lap 25 mm (minimum) generally, and 50 mm where end laps occurbetween supports. Secure laps with tying wire at 75 mm centres;

(f) allow 3 days for undercoats to dry out thoroughly before applying next coat,and cross scratch undercoats to provide key for next coat;

(g) apply cement rendering consisting of cement and sand or granite fines 1:3with surface finish required as follows:

(i) rendering not exceeding 10mm thick in one coat; and

(ii) rendering exceeding 10mm thick in two coats, with finishing coat 5 mmthick;

(h) apply external rendering to splatterdashed surfaces consisting of cement, limeand sand in two coats as follows:

(i) undercoat 10 mm(minimum) thick-mix l:3;

(ii) finishing coat 10 mm (maximum) thick - mix 1:3, with textured finish;

(iii) total thickness of splatterdash & external rendering shall not exceed 20mm;

(iv) undercoat shall be thoroughly dry before application of the finishing coat;and

(v) Pulverized Fly Ash (PFA) shall not be used for the external rendering/plastering;

(i) apply internal lime plaster consisting of cement, lime and sand in two coats onsolid backgrounds as follows:

(i) undercoat shall be 1:3 cement : sand mix

(ii) finish coat shall be lime plaster gauged (cement : lime : sand 1:2:6) withnot more than 25 % by volume of lime putty. Addition of paper-pulp isnot allowed;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 277/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  11/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(iii) thickness of undercoat shall not exceed 10 mm to walls and 5 mm tosoffits;

(iv) thickness of finishing coat to walls and soffits shall be at least 3 mm;

(v) the drying out time for undercoats before the application of finishing

coats shall comply with sub-section 39.7.5. (f);

(vi) metal plaster corner beads and stops shall be provided where specifiedand in accordance with n) below;

(vii) total thickness of plaster not exceed 15 mm  to walls and 10 mm tosoffits;

(viii) Pulverized Fly Ash (PFA) shall not be used for the internal plastering.

(j) apply gypsum plaster generally in two coats as follows:

(i) first coat consisting of Browning plaster and sand 1:2 or cement andsand 1:3;

(ii) finishing coat of neat finish plaster, or finish plaster with up to 25% oflime putty added, with smooth finish 5 mm maximum;

(iii) total thickness of plaster shall not exceed 15 mm;

(iv) proprietary gypsum plaster previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager shall be used in strict accordance with themanufacturer’s technical specifications and recommendations.

(v) where specified, bonding agents for use with gypsum plaster shallcomply with BS 5270: Part 1;

(k) apply gypsum plaster in three coats on steel lathing as follows:

(i) first coat consisting of metal lathing plaster and sand 1:1.5;

(ii) second and finishing coats – same as two-coat system above; and

(iii) total thickness of plaster shall not exceed 13 mm measured from theouter face of the lathing;

(l) apply gypsum plaster as one finishing coat 5 mm (maximum) thick onplasterboard towelled to a smooth surface using as minimum water aspossible;

(m) construct arises square or pencil rounded as required;

(n) use metal beads for internal plastering and dry lining in compliance with BS6452: Part 1;

(o) provide and fix metal corner beads, plaster stops and movement joints whenspecified, including nailing, stapling or fixing with plaster dabs and trowel thefinishing coat flush with the bead;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 278/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  12/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(p) provide metal lathing to bridge across mullions where expansion or movementis not required, including nailing, fixing or stapling the lathing to the wallsadjacent to the mullions and to the mullion;

(q) mix and apply acoustic plaster by special spray equipment in accordance withthe manufacturer's recommendations to the thickness and number of coats

specified.

39.7.6 Shanghai Plaster

The Contractor shall apply exposed aggregate rendering or "Shanghai" plaster intwo coats as follows:

(a) first coat 10 mm thick, consisting of cement and sand 1:3;

(b) finishing coat 10 mm thick, consisting of cement and stone chippings 1:1, withthe chippings mixed in one of the proportions shown in the table 39.3 below.Before the finishing coat has set, scrub off the surface to expose the

aggregate.

Table 39.3: Shanghai Plaster Chipping Mixes

Colour Cement

Stone Chippings

Dark Grey/ Light Grey/White

Marble ChippingsBlack/White

Dark MediumWhite

OrdinaryWhiteWhite

70%

60%

-

-

20%

-

20%

20%

-

10%

-

-

-

20%

100%

39.7.7 Premixed plaster

The Contractor shall:

(a) mix premixed plaster and clean water on Site with portable electrical mixer orother equipment according to manufacturer’s recommendations; use accurateamount of water to ensure effective mixing and consistent quality;

(b) store bagged premix mortar separately by types, off the ground in dry, well-ventilated and covered space; use material within manufacturer recommended

time limit;

(c) prepare substrate with tolerance of evenness +5 mm for internal concrete wall,block wall and beams and +3 mm for internal ceiling soffit;

(d) prepare substrate to be clean, free from dust, contamination, paint, oil andloose scale; dampen dry substrate before plastering;

(e) treat substrate with splatterdash or key substrate before application if requiredby manufacturer’s recommendations;

(f) not use mixes after initial set has taken place and not re-temper or reconstitute

mixes unless permitted by the manufacturer’s instructions;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 279/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  13/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(g) use experienced applicator to carry out the premixed plaster work. Employworkers and supervisory staff fully instructed and trained on the method ofpreparation and application in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations;

(h) apply cement based premixed plaster with trowel or spraying machine in

several coats. Application methods, thickness, number of coats and dryingtime between coats shall be strictly in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations;

(i) apply gypsum based premixed plaster with trowel or spraying machine insingle coat of thickness in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations;

(j) level half-set plaster with featheredge; scrape off surplus material and workfrom bottom to top of wall;

(k) allow drying time of 30-60 minutes in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations; sprinkle surface with clean water and smooth with hard

sponge float to remove trowel and featheredge marks in circular motion.

39.7.8 Preparation for Tiling

The Contractor shall:

(a) scrub the rendered masonry wall with water containing detergent to removecompletely all mould, oil, surface retarder and other materials incompatiblewith the bedding; rinse with clean water and allow to dry unless specifiedotherwise;

(b) survey the specified area for tiling when necessary to obtain a setting out point

for the tiles;

(c) set out all ceramic tiled wall and floor tiles on a grid reflecting the tile moduleand both surfaces shall be co-ordinated onto this grid, except where indicatedon the Employer's Drawings;

(d) make joints true to line, continuous and without steps;

(e) make joints in walls that are parallel to the main axes of the space or specifiedfeatures;

(f) keep cut tiles to a minimum; cut tiles shall be as large as possible and placed

in unobtrusive locations;

(g) where positions of movement joints are not specified, agree their position withthe Project Manager;

(h) take particular care in setting out the finished tiled wall surface alignment toachieve the dimensional requirements in accordance with the Employer’sDrawings prior to the construction of the background; and

(i) set out all critical tiling lines in situ before commencement of tiling works. Thesetting out lines shall demonstrate the Contractor’s understanding of thedesign intent for achieving tiling accuracy throughout the floor and walls. The

setting out line shall be reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 280/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  14/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

39.7.9 Fixing Ceramic Wall Tiles

Wall tiling shall comply with BS 5385: Part 1 for internal wall tiling and BS 5385: Part2 for external wall tiling. Tiles shall be fixed to render as follows:

(a) Thick bed method:

The Contractor shall:

(i) soak tiles, mixed from six boxes, in clean water for 30 minutes(minimum); stack to drain and fix as soon as the surface water hasdrained off;

(ii) damp the wall screed with clean water sufficiently to prevent it absorbingwater from the bedding mortar;

(iii) butter the back of each tile with cement and sand (1:3) or granite fines(1:3) and tap firmly into position so that the bed is solid throughout.

Thickness of finished bed shall be 5 to 15 mm;

(iv) make joints minimum 2 mm wide and maximum 3.5 mm wide unlessspecified otherwise, and maintain one joint width for each type of tile;

(v) make any adjustment to tiles within 10 minutes of fixing;

(vi) clean tiles and joints before bedding hardens;

(vii) grout up joints 24 hours (minimum) after fixing tiles; clean off surplusgrout as work proceeds; and

(viii) clean tiles prior to applying for a Completion Certificate.

(b) Thin bed method:

The Contractor shall:

(i) fix wall tiles, mixed from six boxes, using a bed of adhesive inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations; and

(ii) grout up joints using a proprietary grout as specified.

39.7.10 Fixing External Tiles to Concrete Splatterdashed Surfaces

(a) Thick bed method:

The Contractor shall:

(i) apply wall screed of (1:3) cement: sand to maximum thickness of 10mm. Allow the wall screed to dry off thoroughly;

(ii) soak tiles in clean water for 30 minutes, stack to drain and fix as soon asthe surface water has drained off;

(iii) apply mortar slurry of (1:3) cement and sand with water/cement ratio of

0.5 by weight to thickness of 10mm on the wall screed;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 281/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  15/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(iv) pre-fill the bedding surface of the tiles with mortar slurry before fixing tothe wall screed;

(v) affix the tile by trowel knock procedures; knock the centre of tile usingthe handle of a trowel first and knock all the edges of a tile till the mortarslurry flows out from the tile edges;

(vi) make joints minimum 2 mm wide and maximum 3.5 mm wide unlessspecified otherwise, and maintain one joint width for each type of tile;

(vii) make any adjustment to tiles within 10 minutes of fixing;

(viii) clean tiles and joints before the slurry hardens;

(ix) grout tiles minimum 24 hours after fixing tiles; clean off surplus grout aswork proceeds; and

(x) clean tiles prior to applying for a Completion Certificate.

(b) Thin bed method:

The Contractor shall:

(i) apply wall screed of cement and sand 1:3 to maximum thickness of 10mm; allow the wall screed to dry off thoroughly;

(ii) fix wall tiles to the wall screed using an adhesive reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager in accordance with the manufacturer’srecommendations; and

(iii) grout joints using an grout reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

39.7.11 Fixing Mosaic Tiles

(a) Thick bed method direct to concrete base:

The Contractor shall:

(i) lay semi-dry mix cement and sand 1:4 bed thoroughly compacted to therequired thickness (20 mm minimum) finished to the required levels andfalls;

(ii) pour cement and sand slurry over the bedding and spread and trowel 3mm thick;

(iii) coat back of sheets of mosaic tiles with cement slurry immediatelybefore fixing. Slurry shall be same colour as the final grout;

(iv) fix sheets of mosaic tiles and tamp firmly into bed, maintaining straightand regular joints; make joints between sheets equal to tile joints; and

(v) remove backing paper, complete final straightening and rub surfacecoloured grout as specified; fill joints and clean surplus grout from face

of tiles as work proceeds.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 282/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  16/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(b) Thick bed method to wall render:

The Contractor shall:

(i) damp the wall screed with clean water sufficiently to prevent it absorbingwater from the bedding mortar;

(ii) apply bedding coat of mortar 10 mm (maximum) thick consisting ofcement and granite fines 1:3;

(iii) coat surface of wall screed and back of sheets of mosaic tiles with slurryimmediately before fixing. Slurry shall be of   same colour as the finalgrout;

(iv) fix sheets of mosaic tiles and tamp firmly into position maintainingstraight and regular joint, make joints between sheets equal to jointsbetween tiles; and

(v) remove backing paper, complete final straightening and rub surface withgrout from face of tiles as work proceeds.

(c) Thin bed method:

The Contractor shall:

(i) fix mosaic tiles using a bed of adhesive reviewed without objection bythe Project Manager and in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations;

(ii) grout up joints using a proprietary grout with colour as specified or

reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

39.7.12 Stone Wall Tiles

The Contractor shall:

(a) fix stone wall tiles in accordance with section 29 (Curtain Walling) for heightsgreater than 1.2 metre above any structural floor level;

(b) fix stone using grade 316 stainless steel for all brackets and shims;

(c) use proprietary anchor bolts and studs, reviewed without objection by the

Project Manager, for all connections to the substrate;

(d) select bolts and all other materials to avoid bi-metallic corrosion, providinginsulating washers and bushes where necessary; and

(e) install fixings into granite with an epoxy adhesive, reviewed without objectionby the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 283/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  17/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

39.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

39.8.1 Hammer Test

The Contractor shall:

(a) test the adhesion between the wall finish and the substrate by tapping thesurface with a hammer for all rendered and tiled areas, including edges andcorners of bays; and

(b) where a hollow sound indicates poor adhesion, carefully cut out the defectivearea, taking care to avoid damage to the substrate, and relay the area. Testthe re-laid area again for adhesion.

39.8.2 Infrared Test

The Contractor shall:

(a) carry out infrared thermographic scanning by a specialist previously reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager for all external render and tiled areasafter installation; and

(b) submit test report within 4 months upon completion of external tiling.

39.8.3 Testing Stone and Resin Bond Tiles

The Contractor shall:

(a) confirm that the source of each stone and resin bond wall tile selected canprovide the quantity and consistent quality of material at the required rates of

production.

(b) confirm that source of each stone and resin bond tile complies with thefollowing technical criteria of the American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM):

C97 Density of material > 2,560 kg/m³C97 Co-efficient of water absorption < 0.4%C99 Modulus of rupture> 10.34 MPaC170 Compressive strength > 131 MPaC880 Flexural strength > 131 MPa;

(c) provide evidence of the quarrying and manufacturing capability including:

(i) quarry /manufacturing process;

(ii) availability of stone;

(iii) output of quarry;

(iv) output of processing plant;

(v) batching and numbering;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 284/322

General Material & Workmanship Specification  18/18 January 2011 

Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural Works  

Section 39 – Wall Finishes 

(vi) methods of storage;

(vii) future availability of stone; and

(viii) previous experience.

39.8.4 Fire Rating

The Contractor shall use wall tiles with the surface spread of flame Class 1 inaccordance with BS 476: Parts 6 and 7.

39.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

39.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual for wall finishesincluding, but not limited to, particulars of material manufacturers, quarry source ofstone, material finishes, wall finish composition, movement joints, expansion joints,adhesives, sealers, grouts and cleaning requirements.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 285/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

1/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

SECTION 40 PAINTING AND DECORATION

40.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of painting and

decoration which generally comprise:

(a) emulsion paint on plaster board /plaster;

(b) emulsion paint on render;

(c) masonry paint;

(d) textured acrylic paint;

(e) dust proof sealer to screed floors;

(f) epoxy paint to steelwork;

(g) micaceous Iron Oxide paint;

(h) Polyester Powder Coatings

(i) aluminium primer;

(j) zinc chromate primer;

(k) bituminous paint;

(l) knotting;

(m) stopping;

(n) rust inhibitor;

(o) sealers;

(p) wood preservative;

(q) polyurethane paint;

(r) gloss paint; and

(s) road marking paint.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(t) structural steelwork refer to section 22;

(u) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(v) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(w) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 286/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 287/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

3/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

(b) obtain painting and decoration materials from sources which have receivednotice of no objection from the Project Manager. All materials used shall berecommended by their manufacturers for the particular surface, conditions ofexposure, and are compatible with each other.

40.5 MATERIALS

40.5.1 Painting Materials Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) supply all proprietary brand materials in sealed containers each containing themanufacturer's brand label and printed instructions; destroy the tinsimmediately after use of the contents;

(b) where possible, obtain all the materials in any coating system from the samemanufacturer;

(c) store materials on Site or in the Contractors' workshops, etc. in cool, wellventilated, covered storage space.;

(d) label tins of paints for "External use" and for "Internal Use", "Undercoating"and "Finishing" respectively; and

(e) where flammable paints or solvents are used, no smoking shall be permitted. Appropriate signs shall be displayed.

40.5.2 Priming Paints

Priming paints shall be as follows:

(a) For synthetic finishing paints on internal and external woodwork, usealuminium primer to BS 4756, Type 1.

(b) For synthetic finishing paints on internal and external metalwork, use zincphosphate primer, metallic zinc-rich primer in compliance with BS 4652 Type 2as specified.

(c) For synthetic or non-toxic paints on galvanized metal surfaces, use etchingprimer with a zinc-chromate base previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager.

(d) For polyurethane paint on internal and external metalworks, use polyurethanered lead primer.

(e) For painting on structural steelwork use primers in compliance with section40.7 and section 22 (Steelwork).

(f) Sealers for concrete, plaster, masonry and the like shall be in accordance withthe manufacturer's recommendations, non-toxic, non-combustible, non-flammable and not harmful to lungs or skin. Clear dust sealer shall be used.

(g) Anti-mould liquid shall be fungicidal solution reviewed without objection by the

Project Manager.

(h) Water repellent liquid shall be silicone or other water repellent reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 288/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

4/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

40.5.3 Types of paints

(a) Emulsion paint shall be plastic, vinyl or latex emulsions of brands previouslyreviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(b) Alkyd resin based emulsion paints shall not be used without permission of the

Project Manager.

(c) Textured emulsion paint shall be acrylic based emulsion paint textured with afinely dispersed aggregate.

(d) Micaceous iron oxide (MIO) treatment shall be applied in compliance with BS5493 and Table 40.2. The paint manufacturer's recommendations in respect ofthe supply, storage, use and application generally of the paint system and inrespect of the cleanliness of painted surfaces shall be adopted.

(e) Anti-mould emulsion paint shall be acrylic based emulsion incorporating afungus resistant chemical previously reviewed without objection by the Project

Manager.

(f) Multi-colour paint shall comprise a base and hardwearing top coatincorporating a pigmented splatter coat used as recommended by themanufacturer and previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

(g) External textured paint shall be heavy-duty masonry paint incorporating fineaggregate filler and previously reviewed without objection by the ProjectManager.

(h) Fire retardant paints shall, when used alone or in conjunction with other paints

applied to combustible substrates in accordance with the manufacturer'stested system, achieve Class 1 spread of flame rating in compliance with BS476: Part 7.

(i) Unless expressly specified otherwise, all paint for internal and external useshall be synthetic paint of alkyd resin base combined with drying oils andpigments. Undercoats and finishing coat shall be of properly matching typeand the finishing coat shall give a hard gloss finish or as otherwise specified.

(j) Cold cure epoxy paint shall be Two Pack Type previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

(k) Polyurethane paint shall be of the Two Pack Type and part of a systempreviously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(l) Black bitumastic paint shall be tar base paint complying with BS 1070, Type B(quick drying). Black bitumastic coating solution shall comply with BS 3416,Type 1 for general purposes.

(m) Reflecting paint shall consist of white synthetic paint with a high gloss finishand a surface coating of fine grain reflective aggregate, applied at the rate ofnot less than 0.6 kg/m2 while finishing coat is still wet.

(n) Heat resisting paint shall be a heat resisting enamel paint previously reviewed

without objection by the Project Manager. Priming coat and undercoats usedin conjunction with the enamel finishing coat shall be similarly heat resisting.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 289/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

5/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

(o) Chemical resisting paint and thinner shall be resistant to attack by allcommonly used commercial paint acids and alkalis and previously reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager.

(p) Wood preservative shall offer complete protection against wood boringinsects, fungi, wood rot and decay. It shall be of a proprietary brand of exterior

grade previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager. Wherecompletely concealed or not decorated, it shall be colourless; where likely tobe exposed or be in contact with a painted finish, it shall be coloured orsuitable for over painting.

(q) Knotting for metal pipes coated with bitumen shall be a proprietary brand ofpatent knotting intended for this purpose and previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager. Knotting for woodwork shall comply with BS1336.

(r) Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardwood and fibreboard shall belinseed oil putty in compliance with BS 544 and tinted if required. Stopping for

external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size, well mixed.

(s) White spirit shall comply with BS 245.

(t) Linseed oil shall comply with BS 6900.

(u) Stain for woodwork shall be water or spirit stain previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager and suitable for use under varnish or waxpolish.

(v) Self-finished stains shall be a proprietary make previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager.

(w) Varnish shall be either:

(i) Copal Varnish of No. 1 Extra Pale quality for internal use only;

(ii) Synthetic Varnish of the Long Linseed Oil Alkyd type for internal orexternal use; and/or

(iii) Polyurethane Varnish for internal or external uses either moisture CureOil Modified One Pack Type, or Isocyanate Cure Two Pack Type.

40.5.4 Polyester Powder Coatings

Where specified as a finish to metal panels and structure, polyester powder coatingshall comply with BS 6496 and BS 6497, and be applied on an automatic continuouspaint line to a minimum thickness of 80 µm and maximum thickness to match hardcoating process. Colours shall be as shown on Employer's Drawings. Oneapplication company and one polyester powder coating supplier shall be used.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 290/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

6/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

40.5.5 Road marking paint

Road marking materials to be hot applied thermoplastic materials with eitherplasticised synthetic hydrocarbon resin or alkyd resin as the binder as specified.

(a) Type ’A’ - Standard hot applied thermoplastic material

(i) The material shall comply with BS 3262: 1989 except for the followingmodifications to the material properties:

•  softening point measured in accordance with Appendix E BS 3262:Part1 1989 shall be not less than 85 oC, and

•  flow resistance shall be such that a cone made and tested inaccordance with Appendix H to BS 3262: Part 1 1989 does notslump by more than 25 % after 48 hours at 40oC ±2 oC.

(ii) The material shall be Class B material as designated in paragraph 3 ofBS 3262: Part 2 1989.

(b) Type 'B' - Alkyd resin hot applied thermoplastic material

(i) The material shall comply with BS 3262: 1989 except for the followingmodifications to the material properties:

•  softening point measured in accordance with Appendix E BS 3262:Part1 1989 shall not less than 85 oC, and

•  flow resistance shall be such that a cone made and tested inaccordance with Appendix H BS 3262: Part1 1989 does not slumpby more than 25 % after 48 hours at 40 oC ±2 oC.

(ii) The binder for alkyd resin thermoplastic road marking materials shallconsist of maleic-modified glycerol ester of wood resin. The binder shallnot contain petroleum based hydrocarbon resins, tall oil resins, blends oftall oil and wood resin or similar derivatives.

(iii) The material shall be Class B material as designated in paragraph 3 ofBS 3262: Part 2 1989.

(iv) The skid resistance of the road marking materials shall be not less than45 measured in accordance with the method prescribed in Appendix J ofBS 3262: Part 1 1989.

40.5.6 Finish colour

The Contractors shall provide colours finished in accordance with BS 4800 orequivalent RAL reference. The exact shade shall be determined by colour matchsamples with a specular gloss factor of 30 % ±3 % when measured in accordancewith BS 3900: Part D5 using the 60° geometry method.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 291/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

7/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

40.6 SUBMISSIONS

40.6.1 Particulars of Painting and Decoration Works

(a) The following particulars of the proposed paint application shall be submittedto the Project Manager for review without objection:

(i) colour swatches;

(ii) samples prepared on the surfaces on which they are specified to beused; and

(iii) details of the source, type and properties of materials.

(b) The Contractor shall obtain a notice of no objection from the Project Managerprior to commencement of the applications for all painting and decoratingmaterials.

40.6.2 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall complete a section of each painting and decorationapplication including all preparation and base coats in a location previouslyagreed with the Project Manager as benchmarks. The Contractor shall obtaina notice of no objection from the Project Manager before proceeding with thefull application. The extent of each benchmark shall be as follows:

(i) 3 m x 3 m area or 3 m length of each application described andspecified.

(b) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for a

proposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any painting and decorationworks.

40.7 WORKMANSHIP

40.7.1 Painting in General

The Contractor shall:

(a) carry out painting in compliance with BS 6150 and BS 8000: Part 12;

(b) not carry out work in wet humid or foggy weather, direct sunlight, or onsurfaces which are not thoroughly dry, or if there is excess dust in the air;

(c) make good all holes, cracks and other defects in surfaces prior to painting;

(d) well brush each coat into the surface so that every part, including joints, junctions, angles, etc., is adequately covered but avoid excessive or uneventhickness of paint film, particularly at edges, angles and junction;

(e) before applying coatings, check that the moisture content of the substratewhich shall not adversely affect the completed work;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 292/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

8/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

(f) apply coatings only to clean, dry surfaces after any previous coatings havehardened, rub down smooth with fine glass paper before the subsequent coatis applied;

(g) apply successive coats of paint in slightly differing tints, and the intercoatingtime shall not exceed the limits recommended by the paint manufacturers;

(h) apply coatings with bristle brushes of suitable size previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager. Flat wall brushes shall be not less than 150mm wide;

(i) apply similar coatings in a consistent manner so that there is no visibledifference in the texture or brush stroke direction;

(j) not use mechanical spraying machines unless specified or reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager. When mechanical spray painting ispermitted, the priming coat (or first undercoat, if no priming coat) shall beapplied by brush;

(k) where required, prime and paint prior to fixing surfaces which would becomeinaccessible;

(l) remove all ironmongery, hardware, etc. before painting and replace withmatching screws (and plugs, if required,) of suitable size after completion.

40.7.2 Protect ion and Cleaning

The Contractor shall:

(a) protect surfaces, fittings, furniture, and the like by suitable means reviewed

without objection by the Project Manager;

(b) protect freshly applied surface coatings from damage;

(c) exhibit "Wet Paint", in English and Chinese signs and provide protectivebarriers where necessary;

(d) protect surfaces adjacent to those being coated;

(e) keep surfaces clean and free from dust during coating and drying;

(f) remove and clean off all splashes whilst work is in progress, make good any

damage, leave work clean and perfect on completion.

40.7.3 Preparatory Work in General

Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the descriptions of “Painting” work shallinclude all preparatory work required to produce a finish of the highest quality, freefrom all blemishes, brush marks, blisters, weeping, cracking, peeling, pitting, andcrevices, etc. 

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 293/322

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 294/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

10/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

(viii) fill surfaces to be painted with polyurethane paint or cold cure epoxypaint with epoxy filler reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

40.7.5 Complete Stripping of Existing Decoration

The Contractor shall:

(a) where indicated on the Employer’s Drawings, strip existing decoration which isin poor condition, or which is to be replaced by a different type of decoration;

(b) after stripping the decoration, prepare surfaces as required for the type ofdecoration to be applied; and

(c) if during the course of the preparatory work, any surfaces or substrates arefound to be unsound, report and obtain instructions from the Project Manager.

40.7.6 Application of Paints in General

The Contractor shall:

(a) mix and apply paints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations;

(b) thin paints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations andreviewed without objection by the Project Manage;

(c) apply the coating carefully so that the finished surface is free fromimperfection or brush marks;

(d) cut in neatly and clearly; do not splash or mark adjacent surfaces;

(e) ensure that the thickness of individual coats of paint and total thickness ofpaint systems are within the standard thickness recommended by themanufacturers unless otherwise specified;

(f) ensure that there is adequate ventilation for all painting processes;

(g) work primer into surface, joints, angles and end grain;

(h) ensure that priming coats are of adequate thickness and suit the surfaceporosity;

(i) apply priming coats on new work before the articles are fixed in position;

(j) apply primer to metal surfaces on the same day after they have been cleared;

(k) allow 'wash' or 'etch' priming coats to harden before applying subsequentpriming coats;

(l) apply undercoats in an even film over all surfaces; avoid uneven thickness atedges and angles;

(m) apply finishing coats in an even film over all surfaces; avoid brush marks,sags, runs and other defects;

(n) apply second coat within 48 hours of first coat where two hard gloss-finishingcoats are specified,;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 295/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

11/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

(o) rub down with medium/ fine glass paper between coats to provide key;

(p) on surfaces subject to mould or similar growth, wash down with one coat ofanti-mould liquid before preparation of surface for decoration; ensure thatsurfaces are entirely clean of old mould growth and spores;

(q) before applying cement paint to absorbent surfaces, thoroughly damp thesurfaces to provide even suction; use cement paints within one hour of mixing;and

(r) allow a minimum drying time of 24 hours between coats.

40.7.7 Health and Safety

The Contractor shall:

(a) wear respirators which supply clean air during paint spraying; and

(b) take precautions to avoid skin and eye contact with paints and their solvents;follow all precautionary measures as recommended by the paintmanufacturers.

40.7.8 Type and Number of Coats

Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall prepare and apply the type andnumber of coats and use primers, sealers, etc. as the following tables. Unlessotherwise stated, the treatment of internal and external surfaces shall be the same.

Table 40.1: Number of Paint Costs for Plaster, Render, Blockwork,Tarmacadam and Concrete

Type of treatment Number of coats

On new surfaces Redecoration of existingsurfaces

Emulsion paint One coat alkali-resistant wallsealer, 20-30 microns dry filmthickness. Two coats vinyl silk,30-35 microns dry filmthickness each.

Two coats vinyl silk, 30-35microns dry film thicknesseach.

Emulsion paint toplasterboardceilings

One coat polyurethane sealer,20-30 microns dry filmthickness. Two coatspolyurethane finish, 30-35microns dry film thickness.

Two coats polyurethane finish,30-35 microns dry filmthickness.

 Anti-mould acrylicemulsion paint

One coat thinned with water inaccordance with themanufacturer'srecommendations and two full(un-thinned) coats.

Two full (unthinned) coats.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 296/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

12/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

Type of treatment Number of coats

On new surfaces Redecoration of existingsurfaces

Masonry paint toConcrete

Treated with a liberalapplication of stabilizingsolution until the surface isstabilized. Once sufficientlystabilized proceed with thefinish coat of two full-bodiedcoats of smooth masonry paintin accordance with themanufacturer's instructions.

Treated with a liberalapplication of stabilizingsolution until the surface isstabilized. Once sufficientlystabilized proceed with thefinish coat of two full bodiedcoats of smooth masonry paintin accordance with themanufacturer's instructions

Waterproof Finishto Concrete

One coat DP bitumen/rubberlatex emulsion.

One coat DP bitumen/rubberlatex emulsion.

Multi-colour paint One coat recommended primerby brush. One binder coat and

one finishing coat by spray.

One binder coat and onefinishing coat by spray.

Synthetic paint One coat alkali resistingprimer, one undercoat and onefinishing coat

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat, as specified

External texturedpaint

Two coats. One or two coats, as specified.

Cold cure epoxypaint

One undercoat and onefinishing coat

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat as specified. (Note: Ifexisting finish is not cold cureepoxy paint, completely stripand prepare as for newsurfaces).

Pesticidal coating One coat. One coat.

Marking paint Two thick coats. One or two coats, as specified.

Reflecting paint One coat alkali resistingprimer, one undercoat of whitesynthetic paint, and onefinishing coat of white syntheticpaint finished gloss with finegrain reflective aggregate.

One undercoat as described fornew surfaces, if specified, andone finishing coat of whitesynthetic paint finished glosswith fine grain reflectiveaggregate.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 297/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

13/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

Table 40.2: Number of Paint Casts on Metal Surfaces

Type of treatment On new surfaces Redecoration of existingsurfaces

Finishes to exposed

structural steelworkincluding trusses,columns purlins etc.

Clean Mild Urethane

Polyurethane Resin Turpen-based Coating System formetal and steel surfacecomprising one coat ofprimer, and 2 coats of cleanmild urethane turpen-basedpolyurethane resin protectivetopcoat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishingcoat, as specified.

(Note: - If existing finish is notPolyurethane Resin Turpen-based, paint completely stripand prepare as for newsurfaces).

Synthetic paint One coat recommendedprimer two undercoats andone finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat.

Micaceous IronOxide paint (MIO)

Spray steel with a two-packepoxy zinc chromate primernot more than 2 hours afterblasting; the primer is appliedso as to ensure uponcompletion a dry filmthickness of 25µm and after24 hours the steelwork ispainted with two-pack epoxymicaceous iron oxide appliedso as to ensure uponcompletion a dry film

thickness of 100µm.

One finishing coat.(Note: - If existing finish is notMIO paint, completely strip andprepare as for new surfaces).

Heat resisting paint One coat recommendedprimer two undercoats andone finishing coat.

One finishing coat or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat, or two undercoats andone finishing coat, asspecified.

Chemical resistingpaint

One coat recommendedprimer, two undercoats andone finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat, or two undercoats andone finishing coat, as specified.

Polyurethane paint One coat polyurethane red

lead primer, one undercoatand one finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishingcoat, as specified.

(Note: - If existing finish is notpolyurethane, completely stripand prepare as for newsurfaces).

Cold cure epoxypaint

One coat epoxy red oxidechromate primer, oneundercoat and one finishingcoat.

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat, as specified.

(Note: - If existing finish is notcold cure epoxy paint,completely strip and prepare asfor new surfaces).

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 298/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

14/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

Type of treatment On new surfaces Redecoration of existingsurfaces

Black bitumastic One or two coats, asspecified.

One or two coats, as specified.

Notes:For coatings to structural steelwork also refer to section 22 (Steelwork);

For coatings to service pipes refer to section 44.10 (Painting and Finishing)

Table 40.3: Number of Paint Costs on Wood Surfaces

Type of treatment On new surfaces Redecoration of existingsurfaces

Synthetic paint Internally: One coatrecommended primer, oneundercoat and one finishingcoat.

Externally: One coatrecommended primer, twoundercoats and one finishingcoat.

Internally or externally:

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoat, as specified.

Polyurethane paint One undercoat and onefinishing cod.

One finishing coat, or oneundercoat and one finishingcoats, or two finishing coatsexternally as specified

(Note: If existing finish is notpolyurethane paint, completelystrip and prepare as for newsurfaces).

Pesticidal coating One coat. One coat.

Wood preservative One or two coats, asspecified.

One or two coats, as specified.

Stain Two or more coats, asspecified, to obtain approvedcolour.

Two or more coats, asspecified, to obtain approvedcolour.

Varnish Two or three coats, asspecified.

One or two coats, as specified.

 

40.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The Contractor shall:

(a) determine the film thickness in accordance with BS 3900 Part C5;

(b) compose the paint colour with the project samples in accordance with BS3900 Part D1;

(c) verify the specular gloss of the finish using the method described in BS 3900Part D5;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 299/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

15/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

(d) verify that the contrast ratio of the finish matches that of the project samplesusing the method described in BS 3900 Part D6;

(e) verify that there is no colour difference between the test sample and theproject sample using the method described in BS 3700 Part 8, 9 and 10;

(f) conduct the scratch test described in BS 3900 Part E2 to verify that the paintsystems perform as the samples previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager;

(g) conduct the falling weight test described in BS 3900 Part E3 to verify that thepaint systems perform as the samples previously reviewed without objectionby the Project Manager;

(h) conduct the cross-cut test in accordance with BS 3900 Part E6 to verify thatthe paint system complies with the requirements of classification O of the test;

(i) conduct the falling ball test in accordance with BS 3900 Part E7 to verify that

the paint system performs as samples previously reviewed without objectionby the Project Manager;

(j) determine the resistance to humidity of the paint finish in accordance with BS3900 part F2 and verify that the paint performs as the samples previouslyreviewed without objection by the Project Manager;

(k) verify that the resistance to artificial weathering when tested in accordancewith BS 3900 part F3 is equal to that of the samples previously reviewedwithout objection by the Project Manager;

(l) determine the light fastness of the paint system in accordance with BS 3900

Part F5 and verify that it is equal to the samples previously reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager;

(m) assess the resistance to fungal growth of the paint systems using the methoddescribed in BS 3900 Part 6. There shall be no fungal growth;

(n) verify that the resistance to heat when tested in accordance with BS 3900 Part6 is equal to that of the samples previously reviewed without objection by theProject Manager;

(o) evaluate the degree of blistering in accordance with the method described inB5 3900 Part H2. There shall be no blistering of the paint finishes;

(p) evaluate the degree of rusting of paint finish to ferrous metals in accordancewith BS 3900 Part H3. There shall be no rusting of the paint finishes;

(q) evaluate the degree of cracking of the paint finishes in accordance with BS3900 Part H4. The designation of size of cracks shall be class O;

(r) evaluate the degree of flaking of the paint finishes in accordance with BS 3900Part H5. The quantity of flaking shall be in accordance with classification O ofTable 1; and

(s) evaluate the degree of chalking of the paint finishes in accordance with BS

3900 Part H6. The degree of chalking shall not exceed classification O.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 300/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 

16/16 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 40 – Painting and Decoration

 

40.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

40.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Particulars of materials manufacturers for all visible finishes;

(b) Methods for preparation and application;

(c) Methods for carrying out repairs to typical minor damage that may occur; and

(d) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 301/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/6 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 41 – Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems

SECTION 41 FIRE PROTECTION AND FIRE STOPPING SYSTEMS

41.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of fire protectionand fire stopping systems which generally comprise:

(a) fire protection to all structural members;

(b) fire separation material to maintain fire protection integrity;

(c) fire stopping systems for all junctions and services penetrations in fire ratedwalls and floors; and

(d) cavity barriers.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(e) structural steelwork refer to section 22;

(f) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(g) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(h) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(i) architectural metalwork refer to section 35; and

(j) service pipes refer to section 87

41.2 NOT USED

41.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

BS 476 Test methods and criteria for the fire resistance of elements

of building constructionBS 5588 Fire precautions in the design, construction and use of

buildingsBS 5606 Guide to accuracy in buildingBS 5821 Methods for rating the sound insulation in buildings and of

building elementsBS 5889 Specification of one-part gun grade silicon sealantBS 8202 Coatings for fire protection of building elementsBRE CP7/77 Guide to Fire stops

Hong Kong Code of Practice for Fire Resisting Construction1996Hong Kong Fire Services Department requirements

Naval Engineering Standard 713PNAP Practice Notes for Authorized Persons

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 302/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/6 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 41 – Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems

41.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

41.4.1 Contractor’s General Responsibilit ies

The Contractor shall:

(a) be responsible for the provision and installation of the fire protection and firestopping systems based upon the requirements of the Specification:

(b) select appropriate materials, sizes, thickness, types and location of fixings ofthe fire protection and fire stopping systems:

(c) submit all materials, proprietary fire protection and fire stopping methods tothe Project Manager for review without objection; and

(d) provide documentary evidence to confirm that the proposals for fire ratingcomply with the requirements of the relevant authorities.

41.5 MATERIALS

41.5.1 Materials Generally

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide fire protection to all structural steel members as shown on theEmployer's Drawings. The complete fire protection system shall be basedupon the specific requirements all in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommended methodology;

(b) provide an intumescent coating system or other proprietary coating systemreviewed without objection by the Project Manager. The system shall includethe top finishing coat in a colour as specified on the Employer’s Drawings;

(c) provide additional fire separation where indicated on the Employer's Drawings,comprising a single sheet material, requiring a steel framework for support;

(d) provide a fire stopping system where pipes, cables, cable trunking or trays,ducts, fire dampers or other electrical and mechanical works pass through firerated elements, including fire rated walls and floors, masonry walls and drywall/lining walls, as well as at interfaces with existing buildings as a result ofthe Works;

(e) provide all fire stopping at movement joint locations as indicated on theEmployer’s Drawings;

(f) provide fire stopping system that include a proprietary fire resisting masticsealant, flexible fire resistant intumescent foam or a system reviewed withoutobjection by the Project Manager;

 

(g) cut fit and provide adequate support to boards at perimeter and around pipes,ducts, etc. and seal any gaps with a proprietary fire stopping material tightlypacked to prevent penetration of smoke and flame;

(h) install fire stopping material free from fibres, and chlorofluoro carbons or othermaterials known to be injurious to health.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 303/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/6 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 41 – Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems

41.5.2 Standards

(a) The fire protection and fire stopping systems shall satisfy the Hong Kong Codeof Practice for Fire Resisting Construction 1996, the Hong Kong Fire ServicesDepartment requirements and PNAP currently in force, and be tested by antesting body previously reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

(b) The fire stopping system shall provide fire resisting period (1 hour or 2 hourintegrity and 1/2 hour insulation) as required by the location, floor or wall typeand compartmentalisation of the Works in accordance with the Employer’sDrawings and BS 476 Parts 20 & 22: 1987.

(c) The fire stopping system shall have a low smoke and toxic gas emission whenintumescing as stated in Naval Engineering Standard 713.

41.5.3 Characteristics of Fire Stopping Material

(a) The fire stopping material shall be stable in an internal environments as

follows:

(i) summer 24 oC and 55 % relative humidity; and

(ii) winter 20 oC and 60 % relative humidity.

(b) The fire stopping system shall give an acoustic separation across the totalassembly. The average sound reduction shall be 48dB.

41.5.4 Structural Requirements

(a) The fire stopping system shall be able to accommodate all building structural

movements as stated in the Specification.

(b) Fire stopping systems to floor penetrations shall be designed to withstand aloading of 0.75 kN/m2.

41.5.5 Fire Rating

(a) The fire rating of the material shall achieve that stated on the Employer’sDrawings.

(b) The Contractor shall provide certification, prior to the Substantial Completionof the various parts of the Works in accordance to the Works Programme, that

the fire stopping system is installed in compliance with the Specification andwith the fire-resisting period as specified.

41.6 SUBMISSIONS

41.6.1 Particulars of Fire Protection and Fire Stopping Systems

The following particulars of the proposed fire protection and fire stopping shall besubmitted to the Project Manager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings illustrating the proposed fire protection and fire stoppingsystems and installation method;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 304/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/6 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 41 – Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems

(b) details of the source, type and properties of materials; and

(c) current manufacturer’s literature and relevant test certificates for all thespecified materials.

41.6.2 Samples

The following samples, as applicable of proposed materials shall be submitted to theProject Manager for review without objection together with the particulars referredabove before proceeding of the Works:

(a) 2 no. 300 mm long structural steel section coated with the coating system inthe required thickness. The coating system shall have been applied by theapplicator proposed for the Works to the background specified;

(b) 2 no. samples of each fire stopping materials; and

(c) typical detail for each type of fire stopping as required by the Works.

41.6.3 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall, following receipt of no objection from the ProjectManager of relevant samples and prior to commencement of fire protectionand fire stopping systems, construct and establish benchmarks at locations tobe determined by the Project Manager as follows;

(i) splice connections in steelwork, connection to concrete column, boltedconnection with other steel members;

(ii) typical detail for each type of fire stopping as required by the Works; and

(iii) typical service penetrations and surrounds.

(b) After the Project Manager has reviewed the benchmarks with no objection, thebenchmarks shall become the standard to which all subsequent fire protectionand fire stopping systems shall conform.

(c) In the event the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objection for aproposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any fire protection and firestopping systems.

41.7 WORKMANSHIP

41.7.1 Tolerances

The Contractor shall install the material to the position shown on the Employer’sDrawings within ±5 mm plan dimension from true position along its full length.

41.7.2 Workmanship Generally

(a) The Contractor shall fix the material to the substrate so that it does not move

from its position when the adjoining structure moves.

(b) The fire barriers shall be rigid or semi-rigid to prevent unauthorizedinterference or removal.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 305/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/6 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 41 – Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems

41.7.3 Fire Protect ion/ Coating System

The Contractor shall:

(a) prepare all steel surfaces which are to receive intumescent or other coatingsin accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations;

(b) provide documentary evidence to the Project Manager from the manufacturerthat the steel surfaces to be coated are suitable for the application and properperformance of the coating system prior to the application;

(c) apply the coating system in accordance with the manufacturer’s writtenrecommendations;

(d) apply the coating system in a composition and thickness appropriate for therequired fire rating;

(e) provide the top coat as a smooth finish with even thickness;

(f) apply the coating system under environmental conditions suitable for theapplication with particular reference to manufacturer’s recommendations onrelative humidity and steel surface temperature;

(g) repair the coating system where required, using the manufacturer’srecommended method which has received a notice of no objection from theProject Manager.

41.7.4 Workmanship of Fire Stopping Systems

The Contractor shall:

(a) apply movement joint fillers/sealant/fire stops in accordance with themanufacturer’s written instructions or recommendations;

(b) seal joints between block walls and concrete soffit, beams and other walls withthe proprietary filler and fire resistant mastic to prevent fire and smokepenetration;

(c) return fire stopping material along the length of the pipe, duct, cable tray, etcpassing through fire rated walls in accordance with the fire stoppingmanufacturer’s installation recommendations to the required fire performance.

41.7.5 System Co-ordination

The Contractor shall take into account the fire protection and fire stopping system asa whole, with all interface conditions and on-site dimensions, to ensure that the firestopping system is installed without alteration, unless otherwise stated in theSpecification or reviewed without objection by the Project Manager.

41.7.6 Finishing

(a) The exposed faces of materials shall be of a colour reviewed without objectionby the Project Manager.

(b) The material for fire stopping shall form a square, flush, solid and neat face tothe concrete or rendered blockwork profile. The face of the material shall notdeviate in form along its visible face during or after its installation.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 306/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/6 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 41 – Fire Protection & Fire Stopping Systems

(c) The Contractor shall finish fire stopping to floor penetrations to a similarstandard as the surrounding finished floor area and provide maintenanceaccess.

41.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

41.8.1 Testing

The Contractor shall certify that the application of the fire protection and firestopping systems complies with the statutory requirements.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 307/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

SECTION 42 SIGNAGE

42.1 GENERAL

This section provides detailed technical requirements in respect of new and

amendments to existing signage both illuminated and non-illuminated signs thatgenerally comprise:

(a) directional signs;

(b) emergency signs;

(c) lift signs

(d) name signs;

(e) directory signs.

(f) statutory signs;

(g) advice and warning signs;

(h) signs for back-of-house rooms; and

(i) other signs.

The materials specified below shall comply with the sections stated, unlessotherwise stated in this section:

(j) curtain walling refer to section 29;

(k) internal cladding systems refer to section 30;

(l) glazing, glazed screens, balustrades and handrails refer to section 32;

(m) linings, sheathings, drywall partitions and toilet cubicles refer to section 33;

(n) suspended ceilings refer to section 34;

(o) architectural metalwork refer to section 35;

(p) hard floor finishes refer to section 37;

(q) flexible floor finishes refer to section 38;

(r) painting and decoration refer to section 40; and

(s) electrical and lighting installations refer to sections 47, 48, 50, 51, 57, 59 and60.

42.2 NOT USED

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 308/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 2/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

42.3 RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

FSD Code of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations andEquipment and Inspection and Testing of Installation andEquipment.

BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures

BS 729 Specification for hot-dip galvanized coatings on iron and steelarticles

BS 1470 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purpose: plate, sheet, and strip

BS 1474 Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys forgeneral engineering purposes: bars, extruded round tubes andsections

BS 2989 Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and iron zincalloy coated steel: wide strip, sheet/plate and slit wide strip

BS 3111 Steel for cold forged fasteners and similar components

BS 3692 Specification for ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screwsand nuts. Metric units

BS 4533 Luminaires

BS 4842 Specification for liquid organic coatings for application toaluminium alloy extrusion, sheet and preformed sections forexternal architectural purposes, and for the finish on aluminiumalloy extrusions, sheet and performed sections coated withliquid organic coatings

BS 5135 Specification for arc welding and carbon and carbon

manganese steels

BS 5266 Emergency lighting

BS 5427 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steelstructures against corrosion

BS 6496 Specification for powder organic coatings for application andstoving to aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformedsections for external architectural purposes, and for the finishon aluminium alloy extrusions, sheet and preformed sectionscoated with powder organic coatings.

BS 6497 Specification for powder organic coatings for application and

stoving to hot-dip galvanized hot-rolled steel sections andpreformed steel sheet for windows and associated externalarchitectural purposes, and for the finish on galvanized steelsections and preformed sheet coated with powder organiccoatings.

BS 6561 Specification for zinc alloy sheet and strip for building

BS 6582 Specification for continuously hot-dip lead alloy coated coldreduced carbon steel flat rolled products

BS 7671 IEE Wiring Regulations for Electrical Installations buildings

PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its

alleviation

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 309/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 3/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

ISO 8501 Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints andrelated products (BS 7079)

BS EN 499 Specification for covered carbon and carbon manganese steelelectrodes for manual metal arc welding

42.4 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

42.4.1 Contractor’s Responsibilit ies

The Contractor shall:

(a) carry out the design of the signage based upon the Employer's Drawings andsubmit to the Project Manager for review without objection, including, withoutlimitation, the design of lighting, casings, cladding, moving parts, mediarestraints, structural support, electrical works and any adjustments required forbrightness, contrasts, illumination evenness, message clarity and prevention

of light leaks;

(b) prepare the Contractor’s Drawings suitable for manufacture and installationincluding, without limitation,  modification of existing signs where applicable,fabrication of new signs, interfaces, fixings, electrical components, circuitryassembly and fabrication details, including actual size drawings showinglettering spacing, pictograms and arrows for all signs; and

(c) submit the sign location and setting-out drawings to the Project Manager forreview.

42.5 MATERIALS

42.5.1 Signage Generally

(a) All fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with the appropriate andcurrent requirements of the BSI 4533, Code for Interior Lighting issued by theChartered Institute of Building Services (CIBS) Engineers.

(b) All emergency lighting fittings shall also comply with Industry Standard, ICEL:1001 and shall be marked with the ICEL certificate label.

42.5.2 Types of Signs

(a) Illuminated signs shall consist of internally illuminated metalwork boxes,translucent acrylic panels with a variety of messages, metalwork supportsystems, and accessories, all as shown on the Employer's Drawings.

The illuminated signage includes the following:

(i) directional signs;

(ii) emergency signs;

(iii) lift signs (to include integral down lighters throughout);

(iv) name signs;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 310/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 4/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(v) directory signs; and

(vi) advertising signs.

(b) Miscellaneous signs shall consist of metalwork panels, with a variety ofmessages, metalwork support systems, accessories, and pre-spaced self-

adhesive sheets with a variety of text, colours and dimensions, on smoothsurfaces of cladding, wall panels, appliances, desks and glass, all as shownon the Employer's Drawings.

The miscellaneous signs include the following types: 

(i) directional signs;

(ii) name signs;

(iii) statutory signs;

(iv) advice and warning signs;

(v) signs for back-of-house rooms; and

(vi) Other signs.

(c) Where proprietary systems are specified in the Employer’s Drawings, their useand fixing shall be in accordance to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

(d) All components of the signage shall be fully demountable and removable.

42.5.3 Dead Loads

Signs shall be capable of accommodating the following dead loads without anyreduction in performance as stated in the Specification:

(a) the signs' fixings and supports shall be accommodated locally without causingdeflection or movement; and

(b) vertical deflection of any member supporting a sign panel shall not exceed thespan divided by 500 under full loading.

42.5.4 Live Loads

(a) Signs shall be capable of accommodating the following live loads without anyreduction in performance. No fracture, dislodgement, permanent deformation,or deterioration of the subsequent performance of any part of the signs shallresult from them being subjected to sporadic loads based on the followinggeneral loads specified in BS 6180: table 2 part E:

(i) movement of the concrete slabs and loads imposed upon them;

(ii) all loads resulting from movement of the structure as a whole;

(iii) horizontal applied load actions arising from maintenance and cleaningoperations;

(iv) a horizontal uniformly distributed load of 0.75 kN/m at 1.1 m abovefinished floor level to all floor mounted sign types;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 311/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 5/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(v) a uniformly distributed load applied to the panel and casing of 1 kN/m2;

(vi) a point load of 0.5 kN applied to any part of the signs, except the acrylicpanel;

(vii) a horizontal uniformly distributed load of 0.75 kN/m at 0.17 m above

finished floor level for all floor mounted sign types. The signs shall,without any reduction in performance as stated in the Specification,safely resist an impact of 250 kg applied at speed of 1 m/s to theprotection rail;

(viii) impact loads or transferred loads, that occur during its service life,without deterioration and without sustaining irreparable damage;

(ix) additional live loads that may occur during the service life of the signs,including, accidental loads such as a person hanging from a sign; and

loads (i), (ii) and (iii) stated above may be separately applied. 

(b) The Contractor shall limit the deflection of structure to the span divided by 250or 15 mm (whichever is the lesser) under loadings.

42.5.5 Framework

The Contractor shall provide framework, which shall be common to all signs, ofextruded aluminium and polyester powder coated, or extruded aluminium withanodised finishes, as shown on the Employer's Drawings. 

42.5.6 Support System

The Contractors shall fabricate signs as a modular kit of parts in order tostandardise the relationship and detail. Signs shall be removable.

 

42.5.7 Fixings

The Contractors shall:

(a) use metric 

stainless steel bolts, screws, nuts and anchors unless specifiedotherwise;

(b) provide fixings within the aluminium framing components that are not visible.

42.5.8 Metal Panel Construction

The Contractors shall:

(a) manufacture sign metal panels in sandwich type solid core constructioncomprising metal pan outer skin on plywood backing with suitably balancedbacking sheet. The metal pan outer skin and, where visible, the balancingsheet shall be polyester powder coated as specified;

(b) use a single component type of moisture curing polyurethane adhesive tobond the backing material to the metal pan;

(c) protect the sign panels against corrosion after fabrication and prior toapplication of finishes;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 312/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 6/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(d) carry out all cutting and drilling of cladding panels and associated worksbefore the application of factory applied coatings. Site cutting or drilling shallnot be permitted;

(e) design the cladding panels so that they do not transmit any drumming noiseas a result of vibration, shocks stresses etc., by the use of sound deadening

material or backing material in all areas; and

(f) finish all exposed faces of metal in such a way that no exposed cut ends areleft unfinished.

42.5.9 Metalwork and Coatings

 All metalwork, and coatings shall be in accordance with section 35 (ArchitecturalMetalwork).

42.5.10 Sign Lighting 

(a) All signage lighting shall be installed in accordance with the provisions ofsections 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 57, 59 and 60 (Electrical).

(b) Ballast shall be properly secured within the illuminated sign compartment toprevent vibration and produce maximum sound attenuation. Noisy ballast shallbe replaced.

(c) The uniformity of the backlit, illuminated sign shall not exceed a ratio of 1:3minimum to maximum. The white foreground shall have an average luminanceof 200 cd/m2. The blue background shall have an average luminance of 5cd/m2. 

(d) For illuminated commercial signs, the illumination level of the whitebackground shall have an average luminance of 100 cd/m2.

(e) Signage with down light component shall provide an average of 200 lux atfloor level under the area covered by the beam angle of the down light.

(f) Housings shall be constructed so that all electrical components are easilyaccessible and replaceable without removing fittings from their mountings, ordisassembly of adjacent construction. Housing end plates, socket bridges,reflectors, wiring changes and ballast covers shall be die-formed of not lessthan 0.9 mm thick cold rolled steel unless specified otherwise or shown on theEmployer's Drawings.

(g) All lamp sockets shall be set so that lamps are positioned in optically correctrelation to all other components to avoid shadows. Lamps shall be mountedon rapid-start circuits with 12 mm of grounded metal, minimum 25 mm widewith length matching the lamp.

(h) All luminaires and ballasts shall operate within the temperature limit of theirdesign in compliance with BSI in the applications and mounting conditionsstated in the Specification.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 313/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 7/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(i) The Contractor shall provide electrical equipment within the illuminated signsunit which conforms with the following requirements:

(i) fittings shall comply with the requirements of the relevant BritishStandards, IEC Regulations, including but not limited to BS 4533 and BS5266;

(ii) illuminated signs, both with and without built-in ballasts or transformers,shall be suitable for direct mounting on building surfaces withoutdegradation or damage to either the illuminated signs, components orthe building surface;

(iii) terminal blocks for connection of the supply cables shall be adequate forthe size of conductor forming the loop-in wiring and shall incorporate afuse of suitable type and rating;

(iv) ballast for tubular fluorescent lamps shall have a maximum value ofharmonic complying with the column heading "Without H Marking" in

Table VII of BS 2818. Power factor correction shall be provided and shallnot be less than 0.95 lagging. Ballasts shall be vacuum impregnatedtype with class H insulation;

(v) ballast shall operate with no discernible noise;

(vi) ballast shall be high power factor, high efficiency, low loss type;

(vii) ballast shall be designed for single phase operation, 50 Hz nominal andoperate at the nominal voltages indicated on label, 220 volt or asrequired; and

(viii) signage with down light component shall provide an average of 200 luxat floor level under the area covered by the beam angle of the downlight.

(j) The Contractor shall install power supplies, battery packs and fire modeflashing modules for emergency signs.

42.5.11 Signage Lighting Reflectors and Trims

The Contractor shall provide reflectors and trims complying with the followingrequirements:

(a) Aluminium reflectors shall be anodised finished semi-specular as required.Minimum requirements of reflector finishes for interior and exterior serviceshall be as follows:

(i) aluminium reflector material shall be at least 99.9 % pure;

(ii) aluminium reflectors which are specified to be provided with a matt finishshall be made from low iridescence stock with a surface finish ofReflectomatt RFM-RM3 6 or equivalent in appearance and performance;and

(iii) the minimum weight of coatings shall be 0.008 kg/m² with a minimum

reflectance between 75 % and 85 %;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 314/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 8/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(b) Reflectors, reflector cones and visible trim of all lighting fittings shall be cleanand free from scratches and fingerprints.

(c) Reflectors shall be sealed to prevent any surface deterioration. The reflectorsshall not show stains from a methyl violet in alcohol dye spot test as proof ofadequate sealing.

(d) Reflectors shall comply with the following standards:

(i) BS 616 specular reflection 23 %;

(ii) DIN 5036 total reflection 86 %; and

(iii) DIN 5036 diffuse reflection 78 %.

42.5.12 Lamp Holders for Illuminated Signage

Fluorescent lamp holders shall be white urea plastic, contacts silver-plated

phosphor bronze.

42.5.13 Lamps for Illuminated Signage

(a) Lamps shall be generally fluorescent type with +80 rendering index, 5,000 K,and the maximum surface temperature of the tubes shall not exceed 40 °C.

(b) Lamp caps shall be suitable for the lamp holder provided.

(c) All lamps of a given type shall have identical characteristics, i.e. colour temp.etc., and shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.

42.5.14 Illuminated Signage Supports and Fixings

(a) Where fluorescent luminaires 1,200 mm or more in length are supporteddirectly by the conduit system, they shall be fixed to two conduit boxes, both ofwhich form an integral part of the conduit system. 

(b) Luminaires fitted with tungsten filament lamps and having metal backplatesshall not be fixed directly to a conduit box in which a thermoplastic material isthe principal load bearing member.

(c) Support of luminaires from cable trunking shall be by means of proprietaryclamps or brackets.

(d) Where luminaires are supported from the structure other than by the conduitsystem, the support shall comply with section 42.5.6. Where luminaires arefixed directly to the structure, the fixings shall be as specified in section 42.5.7.

42.5.15 Gaskets

The Contractor shall glue and mechanically fix all gaskets to their appropriatebackgrounds. All gaskets shall be manufactured from neoprene profiles inaccordance with the Employer's Drawings.

42.5.16 Acrylic

The Contractor shall use 5 mm thick opal acrylic for all illuminated signs and 5 mmthick translucent panel for other signs as shown on the Employer's Drawings. 

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 315/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 9/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

42.5.17 Self Adhesive Vinyl Film

(a) The Contractor shall provide cast vinyl films with a permanent acrylic adhesivebacking applied on various background surfaces. All texts or images shall becomputer cut as per typographies or graphics specified on the Employer’sDrawings.

(b) The Contractor shall properly clean background surfaces; apply all films to thebackground surfaces evenly, without bubbles, creases, distortion or any otherirregularities in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

(c) For illuminated signs, the film shall be a translucent type and thicknessapproximately 90 µm.

42.5.18 Screen Printing

(a) Where screen printed signs are required, the Contractor shall use non-toxicpaint appropriate to the receiving surface.

(b) Colour shall match the colour references given in the Specification.

(c) No bubbles, blemishes or drips shall be visible on the screen.

42.5.19 Skirt ings and Buf fer Rails

(a) Where specified, the Contractor shall fabricate skirtings to floor mountedsignage from stainless steel pressed sheet with plywood backing with backingsheet fixed to mild steel section sub-frame.

(b) Skirtings shall have continuous push fit black neoprene gaskets adjacent to

floor finishes.

(c) The Contractor shall fabricate buffer rails from 60 mm nominal diameter satinstainless steel fixed at specified centres to composite mild steel angles andplates to the support structure as shown on Employer's Drawings. Alldissimilar metal connections and fixings shall be separated with neoprenesleeves, liners and washers, as necessary.

(d) Skirtings and buffer rails shall also comply with sections 32 (Glazing, GlazedScreens, Balustrades and Handrails.) and 35 (Architectural Metalwork).

42.5.20 Finishes

The Contractor shall:

(a) provide factory applied finishes which are stable, fade resistant and notaffected by ultra-violet light or natural light;

(b) provide finishes which are durable, of uniform texture and colour, and resilientto the environmental and pollution effects as specified in the GeneralSpecification;

(c) repair minor scratches and blemishes with manufacturer's recommendedproducts and system, matching original finish for colour, texture and gloss.

Repaired coatings shall adhere to and perfectly match original finish;

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 316/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 10/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(d) treat welds, rivets, screws, and stiffeners, etc., that are not intended to bevisible so that there is no discontinuity of the finished surface appearance;

(e) leave no fixing screws, cleats, etc., visible on the exposed faces; and

(f) provide samples of all finishes for inspection by the Project Manager prior to

commencement of production manufacture. Colour and finish uniformity shallbe established on the basis of reference samples.

42.5.21 Colours

(a) The Contractor shall provide signs such that colours appear the same fromone sign type to another within the colour groups listed below:

(i) The illuminated directional signs, lift signs and name signs shall be of ablue film with white cut-out lettering and pictograms. The blue film shallbe either applied to translucent acrylic sheet or steel sheet as shown onthe Employer’s Drawings.

(ii) All emergency signs are illuminated and shall be green film with whitecut-out lettering and pictograms. The green sheet shall be either appliedto translucent acrylic sheet or steel sheet as shown on the Employer’sDrawings.

(b) Detailed Colour Requirements:

(i) Illuminated blue shall be, or be equivalent to, a blue film code 531 typeCutting Sheet Film from Nakagawa Chemicals Inc., applied to 5 mm opalwhite acrylic sheet with a white film code 711 applied to the internalreverse;

(ii) Non-illuminated blue shall be as or equivalent to a blue film code 531,type Cutting Sheet Film from Nakagawa Chemicals Inc.

(iii) Illuminated and non-illuminated green shall comply with BS 5252reference 14 E S3.

(iv) Illuminated and non-illuminated red shall be RAL 3020.

(v) Non-illuminated white shall be RAL 9016, while illuminated white shallmatch the opal white acrylic sheet.

(vi) Non-illuminated black shall be RAL 9005 except for hidden messagesigns which shall have a black background to match the acrylic sheet.

(c) The Contractor shall submit samples of all colours used as metal sheets andvinyl film on acrylic panels for review without objection by the Project Managerprior to ordering such material.

42.5.22 Proprietary Alumin ium Room Sign System

The Contractor shall provide the room sign system in compliance with the followingrequirements:

(a) Signs shall be anodised, extruded aluminium profiles with interlockingdovetails and in a modular system capable of interchanging.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 317/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 11/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

(b) Signs shall have an overall thickness not more than 6mm using flat facedprofiles and shall contain a concealed locking device.

(c) Signs shall have no end caps or frames affording the possibility to increase orreduce the height of the signs.

(d) The room sign system shall have flat faced profiles with the following sizes -10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60, 75, 90, 100 mm and convex faced profiles with at least20, 40, 80, 100 mm.

(e) There shall be label profiles to enable temporary messages to be incorporatedin the system.

(f) Signs shall be matt or gloss painted in metallic or solid auto-acrylic paint withmessages being silk screen printed.

(g) The system shall have signs capable of being wall mounted, screen mounted,partition mounted or door mounted.

42.5.23 Fire Rating and Combustib ili ty

The Contractor shall:

(a) compose all signage with materials which do not readily support combustionor give off noxious fumes, and are non-toxic and non-hygroscopic;

(b) make all elements of the signage non-combustible and free from fumeemission in the event of fire in compliance with BS 476 and comply with BS476 Part 3 Class 0 surface spread of flame; and 

(c) submit to the Project Manager for review test certificates that demonstratecompliance of all materials.

42.6 SUBMISSIONS

42.6.1 Particu lars of Signage

The following particulars of the proposed signage shall be submitted to the ProjectManager for review without objection:

(a) Contractor’s Drawings showing the dimensional and detailed fabrication

provisions intended to accommodate the construction tolerances ofsurrounding elements. The Contractor’s Drawings shall include full details ofinterface conditions;

 

(b) details of the source, type and properties of materials; and

(c) relevant and current technical literature of proprietary signs.

42.6.2 Samples

The Contractor shall provide samples of all materials and finishes in the specifiedcolours before preparing the Prototypes/Benchmarks for review without objection by

the Project Manager.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 318/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 12/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

42.6.3 Prototypes

(a) The Contractor shall erect, at location previously agreed by the ProjectManager, full scale prototypes of each signage type utilizing specifiedmaterials in compliance with this Specification, but not necessarily finalproduction techniques.

(b) The prototype shall be tested and reviewed in terms of quality, materials,interfacing details for accessibility by other trades, and workmanship by theProject Manager.

42.6.4 Benchmarks

(a) The Contractor shall install one complete unit of sign types as benchmarks forreview without objection by the Project Manager. Upon receipt of a notice ofno objection, the benchmarks shall become the standard to which allsubsequent signage shall conform.

(b) In the event that the Project Manager does not issue a notice of no objectionfor a proposed benchmark, the Contractor shall remove and construct a newproposed benchmark before proceeding with any signage works.

42.7 WORKMANSHIP

42.7.1 Tolerances

The Contractor shall: 

(a) restrict deviation in panel length, width and diagonal dimensions to a

maximum of 1 mm;

(b) provide flatness criteria of 1:1,000 gradient for all metal panel and acrylicpanels;

(c) after final processing, limit the deviation in flatness at any peak to 0.13 mmand the difference between adjacent peaks to 0.08 mm. Where bow toleranceand wave tolerance differ, the stricter requirements shall prevail. Direction ofripples shall be consistent;

(d) erect the signage such that it is aligned to the planning grid lines, established joint lines of ceiling, bulkhead and cladding as shown on the Employer's

Drawings;

(e) if differences occur between the Employer's Drawings theoretical planning gridline and the established joint lines to which the signage is to be related, theContractor shall notify the Project Manager and propose a solution. TheProject Manager would confirm the Contractor’s proposal or issue instructionsto resolve the discrepancy; and

(f) limit the deviation in actual width of any joint from the nominal width to no

more than ±2 mm. Any variation shall be equally distributed with no suddenchanges or steps. The misalignment between joints shall not exceed 2 mm.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 319/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 13/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

42.7.2 Dissimilar Metals

The Contractor shall:

(a) allow no chemical or electrolytic action to take place where dissimilar metalsand/or materials are used together. Attention shall be drawn to publication PD

6484 'Commentary on corrosion at bi-metallic contacts and its alleviation'. Thisis of particular importance where stainless steel, aluminium, and aluminiumalloys are used. The Contractor shall provide the necessary insulationwherever dissimilar metals occur at interfaces which precede the installation ofthe illuminated signs;

(b) finish all alloys similarly and obtain them from a single, identified source thathas received a notice of no objection from the Project Manager;

(c) provide a chemical or other written specification for the alloy proposedtogether with structural calculations to be reviewed without objection by theProject Manager; and

 

(d) isolate aluminium components from cementitious surfaces.

42.7.3 Fixing of Signs

(a) Fixings shall be suitably proofed against any corrosion likely to occur in theirposition of use.

(b) Fixings shall not be visible unless specified otherwise on the Employer'sDrawings.

(c) All visible fixings and fastening screws shall be countersunk with allen key

head painted to match the surface colour.

(d) Items that require accessibility or removal shall be fixed with screws, bolts andhinges.

(e) The fixings shall not damage anything being fixed or anything receivingfixings.

(f) Access panels shall be removable with screw fixings and retention clips, andremovable independently of any other panels.

(g) All fixings shall be used in strict compliance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

(h) No drilling of the concrete or steel structure or cladding panels shall beundertaken without prior permission from the Project Manager. If drilling ispermitted, surfaces shall be cleaned, leaving no burrs or damaged edges.

(i) All fixings to reinforced concrete elements shall accommodate the variableposition of steel reinforcement bars within the concrete. Reinforcement barsshall not be cut or drilled.

(j) The Contractor shall erect all signage to align in relation to the planning gridlines, established joint lines of floor, cladding system, as shown on the

Employer's Drawings.

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 320/322

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 14/14 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 42 - Signage 

42.7.4 Delivery and Protect ion of Signage

The Contractor shall:

(a) install all fixings to the true horizontal and vertical position.

(b) prior to Substantial Completion,:

(i) make good all damage on the signage;

(ii) remove all temporary markings, coverings and protective wrappings;

(iii) clean the signage thoroughly inside and out including all accessibleducts and voids; remove all splashes, deposits, rubbish and surplusmaterials;

(iv) use cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturers;and

(v) adjust, ease and lubricate moving parts to ensure easy and efficientoperation, including hatches, ironmongery, and appliances

(c) prior to Substantial Completion, apply protect after installation which shall becapable of removal and reinstatement for inspection as required.

42.8 INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

42.8.1 Testing of Illuminated Signs

The electrical elements of the signage units shall be inspected and tested inaccordance with BS 4533 and 5266, together with final physical inspection beforeenergising.

42.9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE

42.9.1 Operation and Maintenance Manual

The Contractor shall provide an Operation and Maintenance Manual including, butnot limited to:

(a) Location plans showing signage;

(b) Particulars of materials manufacturers;

(c) Procedures for typical components; and

(d) Recommendations for cleaning and maintenance.

42.9.2 Cleaning

The Contractor shall state maximum time, recommended frequency and method ofcleaning required to maintain performance. The Contractor shall ensure that the

materials stipulated for cleaning have no detrimental effect on the signage or onadjacent materials. 

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 321/322

 

General Materials & Workmanship Specification 1/1 January 2011Issue No. 5, Volume 2 – Architectural WorksSection 43 – Not Used

SECTION 43 NOT USED

7/24/2019 GMWS Iss.5 Vol2 Architectural Works

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/gmws-iss5-vol2-architectural-works 322/322